kia borrego manual

kia, the company

Congratulations! Your selection of a KIA was a wise investment. Itwill give you years of driving pleasure. Now that you are the owner ofa KIA vehicle, you’ll probably be asked a lot of questions about yourvehicle and the company like “What is a KIA?”, “Who is KIA?”,“What does ‘KIA’ mean?”.Here are some answers. First, KIA is the oldest car company in Korea.It is a company that has thousands of employees focused on buildinghigh-quality vehicles at affordable prices. The first syllable, KI, in the word “KIA” means “to arise from to theworld” or “to come up out of to the world”. The second syllable, a,means “Asia”. So, the word KIA, means “to arise from” or “to comeup out of Asia to the world”.

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

i

Thank you for choosing a KIA vehicle.When you require service, remember that your KIA dealerknows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech-nicians, recommended special tools, genuine KIA replacementparts and is dedicated to your complete satisfaction.Because subsequent owners require this important informationas well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it issold.This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manualthat provides important information on all warranties regardingyour vehicle.We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow therecommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operationof your new vehicle.KIA offers a great variety of options, components and featuresfor its various models. Therefore, some of the equipmentdescribed in this manual, along with the various illustrations,may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.

The information and specifications provided in this manualwere accurate at the time of printing. KIA reserves the right todiscontinue or change specifications or design at any timewithout notice and without incurring any obligation. If youhave questions, always check with your KIA dealer.We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoringpleasure and satisfaction in your KIA vehicle.

© 2009 Kia Canada Inc.All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic ormechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by anyinformation storage and retrieval system or translation inwhole or part is not permitted without written authorizationfrom Kia Canada Inc..Printed in Korea

Foreword

ii

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

I

Introduction

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety features of your vehicle

Features of your vehicle

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications & Consumer information

Index

table of contents

1How to use this manual / 1-2Fuel requirements / 1-3Vehicle handling instructions / 1-5Vehicle break-in process / 1-5Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster / 1-6

Introduction

Introduction

21

A010000AHM

We want to help you get the greatestpossible driving pleasure from your vehi-cle. Your Owner’s Manual can assist youin many ways. We strongly recommendthat you read the entire manual. In orderto minimize the chance of death or injury,you must read the WARNING and CAU-TION sections in the manual.Illustrations complement the words in thismanual to best explain how to enjoy yourvehicle. By reading your manual, you willlearn about features, important safetyinformation, and driving tips under vari-ous road conditions.

The general layout of the manual is pro-vided in the Table of Contents. Use theindex when looking for a specific area orsubject; it has an alphabetical listing of allinformation in your manual.Sections: This manual has eight sectionsplus an index. Each section begins with abrief list of contents so you can tell at aglance if that section has the informationyou want.

You will find various WARNINGs,CAUTIONs, and NOTICEs in this manu-al. These WARNINGs were prepared toenhance your personal safety.You shouldcarefully read and follow ALL proceduresand recommendations provided in theseWARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTICES.

✽✽ NOTICEA NOTICE indicates interesting or help-ful information is being provided.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNING A WARNING indicates a situation inwhich harm, serious bodily injury ordeath could result if the warning isignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates a situation inwhich damage to your vehicle couldresult if the caution is ignored.

1 3

Introduction

A020101AHM-EU

Your new vehicle is designed to use onlyunleaded fuel having a pump octanenumber ((R+M)/2) of 87 (ResearchOctane Number 91) or higher.

Your new vehicle is designed to obtainmaximum performance with UNLEADEDFUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emis-sions and spark plug fouling.

A020103AUN-EU

Gasoline containing alcohol andmethanolGasohol, a mixture of gasoline andethanol (also known as grain alcohol),and gasoline or gasohol containingmethanol (also known as wood alcohol)are being marketed along with or insteadof leaded or unleaded gasoline.Do not use gasohol containing more than10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline orgasohol containing any methanol. Eitherof these fuels may cause drivability prob-lems and damage to the fuel system.Discontinue using gasohol of any kind ifdrivability problems occur.Vehicle damage or drivability problemsmay not be covered by the manufactur-er’s warranty if they result from the useof:1. Gasohol containing more than 10%

ethanol.2. Gasoline or gasohol containing

methanol.3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

CAUTIONNever add any fuel system cleaningagents to the fuel tank other thanwhat has been specified. (Consultan authorized KIA dealer fordetails.)

WARNING• Do not "top off" after the nozzle

automatically shuts off whenrefueling.

• Tighten the cap until it clicks, oth-erwise the Check Engine light will illuminate.

• Always check that the fuel cap isinstalled securely to prevent fuelspillage in the event of an acci-dent.

Introduction

41

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 per-cent gasoline, and is manufacturedexclusively for use in Flexible FuelVehicles. “E85” is not compatible withyour vehicle. Use of “E85” may result inpoor engine performance and damage toyour vehicle's engine and fuel system.KIA recommends that customers do notuse fuel with an ethanol content exceed-ing 10 percent.

A020104AUN

Use of MTBEKIA recommends avoiding fuels contain-ing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%weight) in your vehicle.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) mayreduce vehicle performance and producevapor lock or hard starting.

A020105AUN

Do not use methanolFuels containing methanol (wood alco-hol) should not be used in your vehicle.This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-formance and damage components ofthe fuel system.

A020106AUN

Gasolines for cleaner airTo help contribute to cleaner air, KIA rec-ommends that you use gasolines treatedwith detergent additives, which help pre-vent deposit formation in the engine.These gasolines will help the engine runcleaner and enhance performance of theEmission Control System.

A020107AUN

Operation in foreign countriesIf you are going to drive your vehicle inanother country, be sure to:• Observe all regulations regarding reg-

istration and insurance.• Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-

able.

CAUTIONYour New Vehicle Limited Warrantymay not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance prob-lems that are caused by the use offuels containing methanol or fuelscontaining MTBE (Methyl TertiaryButyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

CAUTIONNever use gasohol which containsmethanol. Discontinue use of anygasohol product which impairs dri-vability.

CAUTIONYour New Vehicle Limited Warrantydoes not cover damage to the fuelsystem or any performance prob-lems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.

1 5

Introduction

A090000AEN

As with other vehicles of this type, failureto operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control, an accident orvehicle rollover.Specific design characteristics (higherground clearance, track, etc.) give thisvehicle a higher center of gravity thanother types of vehicles. In other wordsthey are not designed for cornering at thesame speeds as conventional 2-wheeldrive vehicles. Avoid sharp turns orabrupt maneuvers. Again, failure to oper-ate this vehicle correctly may result inloss of control, an accident or vehiclerollover. Be sure to read the “Reducingthe risk of a rollover” driving guide-lines, in section 5 of this manual.

A030000AUN

No special break-in period is needed. Byfollowing a few simple precautions for thefirst 1,000 miles (600 km) you may add tothe performance, economy and life ofyour vehicle.• Do not race the engine.• While driving, keep your engine speed

(rpm, or revolutions per minute)between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for longperiods of time, either fast or slow.Varying engine speed is needed toproperly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emergen-cies, to allow the brakes to seat prop-erly.

• Don't let the engine idle longer than 3minutes at one time.

• Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000km (1,200 miles) of operation.

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESSVEHICLE HANDLINGINSTRUCTIONS

Introduction

61

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

Seat belt warning light

Door open position indi-cator

Tailgate open warning light

High beam indicator

Light on indicator*

Turn signal indicator

Front fog light indicator*

ABS warning light

Parking brake & Brake fluidwarning light

Engine oil pressure warning light

4WD system warning light*

4WD LOW indicator*

4WD HI indicator*

Malfunction indicator*

Air bag warning light

Cruise SET indicator

Immobilizer indicator

Low fuel level warning light

Shift pattern indicator

DBC indicator*

❈ For more detailed explanations, refer to “Instrument cluster” in section 4.

Charging system warning light

Low windshield washer fluidlevel warning light*

Engine coolant temperaturewarning light*

ESC indicator*

A050000AHM-EU

Door ajar warning light

Key out warning light*KEYOUT

4WDLOW

4WDHI

* : if equipped

Cruise indicatorESC OFF indicator*

ESC

ESCOFF

TPMS (Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem) malfunction indicator

Low tire pressure telltale

2Interior overview / 2-2Instrument panel overview / 2-3Engine compartment / 2-4



22

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

B010000AHM-EU

1. Door lock/unlock button ....................4-162. Outside rearview mirror control

switch ................................................4-473. Central door lock switch....................4-164. Power window lock button ................4-245. Power window switches ....................4-216. Air vent..............................................4-887. Instrument panel illumination

control knob*.....................................4-498. ESC OFF button*..............................5-329. DBC button* ......................................5-3610. Power adjustable pedal

control switch*.................................4-3611. 4WD transfer shift knob*.................5-1912. Steering wheel tilt control* ..............4-3813. Steering wheel ................................4-3714. Fuse box .........................................7-4315. Hood release lever..........................4-2516. Fuel filler lid release lever ...............4-2717. Brake pedal.....................................5-2718. Accelerator pedal..............................5-919. Driver position memory

system buttons* ..............................4-3420. Seat...................................................3-2* : if equipped

OHM018001N

2 3


INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

B020000AHM-EE

1. Instrument cluster.............................4-482. Steering wheel audio controls* ......4-1243. Light control / Turn signals ...............4-724. Horn .................................................4-385. Auto cruise controls* ........................5-396. Wiper/Washer switch........................4-367. Driver’s front air bag.........................3-498. Driver’s knee air bag*.......................3-499. Ignition switch* or

ENGINE START/STOP button* ..........5-410. Hazard warning flasher ....................6-211. Audio* or Navigation* ...................4-12812. Digital clock ..................................4-11813. Climate control system* .................4-8414. Power outlet* ................................4-11515. Multi box .......................................4-11216. Shift lever .......................................5-1217. Aux, USB and iPod port*..............4-12518. Seat warmer switch* ........................3-819. AC inverter switch* .......................4-11620. Rear parking assist system

OFF switch*....................................4-6721. Parking brake pedal .......................5-2822. Brake pedal ....................................5-2723. Accelerator pedal .............................5-924. Passenger’s front air bag* ..............3-5025. Glove box .....................................4-111* : if equipped

OHM018002N


42

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1. Engine coolant reservoir..................7-15

2. Engine oil filler cap ..........................7-14

3. Brake fluid reservoir.........................7-18

4. Air cleaner .......................................7-21

5. Fuse box..........................................7-44

6. Negative battery terminal ................7-25

7. Positive battery terminal ..................7-25

8. Radiator cap ....................................7-17

9. Engine oil dipstick............................7-14

10. Power steering fluid reservoir ........7-19

11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .................................7-20

OHM018005N/OHM018004NB030000AEN-EU

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■■ 3.8L

■■ 4.6L

3

Seats / 3-2Seat belts / 3-17Child restraint system / 3-29Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system / 3-37



23

C010000AHM-EE

Front seat(1) Forward and backward(2) Seatback angle(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)(5) Seat warmer*(6) Headrest

2nd row seat(7) Forward and backward(8) Seatback angle and folding(9) Walk-in seat(10) Headrest(11) Armrest(12) Seat warmer*

3rd row seat(13) Seatback folding(14) Headrest

*: if equipped

SEATS

OHM038001N

Manual seat

Power seat

3 3


WARNING - Driver’s seat• Never attempt to adjust the seat

while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control,and an accident causing death,serious injury, or property dam-age.

• Do not allow anything to interferewith the normal position of theseatback. Storing items against aseatback or in any other wayinterfering with proper locking ofa seatback could result in seriousor fatal injury in a sudden stop orcollision.

• Always drive and ride with yourseatback upright and the lap por-tion of the seat belt snug and lowacross the hips. This is the bestposition to protect you in case ofan accident.

• In order to avoid unnecessaryand perhaps severe air baginjuries, always sit as far back aspossible from the steering wheelwhile maintaining comfortablecontrol of the vehicle. We recom-mend that your chest be at least250 mm (10 inches) away fromthe steering wheel.

WARNING - Uprightingseat

When you return the seatback to itsupright position, hold the seatbackand return it slowly and be surethere are no other occupantsaround the seat. If the seatback isreturned without being held andcontrolled, the back of the seatcould spring forward resulting inaccidental injury to a person struckby the seatback.

WARNING - Loose objectsLoose objects in the driver’s footarea could interfere with the opera-tion of the foot pedals, possiblycausing an accident. Do not placeanything under the front seats.

WARNING - Driver respon-sibility for passengers

Riding in a vehicle with the seat-back reclined could lead to seriousor fatal injury in an accident. If aseat is reclined during an accident,the occupant’s hips may slideunder the lap portion of the seatbelt applying great force to theunprotected abdomen. Serious orfatal internal injuries could result.The driver must advise the passen-ger to keep the seatback in anupright position whenever the vehi-cle is in motion.


43

Front seat adjustment - manualC010101AHM

Forward and backwardTo move the seat forward or backward:1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up

and hold it.2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place.Adjust the seat before driving, and makesure the seat is locked securely by tryingto move forward and backward withoutusing the lever. If the seat moves, it is notlocked properly.

(Continued)• When resetting the seatback to

the upright position, make sure itis securely latched by pushing itforward and backwards.

• To avoid the possibility of burns,do not remove the carpet in thecargo area. Emission controldevices beneath this floor gener-ate high temperatures.

WARNING - Rear seat-backs (2nd and 3rd row)

• The rear seatback must besecurely latched. If not, passen-gers and objects could be thrownforward resulting in seriousinjury or death in the event of asudden stop or collision.

• Luggage and other cargo shouldbe laid flat in the cargo area. Ifobjects are large, heavy, or mustbe piled, they must be secured.Under no circumstances shouldcargo be piled higher than theseatbacks. Failure to follow thesewarnings could result in seriousinjury or death in the event of asudden stop, collision or rollover.

• No passenger should ride in thecargo area or sit or lie on foldedseatbacks while the vehicle ismoving. All passengers must beproperly seated in seats andrestrained properly while riding.

(Continued)

WARNINGAfter adjusting the seat, alwayscheck that it is securely locked intoplace by attempting to move theseat forward or backward withoutusing the lock release lever.Sudden or unexpected movementof the driver's seat could cause youto lose control of the vehicle result-ing in an accident.

OHM038002

3 5


C010102AHM

Seatback angleTo recline the seatback:1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the

seatback recline lever.2. Carefully lean back on the seat and

adjust the seatback of the seat to theposition you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure theseatback is locked in place. (The leverMUST return to its original position forthe seatback to lock.)

C010103AHM

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)To change the height of the seat cushion,push the lever upwards or downwards.• To lower the seat cushion, push the

lever down several times.• To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever

up several times.

C010104AHM

HeadrestThe driver's and front passenger's seatsare equipped with a headrest for theoccupant's safety and comfort.The headrest not only provides comfortfor the driver and front passenger, butalso helps protect the head and neck inthe event of a collision.

OHM038004 OHM038048NOHM038003


63

Forward and backward adjustment The headrest may be adjusted forward to3 different positions by pulling the head-rest forward to the desired detent. Toadjust the headrest to it’s furthest back-wards position, pull it fully forward to thefarthest position and release it. Adjust theheadrest so that it properly supports thehead and neck.

Adjusting the height up and downTo raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).

OHM038006OHM038005

WARNING • For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrestshould be adjusted so the middleof the headrest is at the sameheight of the center of gravity ofan occupant's head. Generally,the center of gravity of most peo-ple's head is similar with theheight of the top of their eyes.Also, adjust the headrest as closeto your head as possible. For thisreason, the use of a cushion thatholds the body away from theseatback is not recommended.

• Do not operate the vehicle withthe headrests removed. Severeinjury to the occupants mayoccur in the event of an accident.Headrests may provide protec-tion against neck injuries whenproperly adjusted.

• Do not adjust the headrest posi-tion of the driver’s seat while thevehicle is in motion.

3 7


RemovalTo remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button(1) while pulling the headrest up (2).To reinstall the headrest, put the head-rest poles (3) into the holes while press-ing the release button (1). Then adjust itto the appropriate height.

Active headrest (if equipped)The active headrest is designed to moveforward and upward during a rear impact.This helps to prevent the driver's andfront passenger’s heads from movingbackward and thus helps minimize neckinjuries.

C010105AHM

Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)The lumbar support can be adjusted bymoving the lever. Pivoting the leverincreases or decreases lumbar support.

HNF2041-1 OHM038008OHM038007N

WARNINGMake sure the headrest locks inposition after adjusting it to proper-ly protect the occupants.


83

C010107AHM

Seat warmer (if equipped)The seat warmers are provided to warmthe front seats during cold weather. Withthe ignition switch in the ON position,push either of the switches to warm thedriver's seat or the front passenger'sseat.During mild weather or under conditionswhere the operation of the seat warmeris not needed, keep the switches in theOFF position.

The temperature setting of the seat ischanged as follows :

✽✽ NOTICEWith the seat warmer switch in the ONposition, the heating system in the seatturns off or on automatically dependingon the seat temperature.

WARNING - Seat warmerburns

Passengers should use extremecaution when using seat warmersdue to the possibility of excessheating or burns. The occupantsmust be able to feel if the seat isbecoming too warm and turn theseat warmer off. In particular, thedriver must exercise extreme carefor the following types of passen-gers:1. Infants, children, elderly or dis-

abled persons, or hospital outpa-tients

2. Persons with sensitive skin orthose that burn easily

3. Fatigued individuals4. Intoxicated individuals5. Individuals taking medication

that can cause drowsiness orsleepiness (sleeping pills, coldtablets, etc.)

CAUTION• When cleaning the seats, do not

use an organic solvent such asthinner, benzene, alcohol andgasoline. Doing so may damagethe surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seatwarmer, do not place blankets,cushions or seat covers on theseats while the seat warmer is inoperation.

• Do not place heavy or sharpobjects on seats equipped withseat warmers. Damage to the seatwarming components could occur.

Switch position Left (LO) Center Right (HI)

LOW OFF HIGHTemperature

OHM038009

3 9


C010108AHM

Seatback pocketThe seatback pocket is provided on theback of the front passenger’s and driver’sseatbacks.

C010200AHM

Front seat adjustment - power (if equipped)The front seat can be adjusted by usingthe control switches located on the out-side of the seat cushion. Before driving,adjust the seat to the proper position soas to easily control the steering wheel,pedals and switches on the instrumentpanel.

WARNING - Seatbackpockets

Do not put heavy or sharp objectsin the seatback pockets. In an acci-dent they could come loose fromthe pocket and injure vehicle occu-pants.

OHM038010 WARNINGThe power seat is operable with theignition OFF.Therefore, children should never beleft unattended in the vehicle.

CAUTION• The power seat is driven by an

electric motor. Stop operatingonce the adjustment is complet-ed. Excessive operation maydamage the electrical equipment.

• When in operation, the powerseat consumes a large amount ofelectrical power. To preventunnecessary charging systemdrain, don’t adjust the power seatlonger than necessary while theengine is not running.

• Do not operate two or more powerseat control switches at the sametime. Doing so may result inpower seat motor or electricalcomponent malfunction.


103

C010201AHM

Forward and backwardPush the control switch forward or back-ward to move the seat to the desiredposition. Release the switch once theseat reaches the desired position.

C010202AHM

Seatback anglePush the control switch forward or back-ward to move the seatback to the desiredangle. Release the switch once the seatreaches the desired position.

C010203AHM

Seat cushion height (for driver’s seat)Pull the front portion of the control switchup to raise or down to lower the front partof the seat cushion. Pull the rear portionof the control switch up to raise or downto lower the rear part of the seat cushion.Release the switch once the seat reach-es the desired position.

OHM038011L OHM038012L OHM038013L

3 11


Rear seat adjustmentC010301AHM

Forward and backward (2nd row seat)To move the seat forward or backward:1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment lever

and hold it.2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.3. Release the lever and make sure the

seat is locked in place.Adjust the seat before driving, and makesure the seat is locked securely by try-ing to move forward and backward with-out using the lever. If the seat moves, itis not locked properly.

C010302AHM

Seatback angleTo recline the seatback:1. Pull up the seatback recline lever.2. Hold the lever and adjust the seatback

of the seat to the position you desire.3. Release the lever and make sure the

seatback is locked in place. (The leverMUST return to its original position forthe seatback to lock.)

C010303AHM

HeadrestThe rear seat(s) is equipped with head-rests in all the seating positions for theoccupant's safety and comfort.The headrest not only provides comfortfor passengers, but also helps protect thehead and neck in the event of a collision.

OHM038015N OHM038016N OHM038049N

WARNINGDo not put your hands underneaththe seat while adjusting it.


123

Adjusting the height up and downTo raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).

RemovalTo remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button(1) while pulling the headrest up (2).To reinstall the headrest, put the head-rest poles (3) into the holes while pessingthe release button (1). Then adjust it tothe appropriate height.

OHM038018N

WARNINGMake sure the headrest locks inposition after adjusting it to proper-ly protect the occupants.

OHM038017

WARNING• For maximum effectiveness in

case of an accident, the headrestshould be adjusted so the middleof the headrest is at the sameheight of the center of gravity ofan occupant's head. Generally,the center of gravity of most peo-ple's head is similar with theheight of the top of their eyes.Also adjust the headrest as closeto your head as possible. For thisreason, the use of a cushion thatholds the body away from theseatback is not recommended.

• Do not operate the vehicle withthe headrests removed. Severeinjury to an occupant may occurin the event of an accident.Headrests may provide protec-tion against severe neck injurieswhen properly adjusted.

3 13


C010304AHM

Armrest (2nd row seat)To use the armrest, pull the strap (1) for-ward from the seatback.

Cup holderTo use the cup holder, push the button(2). Close the cover after use.

C010305AHM

Seat warmer (2nd row, if equipped)The seat warmers are provided to warmthe rear seats during cold weather. Withthe ignition switch in the ON position,push either of the switches to warm theleft or right side of the seat.During mild weather or under conditionswhere the operation of the seat warmeris not needed, keep the switches in theOFF state.

• The seat warmer defaults to the OFFstate whenever the ignition switch isturned on.

✽✽ NOTICEWith the seat warmer switch in the ONstate, the heating system in the seatturns off or on automatically dependingon the seat temperature.

CAUTION• When cleaning the seats, do not

use an organic solvent such asthinner, benzene, alcohol andgasoline. Doing so may damagethe surface of the heater or seats.

• To prevent overheating the seatwarmer, do not place blankets,cushions or seat covers on theseats while the seat warmer is inoperation.

• Do not place heavy or sharpobjects on seats equipped withseat warmers. Damage to the seatwarming components could occur.

• Always turn off the seat warmerwhen not in use.

OHM038019A OHM038021


143

C010306AHM

Walk-in seat (2nd row seat)To get in or out of the 3rd row seat, pullup the walk-in lever on the 2nd row seat-back. The 2nd row seatback will fold andthe seat will slide forward.Move the seat to the farthest forwardposition. After getting in or out, slide the2nd row seat to the farthest rearwardposition and pull the seatback firmlybackward until it clicks into place. Makesure that the seat is locked in place.

C010307AHM

Folding the rear seatThe rear seatbacks can be folded to facil-itate carrying long items or to increasethe luggage capacity of the vehicle.

To fold down the rear seatback:1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the

pocket between the rear seatback andcushion, and insert the rear seat beltwebbing in the guide to prevent theseat belt from being damaged.

2. Set the front (or 2nd row) seatback tothe upright position and if necessary,slide the front (or 2nd row) seat for-ward.

3.Lower the rear headrests to the lowestposition.

WARNING The purpose of the fold-down rearseatbacks is to allow you to carrylonger objects that could not beaccommodated in the cargo area.Never allow passengers sit on topof the folded down seatback whilethe vehicle is moving. This is not aproper seating position and no seatbelts are available for use.

(Continued)

(Continued)This could result in serious injuryor death in case of an accident orsudden stop. Objects carried on thefolded down seatback should notextend higher than the top of thefront seatbacks. Doing this couldallow cargo to slide forward andcause injury or damage during sud-den stops.

OHM038022N

WARNING• Never attempt to adjust the seat

while the vehicle is moving or the2nd row seat is occupied as theseat may suddenly move andcause the passenger on the seatto be injured.

• Do not put your hands under-neath the seat while adjusting it.

3 15


4.Pull on the seatback folding lever, thenfold the seat toward the front of thevehicle. When you return the seatbackto its upright position, always be sure ithas locked into position by pushing onthe top of the seatback.

5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull theseatback backward by pulling on thefolding lever. Pull the seatback firmlyuntil it clicks into place. Make sure theseatback is locked in place.

6. Return the rear seat belt to the properposition.

WARNING When you return the rear seatbackto its upright position after beingfolded down:Be careful not to damage the seatbelt webbing or buckle. Do notallow the seat belt webbing orbuckle to get caught or pinched inthe rear seat. Ensure that the seat-back is completely locked into itsupright position by pushing on thetop of the seatback. Otherwise, inan accident or sudden stop, theseat could fold down and allowcargo to enter the passenger com-partment, which could result inserious injury or death.

OHM038025N

OHM038026

■ 2nd row seat

■ 3rd row seatOHM038023N

OHM038024

■ 2nd row seat

■ 3rd row seat


163

CAUTION - Rear seat beltsWhen returning the rear (2nd and/or3rd row) seatbacks to the uprightposition, remember to return therear shoulder belts to their properposition. Routing the seat belt web-bing through the rear seat beltguides will help keep the belts frombeing trapped behind or under theseats.

CAUTION - Damaging rearseat belt buckles

When you fold the rear (2nd and/or3rd row) seatback, insert the bucklein the pocket between the rear seat-back and cushion. Doing so canprevent the buckle from being dam-aged by the rear seatback.

WARNING - Uprighting seatWhen you return the seatback to itsupright position, hold the seatbackand return it slowly. If the seatbackis returned without holding it, theback of the seat could spring for-ward resulting in injury caused bybeing struck by the seatback.

WARNING - Cargo loadingMake sure the engine is off, theautomatic transmission is in P(Park) and the parking brake issecurely applied whenever loadingor unloading cargo. Failure to takethese steps may allow the vehicleto move if the shift lever is inadver-tently moved to another position.

WARNING - CargoCargo should always be secured toprevent it from being thrown aboutthe vehicle in a collision and caus-ing injury to the vehicle occupants.Do not place objects in the rear(2nd and/or 3rd row) seats, sincethey cannot be properly securedand may hit the front seat occu-pants in a collision.

OUN026140

WARNING - 3rd row seatThe headrest on the 3rd row seatshould be adjusted so the middle ofthe headrest is at the same heightof the top of the occupant's eyes.If the tailgate is pushed down toclose it when a passenger's head isnot against a properly adjustedheadrest or a tall person is seated,the tailgate may hit the occupant'shead, which could cause injury.

3 17


C020100AHM

Seat belt restraint system

SEAT BELTS

WARNING• For maximum restraint system

protection, the seat belts mustalways be used whenever thevehicle is moving.

• Seat belts are most effectivewhen seatbacks are in theupright position.

• Children age 12 and under mustalways be properly restrained inthe rear seat. Never allow chil-dren to ride in the front passen-ger seat. If a child over 12 mustbe seated in the front seat, he/shemust be properly belted and theseat should be moved as far backas possible.

• Never wear the shoulder beltunder your arm or behind yourback. An improperly positionedshoulder belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash. The shoulderbelt should be positioned midwayover your shoulder across yourcollarbone.

(Continued)

WARNINGSeat belts are designed to bearupon the bony structure of thebody, and should be worn lowacross the front of the pelvis or thepelvis, chest and shoulders, asapplicable; wearing the lap sectionof the belt across the abdominalarea must be avoided.Seat belts should be adjusted asfirmly as possible, consistent withcomfort, to provide the protectionfor which they have been designed.A slack belt will greatly reduce theprotection afforded to the wearer.

(Continued)

(Continued)Care should be taken to avoid con-tamination of the webbing with pol-ishes, oils and chemicals, and par-ticularly battery acid. Cleaning maysafely be carried out using mildsoap and water. The belt should bereplaced if webbing becomesfrayed, contaminated or damaged.It is essential to replace the entireassembly after it has been worn ina severe impact even if damage tothe assembly is not obvious. Beltsshould not be worn with strapstwisted. Each belt assembly mustonly be used by one occupant; it isdangerous to put a belt around achild being carried on the occu-pant's lap.

WARNINGNo modifications or additionsshould be made by the user whichwill either prevent the seat beltadjusting devices from operating toremove slack, or prevent the seatbelt assembly from being adjustedto remove slack.

(Continued)• Avoid wearing twisted seat belts.

A twisted belt can't do its jobwell. In a collision, it could evencut into you. Be sure the beltwebbing is straight and not twist-ed.

• Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. If the beltwebbing or hardware is dam-aged, replace it.


183

C020101AHM-EU

Seat belt warningAs a reminder to the driver, the seat beltwarning light will blink for approximately6 seconds each time you turn the ignitionswitch ON regardless of belt fastening.

If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedwhen the ignition switch is turned on, theseat belt warning light and the seat beltwarning chime will operate for approxi-mately 6 seconds. But if it is fastenedwithin the 6 seconds, the warning lightwill blink till the 6 seconds and the warn-ing chime will turn off immediately.If the driver's seat belt is disconnectedafter the ignition switch is turned to theON position, the seat belt warning lightwill blink for approximately 6 seconds.But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds,the warning light will turn off immediately.If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h(6 mph), the seat belt warning light andchime will operate for approximately 11times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and24 seconds off until the belt is fastenedor the vehicle speed decreases below 5km/h (3 mph).

C020102BHM-EU

Seat belt - Driver's 3-point systemwith emergency locking retractorTo fasten your seat belt:To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of theretractor and insert the metal tab (1) intothe buckle (2). There will be an audible"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to theproper length only after the lap belt por-tion is adjusted manually so that it fitssnugly around your hips. If you lean for-ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt willextend and let you move around. If thereis a sudden stop or impact, however, thebelt will lock into position. It will also lockif you try to lean forward too quickly.

1GQA2083 B180A01NF-1

3 19


✽✽ NOTICEIf you are not able to pull out the seatbelt from the retractor, firmly pull thebelt out and release it. Then you will beable to pull the belt out smoothly.

Height adjustmentYou can adjust the height of the shoulderbelt anchor to one of the 5 positions formaximum comfort and safety.The height of the adjusting seat beltshould not be too near your neck. Theshoulder portion should be adjusted sothat it lies across your chest and midwayover your shoulder near the door and notyour neck.

To adjust the height of the seat beltanchor, lower or raise the height adjusterinto an appropriate position.To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1).To lower it, push it down (3) while press-ing the height adjuster button (2).Release the button to lock the anchorinto position. Try sliding the heightadjuster to make sure that it has lockedinto position.

OHM038027

Front seat

WARNING• Verify that the shoulder belt

anchor is locked into position atthe appropriate height. Neverposition the shoulder belt acrossyour neck or face. Improperlypositioned seat belts can causeserious injuries in an accident.

• Failure to replace seat belts afteran accident could leave you withdamaged seat belts that will notprovide protection in the event ofanother collision leading to per-sonal injury or death. Replaceyour seat belts after being in anaccident as soon as possible.


203

C020106AUN

Seat belts - Front passenger and rearseat 3-point system with combinationlocking retractorTo fasten your seat belt: Combination retractor type seat belts areinstalled in the rear seat positions to helpaccommodate the installation of childrestraint systems. Although a combina-tion retractor is also installed in the frontpassenger seat position, it is stronglyrecommended that children always beseated in the rear seat. NEVER placeany infant restraint system in the frontseat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines the fea-tures of both an emergency lockingretractor seat belt and an automatic lock-ing retractor seat belt. To fasten your seatbelt, pull it out of the retractor and insertthe metal tab into the buckle. There willbe an audible "click" when the tab locksinto the buckle. When not securing achild restraint, the seat belt operates inthe same way as the driver's seat belt(Emergency Locking Retractor Type). Itautomatically adjusts to the proper lengthonly after the lap belt portion of the seatbelt is adjusted manually so that it fitssnugly around your hips.

When the seat belt is fully extended fromthe retractor to allow the installation of achild restraint system, the seat belt oper-ation changes to allow the belt to retract,but not to extend (Automatic LockingRetractor Type). Refer to “Using a childrestraint system” in this section.

✽✽ NOTICEAlthough the combination retractorprovides the same level of protection forseated passengers in either emergencyor automatic locking modes, it is recom-mended that seated passengers use theemergency locking feature for improvedconvenience. The automatic lockingfunction is intended to facilitate childrestraint installation. To convert fromthe automatic locking feature to theemergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fullyretract.

B200A02NF

WARNINGYou should place the lap belt por-tion as low as possible and snuglyacross your hips, not on your waist.If the lap belt is located too high onyour waist, it may increase thechance of injury in the event of acollision. Both arms should not beunder or over the belt. Rather, oneshould be over and the other under,as shown in the illustration.Never wear the seat belt under thearm that is near the door.

3 21


When using the rear center seat belt, thebuckle with the “CENTER” mark must beused.

To release the seat belt:The seat belt is released by pressing therelease button (1) in the locking buckle.When it is released, the belt should auto-matically draw back into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt tobe sure it is not twisted, then try again.

CAUTIONDo NOT fold down the left portion ofthe second row seat back when thesecond row center seat belt is buck-led. ALWAYS UNBUCKLE the sec-ond row center seat belt beforefolding down the left portion of thesecond row seat back. If the secondrow center seat belt is buckledwhen the left portion of the secondrow seat back is folded down, dis-tortion and damage to the top por-tion of the seat back and seat beltgarnish may result, causing theseat back to lock into the foldeddown position.

OHM038028N B210A01NF-1


223

C020105AEN

Stowing the rear seat belt • The rear seat belt buckles can be

stowed in the pocket between the rearseatback and cushion when not in use.

• Routing the seat belt webbing throughthe rear seat belt guides will help keepthe belts from being trapped behind orunder the seats.

C020200BHM-EU

Pre-tensioner seat beltYour vehicle is equipped with driver's andfront passenger's pre-tensioner seatbelts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner isto make sure that the seat belts fit tightlyagainst the occupant's body in certainfrontal collisions (or side collisions orrollovers). The pre-tensioner seat beltsmay be activated in crashes where thefrontal collision (or side collision orrollover) is severe enough.

OHM038029N

OHM038030

■ 2nd row seat

■ 3rd row seat OHM038031

OHM038032

■ 2nd row seat

■ 3rd row seat OEN036300

3 23


When the vehicle stops suddenly, or ifthe occupant tries to lean forward tooquickly, the seat belt retractor will lockinto position. In certain frontal collisions(or side collisions or rollovers), the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seatbelt into tighter contact against the occu-pant's body.If the system senses excessive seat belttension on the driver or passenger's seatbelt when the pre-tensioner activates, theload limiter inside the pre-tensioner willrelease some of the pressure on theaffected seat belt.

✽✽ NOTICEThe pre-tensioner will activate not onlyin a frontal collision but also in a sidecollision or rollover, if the vehicle isequipped with a side or curtain air bag.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-sists mainly of the following components.Their locations are shown in the illustra-tion:1. SRS air bag warning light2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module

WARNINGTo obtain maximum benefit from apre-tensioner seat belt:1. The seat belt must be worn cor-

rectly and adjusted to the properposition. Please read and followall of the important informationand precautions about your vehi-cle’s occupant safety features –including seat belts and air bags– that are provided in this manu-al.

2. Be sure you and your passen-gers always wear seat belts prop-erly.

E4BLA300


243

✽✽ NOTICE• Both the driver's and front passen-

ger's pre-tensioner seat belts may beactivated in certain frontal collisions(or side collisions or rollovers).The pre-tensioners will not be activat-ed if the seat belts are not being wornat the time of the collision.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts areactivated, a loud noise may be heardand fine dust, which may appear to besmoke, may be visible in the passengercompartment. These are normal oper-ating conditions and are not haz-ardous.

• Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and shouldnot be breathed for prolonged peri-ods. Wash all exposed skin areas thor-oughly after an accident in which thepre-tensioner seat belts were activat-ed.

✽✽ NOTICEBecause the sensor that activates theSRS air bag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bagwarning light ( ) on the instrumentpanel will illuminate for approximately6 seconds after the ignition switch hasbeen turned to the ON position, andthen it should turn off.

CAUTIONIf the pre-tensioner seat belt is notworking properly, this warning lightwill illuminate even if there is nomalfunction of the SRS air bag. Ifthe SRS air bag warning light doesnot illuminate when the ignitionswitch is turned ON, or if it remainsilluminated after illuminating forapproximately 6 seconds, or if itilluminates while the vehicle isbeing driven, please have anauthorized KIA dealer inspect thepre-tensioner seat belt and SRS airbag system as soon as possible.

WARNING• Pre-tensioners are designed to

operate only one time. After acti-vation, pre-tensioner seat beltsmust be replaced. All seat belts,of any type, should always bereplaced after they have beenworn during a collision.

• The pre-tensioner seat beltassembly mechanisms becomehot during activation. Do nottouch the pre-tensioner seat beltassemblies for several minutesafter they have been activated.

• Do not attempt to inspect orreplace the pre-tensioner seatbelts yourself. This must be doneby an authorized KIA dealer.

• Do not strike the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies.

• Do not attempt to service orrepair the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem in any manner.

• Do not put anything near thebuckle. Placing objects near thebuckle can adversely affect thebuckle pretensioner and mayincrease the risk of personalinjury in the event of a collision.

(Continued)

3 25


C020300AUN-EU

Seat belt precautionsC020306AUN

Infant or small childYou should be aware of the specificrequirements in your country. Childand/or infant seats must be properlyplaced and installed in the rear seat. Formore information about the use of theserestraints, refer to “Child restraint sys-tem” in this section.

(Continued)• Improper handling of the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt assemblies, andfailure to heed the warnings notto strike, modify, inspect, replace,service or repair the pre-tension-er seat belt assemblies may leadto improper operation or inadver-tent activation and serious injury.

• Always wear the seat belts whendriving or riding in a motor vehi-cle.

WARNINGAll occupants of the vehicle mustwear their seat belts at all times.Seat belts and child restraintsreduce the risk of serious or fatalinjuries for all occupants in theevent of a collision or sudden stop.Without a seat belt, occupantscould be shifted too close to adeploying air bag, strike the interiorstructure or be thrown from thevehicle. Properly worn seat beltsgreatly reduce these hazards.Even with advanced air bags,unbelted occupants can be severe-ly injured by a deploying air bag.Always follow the precautionsabout seat belts, air bags and occu-pant seating contained in this man-ual.

WARNINGEvery person in your vehicle needsto be properly restrained at alltimes, including infants and chil-dren. Never hold a child in yourarms or lap when riding in a vehi-cle. The violent forces created dur-ing a crash will tear the child fromyour arms and throw the childagainst the interior. Always use achild restraint appropriate for yourchild's height and weight.


263

✽✽ NOTICESmall children are best protected frominjury in an accident when properlyrestrained in the rear seat by a childrestraint system that meets the require-ments of the safety standards of yourcountry. Before buying any childrestraint system, make sure that it has alabel certifying that it meets the safetystandards of your country. The restraintmust be appropriate for your child'sheight and weight. Check the label onthe child restraint for this information.Refer to “Child restraint system” in thissection.

C020301AHM

Larger childrenChildren who are too large for childrestraint systems should always occupythe rear seat and use the availablelap/shoulder belts. The lap portion shouldbe fastened and snugged on the hipsand as low as possible. Check if the beltfits periodically. A child's squirming couldput the belt out of position. Children aregiven the most safety in the event of anaccident when they are restrained by aproper restraint system in the rear seat. Ifa larger child (over age 12) must be seat-ed in the front seat, the child should besecurely restrained by the availablelap/shoulder belt and the seat should beplaced in the rearmost position. Childrenage 12 and under should be restrainedsecurely in the rear seat. NEVER place achild age 12 and under in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touch-es the child’s neck or face, try placing thechild closer to the center of the vehicle. Ifthe shoulder belt still touches their faceor neck they need to be returned to achild restraint system.

WARNING - Shoulder beltson small children

• Never allow a shoulder belt to bein contact with a child’s neck orface while the vehicle is inmotion.

• If seat belts are not properly wornand adjusted on children, there isa risk of death or serious injury.

3 27


C020302AKM

Restraint of pregnant women Pregnant women should wear lap/shoul-der belt assemblies whenever possibleaccording to specific recommendationsby their doctors. The lap portion of thebelt should be worn AS SNUGLY ANDLOW AS POSSIBLE.

C020303AUN

Injured personA seat belt should be used when aninjured person is being transported.When this is necessary, you should con-sult a physician for recommendations.

C020304AUN

One person per beltTwo people (including children) shouldnever attempt to use a single seat belt.This could increase the severity ofinjuries in case of an accident.

C020305AHM

Do not lie downTo reduce the chance of injuries in theevent of an accident and to achieve max-imum effectiveness of the restraint sys-tem, all passengers should be sitting upand the front and rear (2nd and/or 3rdrow) seats should be in an upright posi-tion when the vehicle is moving. A seatbelt cannot provide proper protection ifthe person is lying down in the rear seator if the front and rear (2nd and/or 3rdrow) seats are in a reclined position.

WARNINGRiding with a reclined seatbackincreases your chance of seriousor fatal injuries in the event of a col-lision or sudden stop. The protec-tion of your restraint system (seatbelts and air bags) is greatlyreduced by reclining your seat.Seat belts must be snugged againstyour hips and chest to work proper-ly. The more the seatback isreclined, the greater the chance anoccupant's hips will slide under thelap belt causing serious internalinjuries. Also, the shoulder beltmay strike the occupant's neck.Drivers and passengers shouldalways sit well back in their seats,properly belted, and with the seat-backs upright.

WARNING - Pregnantwomen

Pregnant women must never placethe lap portion of the safety beltover the area of the abdomenwhere the fetus is located or abovethe abdomen where the belt couldcrush the fetus during an impact.


283

C020400AEN

Care of seat beltsSeat belt systems should never be disas-sembled or modified. In addition, careshould be taken to assure that seat beltsand belt hardware are not damaged byseat hinges, doors or other abuse.

C020401AEN

Periodic inspectionAll seat belts should be inspected peri-odically for wear or damage of any kind.Any damaged parts should be replacedas soon as possible.

C020402AUN

Keep belts clean and drySeat belts should be kept clean and dry.If belts become dirty, they can becleaned by using a mild soap solutionand warm water. Bleach, dye, strongdetergents or abrasives should not beused because they may damage andweaken the fabric.

C020403ASA

When to replace seat beltsThe entire in-use seat belt assembly orassemblies should be replaced if thevehicle has been involved in an accident.This should be done even if no damageis visible. Additional questions concern-ing seat belt operation should be directedto an authorized KIA dealer.

WARNING When you return the rear seatbackto its upright position after the rearseatback has been folded down, becareful not to damage the seat beltwebbing or buckle. Be sure that thewebbing or buckle does not getcaught or pinched in the rear seat.A seat belt with damaged webbingor buckle could possibly fail duringa collision or sudden stop, result-ing in serious injury. If the webbingor buckles are damaged, get themreplaced immediately.

3 29


CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMC030000AHM

Children riding in the car should sit in therear seat and must always be properlyrestrained to minimize the risk of injury inan accident, sudden stop or suddenmaneuver. According to accident statis-tics, children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seats than in thefront seat. Larger children not in a childrestraint should use one of the seat beltsprovided.You should be aware of the specificrequirements in your country. Child and/orinfant safety seats must be properlyplaced and installed in the rear seat. Youmust use a commercially available childrestraint system that meets the require-ments of the safety standards of yourcountry.Child restraint systems are designed to besecured in vehicle seats by lap belts or thelap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, orby a LATCH system (if equipped).

Children could be injured or killed in acrash if their restraints are not properlysecured. For small children and babies, achild seat or infant seat must be used.Before buying a particular child restraintsystem, make sure it fits your car seatand seat belts, and fits your child.Follow all the instructions provided by themanufacturer when installing the childrestraint system.

WARNING• A child restraint system must be

placed in the rear seat. Neverinstall a child or infant seat on thefront passenger's seat. Should anaccident occur and cause thepassenger-side air bag to deploy,it could severely injure or kill aninfant or child seated in an infantor child seat. Thus only use achild restraint in the rear seat ofyour vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)• A seat belt or child restraint sys-

tem can become very hot if it isleft in a closed vehicle on a sunnyday, even if the outside tempera-ture does not feel hot. Be sure tocheck the seat cover and bucklesbefore placing a child there.

• When the child restraint systemis not in use, store it in the lug-gage area or fasten it with a seatbelt so that it will not be thrownforward in case of a sudden stopor an accident.

• Children may be seriously injuredor killed by an inflating air bag.All children, even those too largefor child restraints, must ride inthe rear seat.


303

WARNINGTo reduce the chance of serious orfatal injuries:• Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat.A child riding in the front passen-ger seat can be forcefully struckby an inflating air bag resulting inserious or fatal injuries.

• Always follow the child restraintsystem manufacturer’s instruc-tions for installation and use ofthe child restraint.

• Always make sure the child seatis secured properly in the car andyour child is securely restrainedin the child seat.

• Never hold a child in your arms orlap when riding in a vehicle. Theviolent forces created during acrash will tear the child from yourarms and throw the child againstthe car’s interior.

• Never put a seat belt over your-self and a child. During a crash,the belt could press deep into thechild causing serious internalinjuries.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never leave children unattended

in a vehicle – not even for a shorttime. The car can heat up veryquickly, resulting in seriousinjuries to children inside. Evenvery young children may inadver-tently cause the vehicle to move,entangle themselves in the win-dows, or lock themselves or oth-ers inside the vehicle.

• Never allow two children, or anytwo persons, to use the sameseat belt.

• Children often squirm and repo-sition themselves improperly.Never let a child ride with theshoulder belt under their arm orbehind their back. Always proper-ly position and secure children inthe rear seat.

• Never allow a child to stand-up orkneel on the seat or floor of amoving vehicle. During a colli-sion or sudden stop, the childcan be violently thrown againstthe vehicle’s interior, resulting inserious injury.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never use an infant carrier or a

child safety seat that "hooks"over a seatback, it may not pro-vide adequate security in an acci-dent.

• Seat belts can become very hot,especially when the car is parkedin direct sunlight. Always checkthe seat belt buckles before fas-tening them over a child.

3 31


C030100AHM-EU

Using a child restraint systemFor small children and babies, the use ofa child seat or infant seat is required.Thischild seat or infant seat should be ofappropriate size for the child and shouldbe installed in accordance with the man-ufacturer's instructions.

For safety reasons, we recommend thatthe child restraint system be used in therear seats.

Since all passenger seat belts movefreely under normal conditions and onlylock under extreme or emergency condi-tions (emergency lock mode), you mustmanually change these seat belts to theauto lock mode to secure a childrestraint.

CRS09

OUN026150

Forward-facing child restraint system

Rearward-facing child restraint system

WARNINGNever place a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passengerseat, because of the danger aninflating passenger-side air bagcould impact the rear-facing childrestraint and kill the child.

WARNING - Child seatinstallation

• A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a collision if the childrestraint is not properly anchoredto the car and the child is notproperly restrained in the childrestraint. Before installing thechild restraint system, read theinstructions supplied by the childrestraint system manufacturer.

• If the seat belt does not operateas described in this section, havethe system checked immediatelyby your authorized KIA dealer.

• Failure to observe this manual'sinstructions regarding childrestraint systems and theinstructions provided with thechild restraint system couldincrease the chance and/orseverity of injury in an accident.


323

C030102AAM-EU

Placing a passenger seat belt intothe auto lock mode The auto lock mode will help prevent thenormal movement of the child in the vehi-cle from causing the seat belt to loosenand compromise the child restraint sys-tem. To secure a child restraint system,use the following procedure.

To install a child restraint system on theoutboard or center rear seats, do the fol-lowing:1. Place the child restraint system in the

seat and route the lap/shoulder beltaround or through the restraint, follow-ing the restraint manufacturer’sinstructions. Be sure the seat beltwebbing is not twisted.

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch intothe buckle. Listen for the distinct “click”sound.

Position the release button so that it iseasy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seatbelt all the way out. When the shoulderportion of the seat belt is fully extend-ed, it will shift the retractor to the “AutoLock” (child restraint) mode.

E2MS103005 OEN036101 OEN036102

3 33


4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion ofthe seat belt to retract and listen for anaudible “clicking” or “ratcheting” sound.This indicates that the retractor is inthe “Auto Lock” mode. If no distinctsound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

5. Remove as much slack from the beltas possible by pushing down on thechild restraint system while feeding theshoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraintsystem to confirm that the seat belt isholding it firmly in place. If it is not,release the seat belt and repeat steps2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is inthe “Auto Lock” mode by attempting topull more of the seat belt out of theretractor. If you cannot, the retractor isin the “Auto Lock” mode.

To remove the child restraint, press therelease button on the buckle and thenpull the lap/shoulder belt out of therestraint and allow the seat belt to retractfully.

When the seat belt is allowed toretract to its fully stowed position, theretractor will automatically switchfrom the “Auto Lock” mode to theemergency lock mode for normaladult usage.

OEN036104OEN036103

WARNING - Auto lockmode

The lap/shoulder belt automaticallyreturns to the “emergency lockmode” whenever the belt is allowedto retract fully. Therefore, the pre-ceding seven steps must be fol-lowed each time a child restraint isinstalled.If the retractor is not in theAutomatic Locking mode, the childrestraint can move when your vehi-cle turns or stops suddenly. A childcan be seriously injured or killed ifthe child restraint is not properlyanchored to the car, including set-ting the retractor to the AutomaticLocking mode.


343

C030103AEN

Securing a child restraint seat withtether anchor system Child restraint hook holders are locatedon the back of the rear seatbacks.

1. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable head-rests, route the tether strap under theheadrest and between the headrestposts, otherwise route the tether strapover the top of the seatback.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to theappropriate child restraint hook holderand tighten to secure the child restraintseat.

OHM038047N 2GHA3300L WARNING - Tether strapNever mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point. Theincreased load caused by multipleseats may cause the tethers oranchorage points to break, causingserious injury or death.

WARNINGA child can be seriously injured orkilled in a collision if the childrestraint is not properly anchoredto the car and the child is not prop-erly restrained in the child restraint.Always follow the child seat manu-facturer’s instructions for installa-tion and use.

3 35


C030104AHM-EU

Securing a child restraint seat withchild seat lower anchor systemSome child seat manufacturers makechild restraint seats that are labeled asLATCH or LATCH-compatible childrestraint seats. LATCH stands for "LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children". Theseseats include two rigid or webbingmounted attachments that connect totwo LATCH anchors at specific seatingpositions in your vehicle. This type ofchild restraint seat eliminates the need touse seat belts to attach the child seat inthe rear seats.

Child restraint symbols are located onthe left and right rear seat backs to indi-cate the position of the lower anchors forchild restraints.

OUN036101L

WARNING - Child restraintcheck

Check that the child restraint sys-tem is secure by pushing andpulling it in different directions.Incorrectly fitted child restraintsmay swing, twist, tip or separatecausing death or serious injury.

WARNING - Child restraintanchorage

• Child restraint anchorages aredesigned to withstand only thoseloads imposed by correctly fittedchild restraints. Under no circum-stances are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses orfor attaching other items orequipment to the vehicle.

• The tether strap may not workproperly if attached somewhereother than the correct tetheranchor.

OHM038045N

Lower AnchorPosition Indicator

Lower Anchor


363

LATCH anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The LATCH anchors arelocated in the left and right outboard rearseating positions. Their locations areshown in the illustration. There is noLATCH anchor provided for the centerrear seating position.The LATCH anchors are located betweenthe seatback and the seat cushion of therear seat left and right outboard seatingpositions.Follow the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions to properly install childrestraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-compatible attachments.Once you have installed the LATCH childrestraint, assure that the seat is properlyattached to the LATCH and tetheranchors.

Also, test the child restraint seat beforeyou place the child in it. Tilt the seat fromside to side. Also try to tug the seat for-ward. Check to see if the anchors holdthe seat in place.

OHM038046N

WARNINGIf the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child beingseriously injured or killed in a colli-sion greatly increases.

WARNING - LATCH loweranchors

LATCH lower anchors are only tobe used with the left and right rearoutboard seating positions. Neverattempt to attach a LATCHequipped seat in the center seatingposition. You may damage theanchors or the anchors may failand break in a collision.

CAUTIONDo not allow the rear seat belt web-bing to get scratched or pinched bythe child-seat latch and LATCHanchor during the installation.

WARNINGWhen using the vehicle's "LATCH"system to install a child restraintsystem in the rear seat, all unusedvehicle rear seat belt metal latchplates or tabs must be latchedsecurely in their seat belt bucklesand the seat belt webbing must beretracted behind the child restraintto prevent the child from reachingand taking hold of unretracted seatbelts. Unlatched metal latch platesor tabs may allow the child to reachthe unretracted seat belts whichmay result in strangulation and aserious injury or death to the childin the child restraint.

WARNINGInstall the child restraint seat fullyrearward against the seatback withthe seatback reclined two positionsfrom the most upright latched posi-tion.

3 37


C040000AHM

(1) Driver’s front air bag(2) Driver’s knee air bag*(3) Passenger’s front air bag(4) Side impact air bag*(5) Curtain air bag**: if equipped

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

WARNINGEven in vehicles with air bags, youand your passengers must alwayswear the seat belts provided inorder to minimize the risk andseverity of injury in the event of acollision or rollover.

OHM039101N

* The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.


383

C040900AHM-EU

How does the air bag systemoperate • Air bags are activated (able to inflate if

necessary) only when the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON or STARTposition.

• Air bags inflate instantly in the event ofa serious frontal collision or side colli-sion (if equipped with a side air bag orcurtain air bag) in order to help protectthe occupants from serious physicalinjury.Also, the side and/or curtain air bagsinflate instantly in the event of arollover in order to help protect theoccupants from serious physical injury.

• There is no single speed at which theair bags will inflate.Generally, air bags are designed toinflate based upon the severity of a col-lision and its direction. These two fac-tors determine whether the sensorsproduce an electronic deployment/inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on anumber of factors including vehiclespeed, angles of impact and the densi-ty and stiffness of the vehicles orobjects which your vehicle hits in thecollision. The determining factors arenot limited to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completelyinflate and deflate in an instant.It is virtually impossible for you to seethe air bags inflate during an accident.It is much more likely that you will sim-ply see the deflated air bags hangingout of their storage compartments afterthe collision.

• In order to help provide protection in asevere collision, the air bags mustinflate rapidly. The speed of the air baginflation is a consequence of extremelyshort time in which a collision occursand the need to inflate the air bagbetween the occupant and the vehiclestructures before the occupant impactsthose structures. This speed of inflationreduces the risk of serious or life-threatening injuries in a severe collisionand is thus a necessary part of the airbag design.However, air bag inflation can alsocause injuries which can include facialabrasions, bruises and broken bonesbecause the inflation speed also caus-es the air bags to expand with a greatdeal of force.

• There are even circumstancesunder which contact with the steer-ing wheel air bag can cause fatalinjuries, especially if the occupantis positioned excessively close tothe steering wheel.

WARNING• To avoid severe personal injury

or death caused by deploying airbags in a collision, the drivershould sit as far back from thesteering wheel air bag as possi-ble (at least 10 inches (250 mm)away). The front passengersshould always move their seatsas far back as possible and sitback in their seat.

• Air bags inflate instantly in theevent of a collision, and passen-gers may be injured by the air bagexpansion force if they are not ina proper position.

• Air bag inflation may causeinjuries including facial or bodilyabrasions, injuries from brokenglasses or burns.

3 39


C040902AHM

Noise and smokeWhen the air bags inflate, they make aloud noise and they leave smoke andpowder in the air inside of the vehicle.This is normal and is a result of the igni-tion of the air bag inflator. After the airbag inflates, you may feel substantial dis-comfort in breathing due to the contact ofyour chest with both the seat belt and theair bag, as well as from breathing thesmoke and powder. Open your doorsand/or windows as soon as possibleafter the impact in order to reduce dis-comfort and prevent prolonged expo-sure to the smoke and powder.Though the smoke and powder are non-toxic, they may cause irritation to the skin(eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is thecase, wash and rinse with cold waterimmediately and consult a doctor if thesymptom persists.

C040903AEN

Do not install a child restraint on thefront passenger’s seat.Never place a rear-facing child restraintin the front passenger’s seat. If the airbag deploys, it would impact the rear-fac-ing child restraint, causing serious orfatal injury.In addition, do not place front-facing childrestraints in the front passenger’s seateither. If the front passenger air baginflates, it could cause serious or fatalinjuries to the child.

1JBH3051

WARNINGWhen the air bags deploy, the airbag related parts in the steeringwheel, instrument panel, front seatsand/or in both sides of the roof railsabove the front and rear doors arevery hot. To prevent injury, do nottouch the air bag storage area’sinternal components immediatelyafter an air bag has inflated.


403

C041000AEN

Air bag warning lightThe purpose of the air bag warning lightin your instrument panel is to alert you ofa potential problem with your air bag -Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).

When the ignition switch is turned ON,the warning light should illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds, then go off.Have the system checked if:• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.• The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds.• The light comes on while the vehicle is

in motion.

WARNING• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a

rearward facing child restraint ona seat protected by an air bag infront of it!

• Never put a child restraint in thefront passenger’s seat. If the frontpassenger air bag inflates, it cancause serious or fatal injuries.

• When children are seated in therear outboard seats of a vehicleequipped with side and/or curtainair bags, be sure to install thechild restraint system as far awayfrom the door side as possible,and securely lock the childrestraint system in position.Inflation of side and/or curtain airbags could cause serious injuryor death to an infant or child.

W7-147

3 41


C040100AHM-EU

SRS components and functionsThe SRS consists of the following com-ponents:1. Driver's front air bag module2. Passenger's front air bag module3. Side impact air bag modules*4. Curtain air bag modules*5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies6. Air bag warning light7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/

Rollover sensor*8. Front impact sensors9. Side impact sensors10. PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator (Front passenger’s seat only)

11. Occupant detection system (Frontpassenger’s seat only)

12. Driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt buckle sensors

13. Driver’s knee air bag module*

* : if equipped

The SRSCM continually monitors allSRS components while the ignitionswitch is ON to determine if a crashimpact is severe enough to require airbag deployment or pre-tensioner seatbelt deployment.The SRS air bag warning light on theinstrument panel will illuminate for about6 seconds after the ignition switch isturned to the ON position, after which theSRS air bag warning light should go out.If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the SRS.Have an authorized KIA dealer inspectthe air bag system as soon as possible.• The light does not turn on briefly when

you turn the ignition ON.• The light stays on after illuminating for

approximately 6 seconds.• The light comes on while the vehicle is

in motion.

The front air bag modules are located inthe center of the steering wheel, in thefront passenger's panel above the glovebox and/or in the driver’s side knee bol-ster. When the SRSCM detects a suffi-ciently severe impact to the front of thevehicle, it will automatically deploy thefront air bags.

OHM039102N

Driver’s front air bag (1)

OHM039100N


423

Upon deployment, tear seams moldeddirectly into the pad covers will separateunder pressure from the expansion of theair bags. Further opening of the coversthen allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combinationwith a properly worn seat belt, slows thedriver's or the passenger's forwardmotion, reducing the risk of head andchest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bagimmediately starts deflating, enabling thedriver to maintain forward visibility andthe ability to steer or operate other con-trols.

OHM039103N OHM039104N

Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)

WARNING • Do not install or place any acces-

sories (drink holder, cassetteholder, sticker, etc.) on the frontpassenger's panel above theglove box in a vehicle with a pas-senger's air bag. Such objectsmay become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the pas-senger's air bag inflates.

• When installing a container of liq-uid air freshener inside the vehi-cle, do not place it near theinstrument cluster nor on theinstrument panel surface.It may become a dangerous pro-jectile and cause injury if the pas-senger's air bag inflates.

B240B05L

Passenger’s front air bag

3 43


C040300AHM

Occupant detection systemYour vehicle is equipped with an occu-pant detection system in the front pas-senger's seat.The occupant detection system isdesigned to detect the presence of aproperly-seated front passenger anddetermine if the passenger's front air bagshould be enabled (may inflate) or not.The driver's front air bag is not affectedor controlled by the occupant detectionsystem.

WARNING• If an air bag deploys, there may

be a loud noise followed by a finedust released in the vehicle.These conditions are normal andare not hazardous - the air bagsare packed in this fine powder.The dust generated during airbag deployment may cause skinor eye irritation as well as aggra-vate asthma for some persons.Always wash all exposed skinareas thoroughly with lukewarmwater and a mild soap after anaccident in which the air bagswere deployed.

• The SRS can function only whenthe ignition switch is in the ONposition. If the SRS air bag warn-ing light does not illuminate, con-tinuously remains on after illumi-nating for about 6 seconds whenthe ignition switch is turned tothe ON position, or after theengine is started, or comes onwhile driving, the SRS is notworking properly. If this occurs,have your vehicle immediatelyinspected by an authorized KIAdealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Before you replace a fuse or dis-

connect a battery terminal, turnthe ignition switch to the LOCKposition and remove the ignitionkey. Never remove or replace theair bag related fuse(s) when theignition switch is in the ON posi-tion. Failure to heed this warningwill cause the SRS air bag warn-ing light to illuminate.

OHM038050N


443

C040302AHM

Main components of occupant detec-tion system• A detection device located within the

front passenger seat track.• Electronic system to determine

whether passenger air bag systemsshould be activated or deactivated.

• A indicator light located on the instru-ment panel which illuminates the wordsPASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF” indicat-ing passenger air bag system is deacti-vated.

• The instrument panel air bag indicatorlight is interconnected with the occu-pant detection system.

If the front passenger seat is occupied bya person that the system determines tobe of adult size, and he/she sits properly(sitting upright with the seatback in anupright position, centered on the seatcushion with their seat belt on, legs com-fortably extended and their feet on thefloor), the PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF”indicator will turn off and the front pas-senger's air bag will be able to inflate, ifnecessary, in frontal crashes.You will find the PASSENGER “AIR BAGOFF” indicator on the center facia panel.This system detects the conditions 1~4in the following table and activates ordeactivates the front passenger air bagbased on these conditions.

Always be sure that you and all vehicleoccupants are seated and restrainedproperly (sitting upright with the seat inan upright position, centered on the seatcushion, with the person's legs comfort-ably extended, feet on the floor, andwearing the seat belt properly) for themost effective protection by the air bagand the seat belt.• The ODS (Occupant Detection

System) may not function properly ifthe passenger takes actions which candefeat the detection system. Theseinclude:

(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.(2) Leaning against the door or center

console.(3) Sitting towards the sides or the front

of the seat.(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or rest-

ing them on other locations whichreduce the passenger weight on thefront seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the seat belt.(6) Reclining the seat back.

3 45


C040301AHM

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system

*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits inthe front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child dependingon his/her physique and posture.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a smaller child thanthe same age sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/heras an infant depending on his/her physique or posture.

*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

WARNINGRiding in an improper position orplacing weight on the front passen-ger's seat when it is unoccupied bya passenger adversely affects theoccupant detection system (ODS).

(Continued)

Condition detected by the occupantdetection system

1. Adult *1 or child age 13 and up*2

2. Infant or child restraint system

with 12 months old*3

3. Unoccupied

4. Malfunction in the system

Off

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Off

On

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Activated

PASSENGER “AIRBAG OFF” indicator

light

SRS warninglight

Front passengerair bag

Indicator/Warning light Devices


463

1KMN3663

1KMN3664

1KMN3665

- Never sit with the hips shiftedtowards the front of the seat.

- Never lean on the center console.- Never sit on one side of the front

passenger seat.

- Never place the feet on the dash-board.

B990A080

1KMN3662

- Never put a heavy load in thefront passenger seat.

- Never excessively recline thefront passenger seatback.

OVQ036014N

- Never place the feet on the frontpassenger seatback.

(Continued)

3 47


When an adult is seated in the front pas-senger seat, if the PASSENGER “AIRBAG OFF” indicator is on, turn the igni-tion switch to the LOCK position and askthe passenger to sit properly (sittingupright with the seat back in an uprightposition, centered on the seat cushionwith their seat belt on, legs comfortablyextended and their feet on the floor).Restart the engine and have the personremain in that position. This will allow thesystem to detect the person and toenable the passenger air bag.

If the PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF” indi-cator is still on, ask the passenger tomove to the rear seat.

✽✽ NOTICEThe PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF”indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-onds after the ignition switch is turnedto the ON position or after the engine isstarted. If the front passenger seat isoccupied, the occupant detection sensorwill then classify the front passengerafter several more seconds.

B990A01O

WARNINGDo not allow an adult passenger toride in the front seat when the PAS-SENGER “AIR BAG OFF” indicatoris illuminated because the air bagwill not deploy in the event of acrash. If the PASSENGER “AIR BAGOFF” indicator remains illuminatedafter the adult passenger reposi-tions themselves properly and thecar is restarted, it is recommendedthat passenger move to the rearseat because the passenger's frontair bag will not deploy.Front seat passengers must stayproperly seated to avoid seriousinjury from a deploying air bag.

WARNINGDo not put a heavy load on the frontpassenger seat. Do not place anyitems under the front passengerseat. Any of these could interferewith proper sensor operation.

Proper position


483

(Continued)• Air bags can only be used once –

have an authorized KIA dealerreplace the air bag immediatelyafter deployment.

• A smaller-stature adult who is notseated correctly (for example:seat excessively reclined, leaningon the center console, or hipsshifted forward in the seat) cancause a condition where theadvanced frontal air bag systemsenses less weight than if theoccupant were seated properly(sitting upright with the seatbackin an upright position, centeredon the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortablyextended and their feet on thefloor).This condition can result in anadult potentially being misclassi-fied and illumination of the PAS-SENGER “AIR BAG OFF” indica-tor.

(Continued)• If you change the weight on the

front passenger seat, the PAS-SENGER “AIR BAG OFF” indica-tor may turn on or off for a fewseconds, disabling or enablingthe passenger air bag.

• Do not modify or replace the frontpassenger seat. Don't place any-thing on or attach anything suchas a blanket or seat heater to thefront passenger seat. This canadversely affect the occupantdetection system.

• Do not sit on sharp objects suchas tools when occupying thefront passenger seat. This canadversely affect the occupantdetection system.

• Do not use accessory seat cov-ers on the front seats.

• Accident statistics show that chil-dren are safer if they arerestrained in the rear, as opposedto the front seat. It is recommend-ed that child restraints be securedin a rear seat, including an infantriding in a rear-facing infant seat,a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat and an older child rid-ing in a booster seat.

(Continued)

WARNING• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupantdetection system, never install achild restraint system in the frontpassenger's seat. A deploying airbag can forcefully strike a childresulting in serious injuries ordeath. Any child age 12 andunder should ride in the rear seat.Children too large for childrestraints should use the avail-able lap/shoulder belts. No mat-ter what type of crash, children ofall ages are safer when restrainedin the rear seat.

• If the PASSENGER “AIR BAGOFF” indicator is illuminatedwhen the front passenger's seatis occupied by an adult andhe/she sits properly (sittingupright with the seatback in anupright position, centered on theseat cushion with their seat belton, legs comfortably extendedand their feet on the floor), havethat person sit in the rear seat.

(Continued)

3 49


C040400AHM-EC

Driver's and passenger's front airbagYour vehicle is equipped with aSupplemental Restraint (Air Bag) Systemand lap/shoulder belts at both the driverand passenger seating positions.

The indications of the system's presenceare the letters "SRS AIR BAG"embossed on the air bag pad cover in thesteering wheel and/or on the cover of thedriver's side knee bolster located belowthe steering wheel and the passenger'sside front panel pad above the glove box.

WARNINGIf the occupant detection system isnot working properly, the SRS airbag warning light on the instru-ment panel will illuminate becausethe passenger's front air bag isconnected with the occupantdetection system. If there is a mal-function of the occupant detectionsystem, the PASSENGER “AIR BAGOFF” indicator will not illuminateand the passenger's front air bagwill inflate in frontal impact crasheseven if there is no occupant in thefront passenger's seat. If the SRSair bag warning light does not illu-minate when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position, remainsilluminated after approximately 6seconds when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle isbeing driven, have an authorizedKIA dealer inspect the occupantdetection system and the SRS airbag system as soon as possible.

OHM038033N

OHM039106N

Driver’s front air bag

Driver’s knee air bag


503

The SRS consists of air bags installedunder the pad covers in the center of thesteering wheel , in the knee bolster belowthe steering wheel column and the pas-senger's side front panel above the glovebox.The purpose of the SRS is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passen-ger with additional protection than thatoffered by the seat belt system alone incase of a frontal impact of sufficientseverity. The SRS uses sensors to gath-er information about the driver's seatposition, the driver's and front passen-ger's seat belt usage and impact severi-ty.

The seat belt buckle sensors determine ifthe driver and front passenger's seatbelts are fastened. These sensors pro-vide the ability to control the SRSdeployment based on whether or not theseat belts are fastened, and how severethe impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability tocontrol the air bag inflation with two lev-els. A first stage level is provided for mod-erate-severity impacts. A second stagelevel is provided for more severe impacts.

The passenger’s front air bag is designedto help reduce the injury of children sit-ting close to the instrument panel in lowspeed collisions. However, children aresafer if they are restraint in the rear seat.

According to the impact severity and seatbelt usage, the SRSCM (SRS ControlModule) controls the air bag inflation.Failure to properly wear seat belts canincrease the risk or severity of injury inan accident.

WARNINGIf an occupant detection system isnot working properly, the SRS airbag warning light on the instru-ment panel will illuminate becausethe SRS air bag warning light isconnected with the occupantdetection system. If the SRS air bagwarning light does not illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turnedto the ON position, remains illumi-nated after approximately 6 sec-onds when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle isbeing driven, have an authorizedKIA dealer inspect the advancedSRS air bag system as soon aspossible.

OHM038034

Passenger’s front air bag

3 51


Additionally, your vehicle is equippedwith an occupant detection system in thefront passenger's seat. The occupantdetection system detects the presence ofa passenger in the front passenger's seatand will turn off the front passenger's airbag under certain conditions. For moredetail, see "Occupant detection system"in this section.

WARNING• Manufacturers are required by

government regulations to pro-vide a contact point concerningmodifications to the vehicle forpersons with disabilities, whichmodifications may affect thevehicle’s advanced air bag sys-tem. However, KIA does notendorse nor will it support anychanges to any part or structureof the vehicle that could affectthe advanced air bag system,including the occupant detectionsystem.

(Continued)

(Continued)Specifically, the front passengerseat, dashboard or door shouldnot be replaced except by anauthorized KIA dealer using orig-inal KIA parts designed for thisvehicle and model. Any othersuch replacement or modificationcould adversely affect the opera-tion of the occupant detectionsystem and your advanced airbags. For the same reason, donot attach anything to the seat,dashboard or door, even tem-porarily. If the system is adverse-ly affected, it could cause severepersonal injuries or death in acollision.


523

✽✽ NOTICE• Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the sunvisor.

• Advanced air bags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-vide enhanced occupant protection infrontal crashes.

(Continued)• Move your seat as far back as

practical from the front air bags,while still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

• You and your passengers shouldnever sit or lean unnecessarilyclose to the air bags. Improperlypositioned driver and passengerscan be severely injured by inflat-ing air bags.

• Never lean against the door orcenter console – always sit in anupright position.

• Do not allow a passenger to ridein the front seat when the PAS-SENGER “AIR BAG OFF” indica-tor is illuminated, because the airbag will not deploy in the event ofa moderate or severe frontalcrash.

(Continued)

WARNINGAlways use seat belts and childrestraints – every trip, every time,everyone! Air bags inflate with con-siderable force and in the blink ofan eye. Seat belts help keep occu-pants in proper position to obtainmaximum benefit from the air bag.Even with advanced air bags,improperly and unbelted occupantscan be severely injured when theair bag inflates. Always follow theprecautions about seat belts, airbags and occupant safety con-tained in this manual.To reduce the chance of serious orfatal injuries and receive the maxi-mum safety benefit from yourrestraint system:• Never place a child in any child or

booster seat in the front seat.• ABC – Always Buckle Children in

the back seat. It is the safestplace for children of any age toride.

• Front and side air bags can injureoccupants improperly positionedin the front seats.

(Continued)

3 53


OEP036096N

OVQ036018N

1VQA2091

Rear impact

Side impact

Rollover

(Continued)• No objects should be placed over

or near the air bag modules onthe steering wheel, instrumentpanel, and the front passenger'spanel above the glove box,because any such object couldcause harm if the vehicle is in acrash severe enough to causethe air bags to deploy.

• Never place covers, blankets orseat warmers on the passengerseat as these may interfere withthe occupant detection system.

• Do not tamper with or disconnectSRS wiring or other componentsof the SRS system. Doing socould result in injury, due to acci-dental deployment of the air bagsor by rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

• If the SRS air bag warning lightremains illuminated while thevehicle is being driven, have anauthorized KIA dealer inspect theair bag system as soon as possi-ble.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Air bags can only be used once –

have an authorized KIA dealerreplace the air bag immediatelyafter deployment.

• The SRS is designed to deploythe front air bags only when animpact is sufficiently severe andwhen the impact angle is lessthan 30° from the forward longitu-dinal axis of the vehicle.Additionally, the air bags will onlydeploy once. Seat belts must beworn at all times.

• Front air bags are not intended todeploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. Inaddition, front air bags will notdeploy in frontal crashes belowthe deployment threshold.

(Continued)


543

C040600AHM-EU

Side impact air bag (if equipped)Your vehicle is equipped with a sideimpact air bag in each front seat. Thepurpose of the air bag is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passen-ger with additional protection than thatoffered by the seat belt alone.

(Continued)• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can result in serious or fatalinjury in a crash. All occupantsshould sit upright with the seat-back in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion withtheir seat belt on, legs comfort-ably extended and their feet onthe floor until the vehicle isparked and the ignition key isremoved.

• The SRS air bag system mustdeploy very rapidly to provideprotection in a crash. If an occu-pant is out of position because ofnot wearing a seat belt, the airbag may forcefully contact theoccupant causing serious or fatalinjuries.

(Continued)• Even though your vehicle is

equipped with the occupantdetection system, do not install achild restraint system in the frontpassenger seat position. A childrestraint system must never beplaced in the front seat.The infantor child could be severely injuredor killed by an air bag deploymentin case of an accident.

• Children age 12 and under mustalways be properly restrained inthe rear seat. Never allow chil-dren to ride in the front passen-ger seat. If a child over 12 mustbe seated in the front seat, he orshe must be properly belted andthe seat should be moved as farback as possible.

• For maximum safety protection inall types of crashes, all occu-pants including the driver shouldalways wear their seat beltswhether or not an air bag is alsoprovided at their seating positionto minimize the risk of severeinjury or death in the event of acrash. Do not sit or lean unneces-sarily close to the air bag whilethe vehicle is in motion.

(Continued)

OUN026141

OHM038035

3 55


• The side impact air bags are designedto deploy during certain side-impactcollisions, depending on the crashseverity, angle, speed and point ofimpact.

• The side impact air bags do not onlydeploy on the side of the impact butalso on the opposite side.

• Also, both sides of the side impact airbags deploy in certain rollover situa-tions.

• The side impact air bags are notdesigned to deploy in all side impact orrollover situations.

(Continued)• Do not install any accessories on

the side or near the side impactair bag.

• Do not place any objects over theair bag or between the air bagand yourself.

• Do not place any objects (anumbrella, bag, etc.) between thefront door and the front seat.Such objects may become dan-gerous projectiles and causeinjury if the supplemental sideimpact air bag inflates.

• To prevent unexpected deploy-ment of the side impact air bagthat may result in personal injury,avoid impact to the side impactsensor when the ignition switchis on.

• If the seat or seat cover is dam-aged, have the vehicle checkedand repaired by an authorizedKIA dealer because your vehicleis equipped with side impact airbags and an occupant detectionsystem.

WARNING• The side impact air bag is sup-

plemental to the driver's and thepassenger's seat belt systemsand is not a substitute for them.Therefore your seat belts must beworn at all times while the vehicleis in motion. The air bags deployonly in certain side impact orrollover conditions severeenough to cause significantinjury to the vehicle occupants.

• For best protection from the sideimpact air bag system and toavoid being injured by thedeploying side impact air bag,both front seat occupants shouldsit in an upright position with theseat belt properly fastened. Thedriver's hands should be placedon the steering wheel at 9:00 and3:00 positions. The passenger'sarms and hands should beplaced on their laps.

• Do not use any accessory seatcovers.

• Use of seat covers could reduceor prevent the effectiveness ofthe system.

(Continued)


563

C040700AHM

Curtain air bag (if equipped)Curtain air bags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the front andrear doors.They are designed to help protect theheads of the front seat occupants andthe rear outboard seat occupants in cer-tain side impact collisions.

• The curtain air bags are designed todeploy during certain side impact colli-sions, depending on the crash severity,angle, speed and point of impact.

• The curtain air bags do not only deployon the side of the impact but also onthe opposite side.

• Also, the both sides of the curtain airbags deploy in certain rollover situa-tions.

• The curtain air bags are not designedto deploy in all side impact or rolloversituations.

WARNING• In order for side and curtain air

bags to provide the best protec-tion, front seat occupants andoutboard rear occupants shouldsit in an upright position with theseat belts properly fastened.Importantly, children should sit ina proper child restraint system inthe rear seat.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When children are seated in the

rear outboard seats, they must beseated in the proper childrestraint system. Make sure toposition the child restraint sys-tem as far away from the doorside as possible, and secure thechild restraint system in a lockedposition.

• Do not allow the passengers tolean their heads or bodies ontodoors, put their arms on thedoors, stretch their arms out ofthe window, or place objectsbetween the doors and passen-gers when they are seated onseats equipped with side and cur-tain air bags.

• Never try to open or repair anycomponents of the side and cur-tain air bag system. This shouldonly be done by an authorizedKIA dealer.

Failure to follow the above instruc-tions can result in injury or death tothe vehicle occupants in an acci-dent.

OHM038036

OUN026091

3 57


C040800AHM

Why didn’t my air bag go off in acollision? (Inflation and non-infla-tion conditions of the air bag)There are many types of accidents inwhich the air bag would not be expect-ed to provide additional protection.These include rear impacts, second orthird collisions in multiple impactaccidents, as well as low speedimpacts. In other words, just becauseyour vehicle is damaged and even if itis totally unusable, don’t be surprisedthat the air bags did not inflate.

Air bag collision sensors(1) SRS control module /

Rollover sensor (if equipped)(2) Front impact sensor

(3) Side impact sensor (if equipped)(4) Side impact sensor (if equipped)

OHM038037L/OHM038038N/OHM038039/OHM038040/OHM038041

1 2 3 4


583

C040801AHM

Air bag inflation conditionsFront air bags Front air bags are designed to inflate in afrontal collision depending on the intensi-ty, speed or angles of impact of the frontcollision.

1VQA2084

WARNING• Do not hit or allow any objects to

impact the locations where airbags or sensors are installed.This may cause unexpected airbag deployment, which couldresult in serious personal injuryor death.

• If the installation location orangle of the sensors is altered inany way, the air bags may deploywhen they should not or they maynot deploy when they should,causing severe injury or death.Therefore, do not try to performmaintenance on or around the airbag sensors. Have the vehiclechecked and repaired by anauthorized KIA dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Problems may arise if the sensor

installation angles are changeddue to the deformation of thefront bumper, body, front doorsand/or C pillars where side colli-sion sensors are installed. Havethe vehicle checked and repairedby an authorized KIA dealer.

• Your vehicle has been designedto absorb impact and deploy theair bag(s) in certain collisions.Installing bumper guards orreplacing a bumper with non-gen-uine parts may adversely affectyour vehicle’s collision and airbag deployment performance.

3 59


Side impact and curtain air bags (if equipped)Side impact and curtain air bags aredesigned to inflate when an impact isdetected by side collision sensorsdepending on the strength, speed orangles of impact resulting from a sideimpact collision.

Also, the side impact and curtain air bagsare designed to inflate when a rollover isdetected by a rollover sensor.Although the front air bags (driver’s andfront passenger’s air bags) are designedto inflate only in frontal collisions, theyalso may inflate in other types of colli-sions if the front impact sensors detect asufficient impact. Side impact and curtainair bags are designed to inflate only inside impact collisions or rollovers. Butthey may inflate in other type of collisionsor similar rollover situations, if the sideimpact sensors or rollover sensor detecta sufficient impact or rollover.If the vehicle chassis is impacted bybumps or objects on unimproved roads,the air bags may deploy. Drive carefullyon unimproved roads or on surfaces notdesigned for vehicle traffic to preventunintended air bag deployment.

C040802AHM

Air bag non-inflation conditions• In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags aredesigned not to deploy in such casesbecause they may not provide benefitsbeyond the protection of the seat beltsin such collisions.

1VQA2086

OVQ036018N

OUN026090


603

• Air bags are not designed to inflate inrear collisions, because occupants aremoved backward by the force of theimpact. In this case, inflated air bagswould not be able to provide any addi-tional benefit.

• Front air bags may not inflate in sideimpact collisions, because occupantsmove to the direction of the collision,and thus in side impacts, frontal air bagdeployment would not provide addi-tional occupant protection.However, if equipped with side impactand curtain air bags, the air bags mayinflate depending on the intensity, vehi-cle speed and angles of impact.

• In an angled collision, the force ofimpact may direct the occupants in adirection where the air bags would notbe able to provide any additional bene-fit, and thus the sensors may notdeploy any air bags.

1VQA2089OVQ036018NOUN036087

3 61


• Just before impact, drivers often brakeheavily. Such heavy braking lowers thefront portion of the vehicle causing it to“ride” under a vehicle with a higherground clearance. Air bags may notinflate in this "under-ride" situationbecause deceleration forces that aredetected by sensors may be signifi-cantly reduced by such “under-ride”collisions.

• Front air bags may not inflate inrollover accidents because front airbag deployment would not provideadditional occupant protection.However, if equipped with side impactand curtain air bags, the air bags mayinflate in a rollover, when it is detectedby the rollover sensor.

• Air bags may not inflate if the vehiclecollides with objects such as utilitypoles or trees, where the point ofimpact is concentrated to one area andthe full force of the impact is not deliv-ered to the sensors.

1VQA2090 1VQA2091 1VQA2092


623

C041100AHM-EU

SRS CareThe SRS is virtually maintenance-freeand so there are no parts you can safelyservice by yourself. If the SRS air bagwarning light does not illuminate, or con-tinuously remains on, have your vehicleimmediately inspected by an authorizedKIA dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or anywork on the steering wheel, driver’s kneebolster, the front passenger's panel, frontseats and roof rails must be performedby an authorized KIA dealer. Improperhandling of the SRS system may result inserious personal injury.

WARNING• Modification to SRS components

or wiring, including the additionof any kind of badges to the padcovers or modifications to thebody structure, can adverselyaffect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

• For cleaning the air bag pad cov-ers, use only a soft, dry cloth orone which has been moistenedwith plain water. Solvents orcleaners could adversely affectthe air bag covers and properdeployment of the system.

• No objects should be placed overor near the air bag modules on thesteering wheel, driver's knee bol-ster, instrument panel, and the frontpassenger's panel above the glovebox, because any such objectcould cause harm if the vehicle is ina crash severe enough to cause theair bags to inflate.

(Continued)

(Continued)• If the air bags inflate, they must

be replaced by an authorized KIAdealer.

• Do not tamper with or disconnectSRS wiring, or other componentsof the SRS system. Doing socould result in injury, due to acci-dental inflation of the air bags orby rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

• If components of the air bag sys-tem must be discarded, or if thevehicle must be scrapped, certainsafety precautions must beobserved. An authorized KIAdealer knows these precautionsand can give you the necessaryinformation. Failure to followthese precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk ofpersonal injury.

• If your car was flooded and hassoaked carpeting or water on theflooring, you shouldn't try to startthe engine; have the car towed toan authorized KIA dealer.

3 63


C041300AUN

Additional safety precautions• Never let passengers ride in the

cargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat. All occupants shouldsit upright, fully back in their seats withtheir seat belts on and their feet on thefloor.

• Passengers should not move out ofor change seats while the vehicle ismoving. A passenger who is not wear-ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-gency stop can be thrown against theinside of the vehicle, against otheroccupants, or out of the vehicle.

• Each seat belt is designed torestrain one occupant. If more thanone person uses the same seat belt,they could be seriously injured or killedin a collision.

• Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improveoccupant comfort or reposition the seatbelt can reduce the protection providedby the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

• Passengers should not place hardor sharp objects between them-selves and the air bags. Carryinghard or sharp objects on your lap or inyour mouth can result in injuries if anair bag inflates.

• Keep occupants away from the airbag covers. All occupants should situpright, fully back in their seats withtheir seat belts on and their feet on thefloor. If occupants are too close to theair bag covers, they could be injured ifthe air bags inflate.

• Do not attach or place objects on ornear the air bag covers. Any objectattached to or placed on the front orside air bag covers could interfere withthe proper operation of the air bags.

• Do not modify the front seats.Modification of the front seats couldinterfere with the operation of the sup-plemental restraint system sensingcomponents or side air bags.

• Do not place items under the frontseats. Placing items under the frontseats could interfere with the operationof the supplemental restraint systemsensing components and wiring har-nesses.

• Never hold an infant or child on yourlap. The infant or child could be seri-ously injured or killed in the event of acrash. All infants and children shouldbe properly restrained in appropriatechild safety seats or seat belts in therear seat.

C041400AUN

Adding equipment to or modifyingyour air bag-equipped vehicleIf you modify your vehicle by changingyour vehicle's frame, bumper system,front end or side sheet metal or rideheight, this may affect the operation ofyour vehicle's air bag system.

WARNING• Sitting improperly or out of posi-

tion can cause occupants to beshifted too close to a deployingair bag, strike the interior struc-ture or be thrown from the vehicleresulting in serious injury ordeath.

• Always sit upright with the seat-back in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion withyour seat belt on, legs comfort-ably extended and your feet onthe floor.


643

C041200AUN-EC

Air bag warning labelAir bag warning labels, some required by the Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS), are attached to alert the driverand passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.

OHM038042L/OHM038043/OHM038044

1

2 (if equipped)

4

Keys / 4-3Smart key / 4-7Remote keyless entry / 4-10Theft-alarm system / 4-13Door locks / 4-15Tailgate / 4-19Windows / 4-21Hood / 4-25

Fuel filler lid / 4-27Sunroof / 4-30Driver position memory system / 4-34Power adjustable pedals / 4-36Steering wheel / 4-37Mirrors / 4-39Instrument cluster / 4-48Rear parking assist system / 4-67Rearview camera / 4-70Hazard warning flasher / 4-70Lighting / 4-71Wipers and washers / 4-76Interior light / 4-79Defroster / 4-82


Features of your vehicle4

Manual climate control system / 4-84Automatic climate control system / 4-97

Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-108Storage compartment / 4-111

Interior features / 4-114Exterior feature / 4-121

Audio system / 4-123Rear seat entertainment system (RSE) / 4-153

4 3


D010100AUN

Record your key numberThe key code number is stamped on thebar code tag attached to the key set.Should you lose your keys, this numberwill enable an authorized KIA dealer toduplicate the keys easily. Remove the barcode tag and store it in a safe place. Also,record the code number and keep it in asafe place (not in the vehicle).

D010200AHM

Key operations• Used to start the engine.• Used to lock and unlock the doors.• Used to lock and unlock the glove box.

KEYS

WARNING - Ignition keyLeaving children unattended in avehicle with the ignition key is dan-gerous even if the key is not in theignition switch. Children copyadults and they could place the keyin the ignition switch. The ignitionkey would enable children to oper-ate power windows or other con-trols, or even make the vehiclemove, which could result in seriousbodily injury or even death. Neverleave the keys in your vehicle withunsupervised children.

OHM048230N OHM048231N

WARNINGUse only KIA original parts for theignition key in your vehicle. If anaftermarket key is used, the ignitionswitch may not return to ON afterSTART. If this happens, the starterwill continue to operate causingdamage to the starter motor andpossible fire due to excessive cur-rent in the wiring.


44

D010300AHM-EC

Immobilizer systemYour vehicle may be equipped with anelectronic engine immobilizer system toreduce the risk of unauthorized vehicleuse.Your immobilizer system is comprised ofa small transponder in the ignition keyand electronic devices inside the vehicle.With the immobilizer system, wheneveryou insert your ignition key into the igni-tion switch and turn it to ON, it checksand determines and verifies that the igni-tion key is valid.If the key is determined to be valid, theengine will start.If the key is determined to be invalid, theengine will not start.

To deactivate the immobilizer sys-tem:Insert the ignition key into the key cylin-der and turn it to the ON position.

To activate the immobilizer system:Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.The immobilizer system activates auto-matically. Without a valid ignition key foryour vehicle, the engine will not start.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen starting the engine, do not use thekey with other immobilizer keys around.Otherwise the engine may not start ormay stop soon after it starts. Keep eachkey separate in order to avoid a startingmalfunction.

CAUTIONDo not put metal accessories nearthe ignition switch.Metal accessories may interrupt thetransponder signal and may pre-vent the engine from being started.

WARNINGIn order to prevent theft of yourvehicle, do not leave spare keysanywhere in your vehicle. YourImmobilizer password is a cus-tomer unique password and shouldbe kept confidential. Do not leavethis number anywhere in your vehi-cle.

OHM048231N

4 5


✽✽ NOTICEIf you need additional keys or lose yourkeys, consult an authorized KIA dealer.

This device complies with IndustryCanada standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and 2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

CAUTIONThe transponder in your ignitionkey is an important part of theimmobilizer system. It is designedto give years of trouble-free service,however you should avoid expo-sure to moisture, static electricityand rough handling. Immobilizersystem malfunction could occur.

CAUTIONDo not change, alter or adjust theimmobilizer system because itcould cause the immobilizer sys-tem to malfunction and should onlybe serviced by an authorized KIAdealer.Malfunctions caused by improperalterations, adjustments or modifi-cations to the immobilizer systemare not covered by your vehiclemanufacturer warranty.

WARNINGChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user's authority to operatethe equipment.


64

D010301AUN-EC

Limp home (override) procedureWhen you turn the ignition switch to theON position, if the immobilizer indicator( ) goes off after blinking 5 times,your transponder equipped in the ignitionkey is out of order. You cannot start theengine without the lime home procedure.To start the engine, you have to inputyour password by using the ignitionswitch.The following procedure is how to inputyour password of “2345” as an example.1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion. The immobilizer indicator ( )will blink 5 times and go off indicatingthe beginning of the limp home proce-dure.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCposition.

3. To enter the first digit (in this example“2”), turn the ignition switch to the ONand ACC position twice. Perform thesame procedure for the next digitsbetween 3 seconds and 10 seconds(for example, for “3”, turn the ignitionON and ACC 3 times).

4. If all of the digits have been input suc-cessfully, you have to start the enginewithin 30 seconds. If you attempt tostart the engine after 30 seconds, theengine will not start and you will haveto input your password again.

After performing the limp home proce-dure, you have to see an authorized KIAdealer immediately to inspect and repairyour ignition key or immobilizer system.

4 7


D040000AHM

With a smart key, you can lock or unlocka door (and tailgate) and even start theengine without inserting the key.The functions of the buttons on a smartkey are similar to the remote keylessentry. (Refer to the “Remote keylessentry” in this section.)

D040100AHM

Smart key functionsCarrying the smart key, you may lock andunlock the vehicle doors (and tailgate).Also, you may start the engine. Refer tothe following, for more details.

D040101BHM

Locking Pressing the button of the front outsidedoor handles with all doors (and tailgate)closed and any door unlocked, locks allthe doors (and tailgate). The hazardwarning lights blink and the chimesounds once to indicate that all doors(and tailgate) are locked. The button willonly operate when the smart key is with-in 28 in. (0.7 m) from the outside doorhandle. If you want to make sure that adoor has locked or not, you should checkthe door lock button inside the vehicle orpull the outside door handle.

Even though you press the button, thedoors will not lock and the chime sounds3 times if any of the following occurs:• The smart key is in the vehicle.• The ENGINE START/STOP button is in

the ACC or ON position.• Any door except the tailgate is opened.

D040102AHM-EU

Unlocking Pressing the buttons in the driver’s out-side door handle with all doors (and tail-gate) closed and locked, unlocks the dri-ver’s door. The hazard warning lightsblink and the chime sounds twice to indi-cate that the driver’s door is unlocked. Alldoors (and tailgate) are unlocked if thebutton is pressed once more within 4seconds. The hazard warning lights willblink and the chime will sound twice toindicate that all the doors (and tailgate)are unlocked.Pressing the button in the front passen-ger’s outside door handle with all doors(and tailgate) closed and locked, unlocksall the doors (and tailgate). The hazardwarning lights blink and the chimesounds twice to indicate that all doors(and tailgate) are unlocked. The buttonwill only operate when the smart key iswithin 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the out-side door handle.

SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)

OHM048001 OHM048002


84

When the smart key is recognized in thearea of 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) from the frontoutside door handle, other people canalso open the door without possession ofthe smart key.

D040103AHM

Tailgate unlockingIf you are within 0.7 m (28 in.) from theoutside tailgate handle, with your smartkey in possession, the tailgate will unlockand open when you press the tailgatehandle switch.The hazard warning lights will blink twiceto indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.Also, once the tailgate is opened andthen closed, the tailgate will lock auto-matically.

D040104AHM

Start-upYou can start the engine without insertingthe key. For detailed information refer to“Starting the engine with a smart key” insection 5.

D040300AHM-EC

Smart key precautions✽✽ NOTICE• If, for some reason, you happen to lose

your smart key, you will not be able tostart the engine. Tow the vehicle, ifnecessary, and contact an authorizedKIA dealer.

• A maximum of 2 smart keys can beregistered to a single vehicle. If youlose a smart key, you should immedi-ately take the vehicle and key to yourauthorized KIA dealer to protect itfrom potential theft.

• The smart key will not work if any ofthe following occurs:- The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station oran airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the smart key.

- The smart key is near a mobile two-way radio system or a cellularphone.

- Another vehicle’s smart key is beingoperated close to your vehicle.

When the smart key does not workproperly, open and close the door withthe mechanical key. If you have aproblem with the smart key, contactan authorized KIA dealer.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful



CAUTIONKeep the smart key away fromwater or any liquid. If the keylessentry system is inoperative due toexposure to water or liquids, it willnot be covered by your manufactur-er’s vehicle warranty.


4 9


D040400AHM

Restrictions in handling keysWhen leaving keys with parking lot andvalet attendants, the following proce-dures will ensure that your vehicle’sglove box compartment can not beopened in your absence.1. Press and hold the release button (1)

and remove the mechanical key.2. Close and then lock the glove box

using the mechanical key.3. Leave the smart key with the atten-

dant. The glove box can not be openedwithout the mechanical key.

D040500BHM

Battery replacementA smart key battery should last for sever-al years, but if the smart key is not work-ing properly, try replacing the battery witha new one. If you are unsure how to useyour smart key or replace the battery,contact an authorized KIA dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEThe circuit inside the smart key canhave a problem if exposed to moistureor static electricity. If you are unsurehow to use your smart key or replace thebattery, contact an authorized KIA deal-er.

1. Pry open the rear cover of the smartkey.

2. Replace the battery with a new battery(CR2032). When replacing the battery,make sure the battery positive “+”symbol faces up as indicated in theillustration.

3. Install the battery in the reverse orderof removal.

✽✽ NOTICE• Using the wrong battery can cause the

smart key to malfunction. Be sure touse the correct battery.

• Circuits inside the smart key maydevelop problems when dropped,exposed to moisture or static electrici-ty.

• If you suspect that your smart keymight have sustained some damage,or you feel your smart key is notworking correctly, contact an author-ized KIA dealer.

OHM048004 OHM048005

CAUTIONAn inappropriately disposed bat-tery can be harmful to the environ-ment and human health.Dispose the battery according toyour local law(s) or regulation.


104

Remote keyless entry systemoperations

D020101AHM-EU

Lock (1)All doors (and tailgate) are locked if thelock button is pressed.If all doors (and tailgate) are closed, thehazard warning lights will blink (for smartkey, the chime also sounds) once to indi-cate that all doors (and tailgate) arelocked.However, if any door (or tailgate) remainsopen, the hazard warning lights (and/orthe chime) will not operate. But if alldoors (and tailgate) are closed after thelock button is pressed, the hazard warn-ing lights will blink once.

D020102BHM-EU

Unlock (2)The driver's door is unlocked if the unlockbutton is pressed once. The hazardwarning lights will blink twice to indicatethat the driver's door is unlocked.All doors (and tailgate) are unlocked ifthe unlock button is pressed once morewithin 4 seconds. The hazard warninglights will blink twice again to indicatethat all doors (and tailgate) are unlocked.After pressing this button, the doors (andtailgate) will be locked automaticallyunless you open any door within 30 sec-onds.

D020104AHM

Tailgate unlock (3)The tailgate is unlocked if the button ispressed for more than 1 second.The hazard warning lights will blink twiceto indicate that the tailgate is unlocked.However, after pressing this button, thetailgate will lock automatically unless youopen the tailgate within 30 seconds.Also, once the tailgate is opened andthen closed, the tailgate will lock auto-matically.

D020105AHM

Alarm (4)The horn sounds and the hazard warninglights flash for about 30 seconds if thisbutton is pressed for more than 0.5 sec-onds. To stop the horn and lights, pressany button on the transmitter.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

OEN048002

OHM048003

■ Type A

■ Type B

4 11


D020200AHM-EC

Transmitter precautions✽✽ NOTICEThe transmitter will not work if any ofthe following occurs:• The ignition key is in the ignition

switch.• You exceed the operating distance

limit (about 30 m [90 feet]).• The battery in the transmitter is

weak.• Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.• The weather is extremely cold.• The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station oran airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not workproperly, open and close the door withthe ignition key. If you have a problemwith the transmitter, contact an author-ized KIA dealer.




CAUTIONChanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operatethe equipment. If the keyless entrysystem is inoperative due tochanges or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance, it willnot be covered by your manufactur-er’s vehicle warranty.

CAUTIONKeep the transmitter away fromwater or any liquid. If the keylessentry system is inoperative due toexposure to water or liquids, it willnot be covered by your manufactur)er vehicle warranty.


124

D020300BHM

Battery replacementA transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium batterywhich will normally last for several years.When replacement is necessary, use thefollowing procedure.1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gen-

tly pry open the transmitter centercover.

2. Replace the battery with a new battery(CR2032). When replacing the battery,make sure the battery positive “+” sym-bol faces up as indicated in the illus-tration.

3. Install the battery in the reverse orderof removal.

For transmitter replacement, see anauthorized KIA dealer to reprogram thetransmitter.

CAUTION• The keyless entry system trans-

mitter is designed to give youyears of trouble-free use, howev-er it can malfunction if exposed tomoisture or static electricity. Ifyou are unsure how to use yourtransmitter or replace the battery,contact an authorized KIA dealer.

• Using the wrong battery cancause the transmitter to malfunc-tion. Be sure to use the correctbattery.

• To avoid damaging the transmit-ter, don't drop it, get it wet, orexpose it to heat or sunlight.

• An inappropriately disposed bat-tery can be harmful to the envi-ronment and human health.Dispose the battery according toyour local law(s) or regulation.

OEN046004

4 13


THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

D030000AEN

This system is designed to provide pro-tection from unauthorized entry into thevehicle. This system is operated in threestages: the first is the "Armed" stage, thesecond is the "Theft-alarm" stage, andthe third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-gered, the system provides an audiblealarm with blinking of the hazard warninglights.

D030100AHM-EU

Armed stagePark the vehicle and stop the engine.Arm the system as described below.1. Remove the ignition key from the igni-

tion switch and exit the vehicle.2. Make sure that all doors (and tailgate)

and engine hood are closed andlatched.

3. Lock the doors using the transmitter ofthe keyless entry system (or smartkey).

After completion of the steps above, thehazard warning lights will blink (for smartkey, the chime also sounds) once to indi-cate that the system is armed.

If any door (or tailgate) or engine hoodremains open, the hazard warning lightswill not operate and the theft-alarm willnot arm. If all doors (and tailgate) andengine hood are closed after the lockbutton is pressed, the hazard warninglights will blink once.

The system can also be armed or dis-armed by locking or unlocking the doorswith the key from the front doors; howev-er, the hazard warning lights will not blinkusing this method.

Do not arm the system until all pas-sengers have left the vehicle. If thesystem is armed while a passenger(s)remains in the vehicle, the alarm maybe activated when the remaining pas-senger(s) leaves the vehicle. If anydoor (or tailgate) or engine hood isopened within 30 seconds after thesystem enters the armed stage, thesystem will be disarmed to preventunnecessary alarm.

Armedstage

Theft-alarmstage

Disarmedstage


144

D030200AHM-EU

Theft-alarm stageThe alarm will be activated if any of thefollowing occurs while the system isarmed.• A front or rear door is opened without

using the transmitter (or smart key) orignition key.

• The tailgate is opened without usingthe transmitter (or smart key) or igni-tion key.

• The engine hood is opened.The horn will sound and the hazardwarning lights will blink continuously forapproximately 30 seconds, and repeatthe horn 3 times unless the system isdisarmed. To turn off the system, unlockthe doors with the transmitter (or smartkey) or ignition key.

D030400AHM-EU

Disarmed stageThe system will be disarmed when:

Ignition key- The door is opened with the ignition

key.

Transmitter- The door unlock button is pressed.- The tailgate unlock button is pressed.

Smart key- The door unlock button is pressed.- The button of the front outside door is

pressed while carrying the smart key.- The tailgate unlock button is pressed.- The tailgate is opened while carrying

the smart key.- The door is opened with the mechani-

cal key.

After the doors are unlocked, the hazardwarning lights will blink twice to indicatethat the system is disarmed.After pressing the unlock button, if anydoor (or tailgate) is not opened within 30seconds, the system will be rearmed.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you lose your keys, consult yourauthorized KIA dealer.

4 15


D050100AHM-EU

Operating door locks from out-side the vehicle • Turn the key toward the rear of the

vehicle to unlock and toward the frontof the vehicle to lock.

• If you lock the driver’s door with a key,all vehicle doors will lock automatically.

• From the driver’s door, turn the key tothe right once to unlock the door andonce more within 4 seconds to unlockall doors.

• Doors can also be locked andunlocked with the transmitter.

• Once the doors are unlocked, they maybe opened by pulling the door handle.

• When closing the door, push the doorby hand. Make sure the doors areclosed securely.

✽✽ NOTICE• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not workproperly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-ple times in rapid succession witheither the vehicle key or door lockswitch, the system may stop operatingtemporarily in order to protect thecircuit and prevent damage to systemcomponents.

• To lock a door without the key, push theinside door lock button (1) or centraldoor lock switch (2) to the “Lock” posi-tion and close the door (3).

• If you lock the door with the centraldoor lock switch (2), all vehicle doorswill lock automatically.

✽✽ NOTICEAlways remove the ignition key, engagethe parking brake, close all windowsand lock all doors when leaving yourvehicle unattended.

DOOR LOCKS

OHM048002L

Lock Unlock

OHM048007N


164

Operating door locks from insidethe vehicleD050201AHM-EU

With the door lock button• To unlock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the “Unlock” position. Thered mark (2) on the button will be visi-ble.

• To lock a door, push the door lock but-ton (1) to the “Lock” position. If the dooris locked properly, the red mark (2) onthe door lock button will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle(3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the driver’s(or front passenger’s) door is pulledwhen the door lock button is in the lockposition, the button will unlock and thedoor will open. (if equipped)

• Front doors cannot be locked if theignition key is in the ignition switch andany of the front door is opened.

D050202AHM-EU

With central door lock switchOperate by pressing the central door lockswitch.

OHM048008N

Lock Unlock

WARNING - Door lock mal-function

If a power door lock ever fails tofunction while you are in the vehi-cle, try one or more of the followingtechniques to exit:• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic andmanual) while simultaneouslypulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks andhandles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use thekey to unlock the door from out-side.

• Move to the cargo area and openthe tailgate.

OHM048009N

Driver’s door

OHM048010

Passenger’s door

4 17


• When pressing the front portion (1) ofthe switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

• When pressing the rear portion (2) ofthe switch, all vehicle doors will unlock.

• If the key is in the ignition switch (or ifthe smart key is in the vehicle) and anyfront door is opened, the doors will notlock even though the front portion (1)of the central door lock switch ispressed.

D050300AAM-EE

Impact sensing door unlock sys-tem (if equipped)In the event of air bag deployment result-ing from a vehicle impact, all doors willautomatically unlock.

D050400AHM-EU

Auto door lock/unlock feature• All doors will automatically lock when

the transmission shift lever is shiftedout of P (Park).

• All doors will automatically unlockwhen the transmission shift lever isshifted into P (Park).

WARNING - Unlockedvehicles

Leaving your vehicle unlocked caninvite theft or possible harm to youor others from someone hiding inyour vehicle while you are gone.Always remove the ignition key,engage the parking brake, close allwindows and lock all doors whenleaving your vehicle unattended.

WARNING - Unattendedchildren

An enclosed vehicle can becomeextremely hot, causing death orsevere injury to unattended chil-dren or animals who cannot escapethe vehicle. Furthermore, childrenmight operate features of the vehi-cle that could injure them, or theycould encounter other harm, possi-bly from someone gaining entry tothe vehicle. Never leave children oranimals unattended in your vehicle.

WARNING - Doors• The doors should always be fully

closed and locked while the vehi-cle is in motion to prevent acci-dental opening of the door.Locked doors will also discour-age potential intruders when thevehicle stops or slows down.

• Be careful when opening doorsand watch for vehicles, motorcy-cles, bicycles or pedestriansapproaching the vehicle in thepath of the door. Opening a doorwhen something is approachingcan cause damage or injury.


184

✽✽ NOTICEAn authorized KIA dealer can activateor deactivate some auto doorlock/unlock features as follows;• Speed sensing auto door lock• Auto door unlock by using the dri-

ver's door lock button• Auto door unlock when the ignition

key is removed from the ignitionswitch.

• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting thetransmission shift lever out of P(Park) or into P (Park)

If you want to activate or deactivatesome door lock/unlock feature, consultan authorized KIA dealer.

D050500AEN

Child-protector rear door lockThe child safety lock is provided to helpprevent children from accidentally open-ing the rear doors from inside the vehicle.The rear door safety locks should beused whenever children are in the vehi-cle.1. Open the rear door.2. Push the child safety lock located on

the rear edge of the door to the lock( ) position. When the child safetylock is in the lock position, the reardoor will not open even when the innerdoor handle is pulled.

3. Close the rear door.To open the rear door, pull the outsidedoor handle (1).Even though the doors may be unlocked,the rear door will not open by pulling theinner door handle (2) until the rear doorchild safety lock is unlocked ( ).

WARNING - Rear doorlocks

If children accidentally open therear doors while the vehicle is inmotion, they could fall out of thevehicle, resulting in severe injury ordeath. To prevent children fromopening the rear doors from theinside, the rear door safety locksshould be used whenever childrenare in the vehicle.

OHM048011

4 19


D070100AHM-EE

Opening the tailgate• The tailgate is locked or unlocked

when all doors are locked or unlockedwith the key, transmitter (or smart key)or central door lock switch.

• Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tail-gate unlock button on the transmitter(or smart key) is pressed. Once thetailgate is opened and then closed, thetailgate is locked automatically.

• If unlocked, the tailgate can be openedby pressing the handle switch and thenpulling the handle up.

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, door lock anddoor mechanisms may not work proper-ly due to freezing conditions.

D070200BHM

Closing the tailgateTo close the tailgate, lower and pushdown the tailgate to the first detent. Thenit will close and lock automatically. Makesure that the tailgate is securely latched.

✽✽ NOTICE• You do not have to close the tailgate

with excessive strength. The tailgatewill close and lock automatically if it ispulled down to the first detent.

• The tailgate may not close and lockautomatically even though the tailgatewas lowered down to the first detent ifyou close and open the tailgate repeat-edly several times. If this happens,close the tailgate manually and waitfor about 10 seconds to operate nor-mally.

TAILGATE

OHM048012L

WARNINGThe tailgate swings upward. Makesure no objects or people are nearthe rear of the vehicle when open-ing the tailgate.

CAUTIONMake certain that you close the tail-gate before driving your vehicle.Possible damage may occur to thetailgate lift cylinders and attachedhardware if the tailgate is notclosed prior to driving.

CAUTIONMake sure nothing is near the tail-gate latch and striker while closingthe tailgate. It may damage the tail-gate's power latch.


204

D070300AHM

Emergency tailgate safety releaseYour vehicle is equipped with the emer-gency tailgate safety release lever locat-ed on the bottom of the tailgate. Whensomeone is inadvertently locked in theluggage compartment, the tailgate canbe opened by pushing the release leverand pushing open the tailgate.

WARNING• For emergencies, be fully aware

of the location of the emergencytailgate safety release lever in thevehicle and how to open the tail-gate if you are accidentallylocked in the luggage compart-ment.

• No one should be allowed tooccupy the luggage compartmentof the vehicle at any time. Theluggage compartment is a verydangerous location in the eventof a crash.

• Use the release lever for emer-gencies only. Use with extremecaution, especially while the vehi-cle is in motion.

OHM048014

WARNING - Rear cargoarea

Occupants should never ride in therear cargo area where no restraintsare available. To avoid injury in theevent of an accident or suddenstops, occupants should always beproperly restrained.

WARNINGMake sure your hands, feet and otherparts of your body are safely out ofthe way before closing the tailgate.

WARNING - Exhaustfumes

If you drive with the tailgateopened, you will draw dangerousexhaust fumes into your vehiclewhich can cause serious injury ordeath to vehicle occupants.If you must drive with the tailgateopened, keep the air vents and allwindows open so that additionaloutside air comes into the vehicle.

4 21


D080000AHM-EE

(1) Driver’s door power window switch(2) Front passenger’s door power win-

dow switch(3) Rear door (left) power window switch(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch(5) Window opening and closing(6) Automatic power window up*/down

(Driver’s window)(7) Power window lock switch

* : if equipped

✽✽ NOTICEIn cold and wet climates, power windowsmay not work properly due to freezingconditions.

WINDOWS

OHM048017N


224

D080100BHM-EE

Power windowsThe ignition switch must be in the ONposition for power windows to operate.Each door has a power window switchthat controls the door's window. The driv-er has a power window lock switch whichcan block the operation of passengerwindows. The power windows can beoperated for approximately 30 secondsafter the ignition key is removed or turnedto the ACC or LOCK position. However, ifthe front doors are opened, the powerwindows cannot be operated even withinthe 30 second period.

✽✽ NOTICEWhile driving with the rear windowsdown or with the sunroof (if equipped)in an open (or partially open) position,your vehicle may demonstrate a windbuffeting or pulsation noise. This noiseis a normal occurrence and can bereduced or eliminated by taking the fol-lowing actions. If the noise occurs withone or both of the rear windows down,partially lower both front windowsapproximately one inch. If you experi-ence the noise with the sunroof open,slightly reduce the size of the sunroofopening.

D080101AUN

Window opening and closingThe driver’s door has a master powerwindow switch that controls all the win-dows in the vehicle.To open or close a window, press downor pull up the front portion of the corre-sponding switch to the first detent posi-tion (5).

D080102AHM

Auto down window (if equipped) (Driver’s window)Pressing the power window switchmomentarily to the second detent posi-tion (6) completely lowers the driver’swindow even when the switch isreleased. To stop the window at thedesired position while the window is inoperation, momentarily pull the switch inthe direction opposite of the window’smovement.

OHM048016 OHM048015L

4 23


D080103AHM-EU

Auto up/down window (if equipped)(Driver's window) Pressing or pulling up the power windowswitch momentarily to the second detentposition (6) completely lowers or lifts thewindow even when the switch isreleased. To stop the window at thedesired position while the window is inoperation, pull up or press down andrelease the switch.If the power window does not operatenormally, the automatic power windowsystem must be reset as follows:1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.2. Close the driver’s window and contin-

ue pulling up the driver’s power win-dow switch for at least 1 second afterthe window is completely closed.

Automatic reversal If the upward movement of the window isblocked by an object or part of the body,the window will detect the resistance andwill stop upward movement. The windowwill then lower approximately 30 cm (11.8in.) to allow the object to be cleared.If the window detects the resistancewhile the power window switch is pulledup continuously, the window will stopupward movement then lower approxi-mately 2.5 cm (1 in.). And if the powerwindow switch is pulled up continuouslyagain within 5 seconds after the windowis lowered by the automatic windowreversal feature, the automatic windowreversal will not operate.

✽✽ NOTICEThe automatic reverse feature for thedriver’s window is only active when the“auto up” feature is used by fullypulling up the switch. The automaticreverse feature will not operate if thewindow is raised using the halfway posi-tion on the power window switch.

OHM048015

WARNING Always check for obstructionsbefore raising any window to avoidinjuries or vehicle damage. If anobject less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) indiameter is caught between thewindow glass and the upper win-dow channel, the automatic reversewindow may not detect the resist-ance and will not stop and reversedirection.

OUN026013


244

D080104AHM

Power window lock button• The driver can disable the power win-

dow switches on the passenger doorsby pressing the power window lock but-ton located on the driver’s door to theLOCK position (pressed).

• When the power window lock buttonis in the LOCK position (pressed),the driver’s master control cannotoperate the passenger door powerwindows.

CAUTION• To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do notopen or close two windows ormore at the same time. This willalso ensure the longevity of thefuse.

• Never try to operate the mainswitch on the driver's door andthe individual door windowswitch in the opposing directionsat the same time. If this is done,the window will stop and cannotbe opened or closed.

WARNING - Windows• NEVER leave the ignition key in

the vehicle.• NEVER leave any child unattend-

ed in the vehicle. Even veryyoung children may inadvertentlycause the vehicle to move, entan-gle themselves in the windows,or otherwise injure themselves orothers.

• Always double check to makesure all arms, hands, head andother obstructions are safely outof the way before closing a win-dow.

• Do not allow children to play withthe power windows. Keep the dri-ver’s door power window lockbutton in the LOCK position(pressed). Serious injury canresult from unintentional windowoperation by the child.

• Do not extend the any head orarms outside the window whiledriving.

OHM048018N

4 25


D090100AHM

Opening the hood 1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the

hood. The hood should pop openslightly.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise thehood slightly, pull up the secondarylatch (1) inside of the hood center andlift the hood (2).

3. Raise the hood. It will completely raiseby itself after it has been raised abouthalfway.

D090200AHM

Closing the hood1. Before closing the hood, check the fol-

lowing:• All filler caps in the engine compart-

ment must be correctly installed.• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be removedfrom the engine compartment.

2. Lower the hood halfway and pushdown to securely lock in place.

HOOD

OHM048019 OHM048020


264

WARNING• Before closing the hood, ensure

that all obstructions are removedfrom the hood opening. Closingthe hood with an obstructionpresent in the hood opening mayresult in property damage orsevere personal injury.

• Do not leave gloves, rags or anyother combustible material in theengine compartment. Doing somay cause a heat-induced fire.

WARNING • Always double check to be sure

that the hood is firmly latchedbefore driving away. If it is notlatched, the hood could openwhile the vehicle is being driven,causing total loss of visibility,which might result in an accident.

• Do not move the vehicle with thehood raised. The view is blockedand the hood could fall or getdamaged.

4 27


D100100AHM

Opening the fuel filler lidThe fuel filler lid must be opened frominside the vehicle by pulling out the fuelfiller lid opener lever located on the dri-ver’s door.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the fuel filler lid does not openbecause ice has formed around it, taplightly or push on the lid to break the iceand release the lid. Do not pry on the lid.If necessary, spray around the lid withan approved de-icer fluid (do not useradiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicleto a warm place and allow the ice tomelt.

1. Stop the engine.2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull out the

fuel filler lid opener.3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1).4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel filler

cap (2) counterclockwise.5. Refuel as needed.

D100200AUN

Closing the fuel filler lid1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until

it “clicks”. This indicates that the cap issecurely tightened.

2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it inlightly and making sure that it issecurely closed.

D100300AHM-EC

FUEL FILLER LID

OHM048021N OHM048022 WARNING - Refueling• If pressurized fuel sprays out, it

can cover your clothes or skinand subject you to the risk of fireand burns. Always remove thefuel cap carefully and slowly. Ifthe cap is venting fuel or if youhear a hissing sound, wait untilthe condition stops before com-pletely removing the cap.

• Do not "top off" after the nozzleautomatically shuts off whenrefueling.

• Tighten the cap until it clicks, oth-erwise the Check Engine lightwill illuminate.

• Always check that the fuel cap isinstalled securely to prevent fuelspillage in the event of an acci-dent.


284

(Continued)• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refuelingsince you can generate staticelectricity by touching, rubbingor sliding against any item or fab-ric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)capable of producing static elec-tricity. Static electricity dischargecan ignite fuel vapors resulting inrapid burning. If you must re-enter the vehicle, you shouldonce again eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching a metal partof the vehicle, away from the fuelfiller neck, nozzle or other gaso-line source.

• When using an approvedportable fuel container, be sure toplace the container on theground prior to refueling. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Once refueling hasbegun, contact with the vehicleshould be maintained until thefilling is complete.

(Continued)

WARNING - Refueling dan-gers

Automotive fuels are flammablematerials. When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelines care-fully. Failure to follow these guide-lines may result in severe personalinjury, severe burns or death by fireor explosion.• Read and follow all warning post-

ed at the gas station facility.• Before refueling, note the loca-

tion of the Emergency GasolineShut-Off, if available, at the gasstation facility.

• Before touching the fuel nozzle,you should eliminate potentiallydangerous static electricity dis-charge by touching another metalpart of the vehicle, a safe dis-tance away from the fuel fillerneck, nozzle, or other gas source.

(Continued)

(Continued)Use only approved portable plas-tic fuel containers designed tocarry and store gasoline.

• Do not use cellular phones whilerefueling. Electric current and/orelectronic interference from cel-lular phones can potentiallyignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

• When refueling, always shut theengine off. Sparks produced byelectrical components related tothe engine can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Once refueling iscomplete, check to make sure thefiller cap and filler door aresecurely closed, before startingthe engine.

• DO NOT use matches or a lighterand DO NOT SMOKE or leave a litcigarette in your vehicle while ata gas station especially duringrefueling. Automotive fuel ishighly flammable and can, whenignited, result in fire.

(Continued)

4 29


D100500AHM-EU

Emergency fuel filler lid releaseIf the fuel filler lid does not open usingthe remote fuel filler lid release, you canopen it manually with a coin or flat-bladescrewdriver, etc. Remove the panel in theluggage compartment area. Pull the han-dle out slightly.

(Continued)• If a fire breaks out during refuel-

ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi-cle, and immediately contact themanager of the gas station andthen contact the local fire depart-ment. Follow any safety instruc-tions they provide.

CAUTION• Make sure to refuel with unleaded

fuel only.• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a genuineKIA cap or the equivalent speci-fied for your vehicle. An incorrectfuel filler cap can result in a seri-ous malfunction of the fuel sys-tem or emission control system.

• Do not spill fuel on the exteriorsurfaces of the vehicle. Any typeof fuel spilled on painted surfacesmay damage the paint.

• After refueling, make sure the fuelcap is installed securely to pre-vent fuel spillage in the event ofan accident.

CAUTIONDo not pull the handle excessively,otherwise the luggage compart-ment area trim or release handlemay be damaged.

OHM048023N


304

D110000AHM-EE

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof,you can slide or tilt your sunroof with thesunroof control lever located on the over-head console.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed,or tilted when the ignition switch is in theON position.

✽✽ NOTICE• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof

may not work properly due to freez-ing conditions.

• After the vehicle is washed or in arainstorm be sure to wipe off anywater that is on the sunroof beforeoperating it.

✽✽ NOTICEThe sunroof cannot slide when it is inthe tilt position nor can it be tilted whilein an open or slide position.

SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

OHM048024

CAUTIONDo not continue to move the sun-roof control lever after the sunroofis fully opened, closed, or tilted.Damage to the motor or systemcomponents could occur.

WARNING Never adjust the sunroof or sun-shade while driving. This couldresult in loss of control and an acci-dent that may cause death, seriousinjury, or property damage.

4 31


D110100AHM

Sliding the sunroof To open or close the sunroof (manualslide feature), pull or push the sunroofcontrol lever backward or forward to thefirst detent position.Pulling the control lever downward alsocloses the sunroof.

To open the sunroof automatically:Pull the sunroof control lever backward tothe second detent position and thenrelease it. The sunroof will slide openautomatically but will not open all theway. If you would like to completely openthe sunroof, pull the lever once more.However, the second time the lever ispulled, the sunroof will open only whilethe lever is pulled.To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,pull or push the sunroof control levermomentarily.

To close the sunroof automatically:Push the sunroof control lever forward tothe second detent position and thenrelease it. The sunroof will automaticallyclose all the way.To stop the sunroof sliding at any point,pull or push the sunroof control levermomentarily.

D110101AEN

Automatic reversalIf an object or part of the body is detect-ed while the sunroof is closing automati-cally, it will reverse the direction, and thenstop.The auto reverse function does not workif a tiny obstacle is between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the sunroof beforeclosing it.

OHM048025 OHM048026


324

D110200AHM

Tilting the sunroof To open the sunroof (autotilt feature),push the sunroof control lever upward tothe second detent. The sunroof will tilt allthe way open. To stop the sunroof tiltingat any point, operate the control lever.To close the sunroof, pull the sunrooflever downward until the sunroof movesto the desired position.

D110300AEN

Sunshade The sunshade will automatically openwith the glass panel when the glasspanel moves. Close it manually if youwant it closed.

WARNING - Sunroof• Be careful that no head, hands

and body parts are obstructingby a closing sunroof.

• Do not extend the face, neck,arms or body outside the sunroofwhile driving.

• Make sure your hands and headare safely out of the way beforeclosing a sunroof.

CAUTION• Periodically remove any dirt that

may accumulate on the guide rail.• If you try to open the sunroof

when the temperature is belowfreezing or when the sunroof iscovered with snow or ice, theglass or the motor could be dam-aged.

• The sunroof is made to slidetogether with the sunshade. Donot leave the sunshade closedwhile the sunroof is opened.

OHM048028OHM048027

4 33


D110500AHM-EE

Resetting the sunroofWhenever the vehicle battery is discon-nected or discharged, you must resetyour sunroof system as follows:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ONposition.

2. According to the position of the sun-roof, do the following.1) In case the sunroof is closed com-

pletely or tilted:Push the sunroof control leverupward until the sunroof tilts com-pletely upward.

2) In case the sunroof is open:Push the sunroof control lever for-ward until the sunroof closes com-pletely. Push the sunroof controllever upward until the sunroof tiltscompletely upward.

3. Release the sunroof control lever.4. Push the sunroof control lever upward

(for about 10 seconds) until the sun-roof has returned to the original tiltposition after it is raised a little higherthan the maximum tilt position. Then,release the lever.

5. Push the sunroof control lever upward(for about 6 seconds) until the sunroofoperates as follows;

TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN →SLIDE CLOSE

Then, release the lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof sys-tem has been reset.


344

DRIVER POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

D120000AHM

A driver position memory system is pro-vided to store and recall the driver seat,outside rearview mirror and steeringwheel positions with a simple buttonoperation. By saving the desired positionsinto the system memory, different driverscan reposition the driver seat, outsiderearview mirror and steering wheel basedupon their driving preference. If the bat-tery is disconnected, the position memo-ry will be lost and the driving positionsshould be restored in the system.

✽✽ NOTICEThe buzzer sounds 10 times if the mem-ory system malfunctions. Have the driv-er position memory system checked byan authorized KIA dealer.

Storing positions into memoryusing the buttons on the doorD120101AHM-EE

Storing driver’s seat positions1. Shift the transmission shift lever into P

(Park) while the ignition switch is ON.2. Adjust the driver seat, outside

rearview mirror and steering wheel topositions comfortable to the driver.

3. Press the SET button on the controlpanel. The system will beep once.

4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or2) within 5 seconds after pressing theSET button. The system will beeptwice when the memory has been suc-cessfully stored.

D120102AHM-EE

Recalling positions from memory1. Shift the transmisson shift lever into P

(Park) under one of the followings:• The ignition switch is ON.• The driver’s door is opened while the

ignition switch is in the LOCK or ACCposition.

• Within 30 seconds after the driver’sdoor is closed while the ignition switchis in the LOCK or ACC position.

2. To recall the position in memory, pressthe desired memory button (1 or 2).The system will beep once, then thedriver seat, outside rearview mirrorand steering wheel will automaticallyadjust to the stored positions.

Adjusting one of the control switches forthe driver seat, outside rearview mirrorand steering wheel while the system isrecalling the stored positions will causethe movement for that component to stopand move in the direction that the controlswitch is moved. Other components willcontinue to the recalled position.

OHM048031N

WARNING Never attempt to operate the driverposition memory system while thevehicle is moving.This could result in loss of control,and an accident causing death,serious injury, or property damage.

4 35


D120300AHM-EU

Easy access function (if equipped)With the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-tion, the system will move the driver’sseat and the steering wheel forward orrearward automatically so you can com-fortably enter and exit the vehicle.• With ignition key

- The steering wheel will move awayfrom the driver and the seat will moverearward, when the ignition key isremoved.

- The steering wheel will move towardthe driver and the seat will move for-ward, when the ignition key is insert-ed.

• With smart key- The steering wheel will move away

from the driver and the seat will moverearward, when the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the OFF position.

- The steering wheel will move towardthe driver and the seat will move for-ward, when the ENGINE START/STOP button is in the ACC position.

To deactivate or activate the easy accessfunction1. Shift the transmission shift lever into P

(Park) while the ignition switch is ON.2. Press the SET button and hold it for 10

seconds or more.3. Release the button after one or two

beep sounds. The system will beeponce to indicate the function deactivat-ed or twice to indicate the functionactivated.

D120400AEN

Reverse parking aid function (if equipped)While the vehicle is moving backward,the outside rearview mirror(s) will movedownward to aid reverse parking.According to the position of the outsiderearview mirror switch (1), the outsiderearview mirror(s) will operate as follows:

L : When the remote control outsiderearview mirror switch is selected tothe L position, both outside rearviewmirrors will move downward.

R : When the remote control outsiderearview mirror switch is selected tothe R position, only the passenger'soutside rearview mirror will movedownward.

WARNING Use caution when recalling adjust-ment memory while sitting in thevehicle. Adjust the seat position tothe desired position immediately ifthe seat moves too far in any direc-tion.

OHM048032N


364

Neutral : When the remote control out-side rearview mirror switch isplaced in the middle position,the outside rearview mirrorswill not operate while the vehi-cle is moving backward.

✽✽ NOTICEThe outside rearview mirrors will auto-matically revert to their original posi-tions under the following conditions:1. Ignition switch is in the LOCK posi-

tion.2. Shift lever is moved to any position

except R.3. Remote control outside rearview mir-

ror switch is placed in the middleposition.

D310000AHM-EE

You may adjust the position of the accel-erator and brake pedals by pressing theswitch.The position of the pedals can be adjust-ed in any position of the ignition switch.But the transmission shift lever must bein the P (Park) position when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.• If you press the portion of the

switch, the pedals will move toward thedriver.

• If you press the portion of theswitch, the pedals will move away fromthe driver.

D310100AHM

Setting the adjustable pedal posi-tion1. Be sure the parking brake is engaged.2. Move the accelerator and brake ped-

als to the front most position by press-ing the portion of the switch.

3. Adjust the seat position and the steer-ing wheel angle properly.

4. Move the pedals toward you until youcan fully depress the brake pedal bypushing the portion of the switch.

5. Depress the pedals a few times to getused to the pedals after the adjustment.

OHM048033N

WARNING• Adjust the pedals after parking

the vehicle on level ground.Never attempt to adjust the ped-als while the vehicle is moving.

• Never adjust the pedals with yourfoot on the accelerator pedal asthis may result in increasing theengine speed and acceleration.

• Make sure that you can fullydepress the brake pedal beforedriving. Otherwise, you may notbe able to hold down the brakepedal firmly in an emergencystop.

POWER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)

4 37


D130100AHM-EU

Power steeringPower steering uses energy from theengine to assist you in steering the vehi-cle. If the engine is off or if the powersteering system becomes inoperative,the vehicle may still be steered, but it willrequire increased steering effort.Should you notice any change in theeffort required to steer during normalvehicle operation, have the power steer-ing checked by an authorized KIA dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the power steering drive belt breaksor if the power steering pump malfunc-tions, the steering effort will greatlyincrease.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the vehicle is parked for extendedperiods outside in cold weather (below-10°C/14°F), the power steering mayrequire increased effort when the engineis first started. This is caused byincreased fluid viscosity due to the coldweather and does not indicate a mal-function.When this happens, increase the engineRPM by depressing the accelerator untilthe RPM reaches 1,500 rpm then releaseor let the engine idle for two or threeminutes to warm up the fluid.

D130300AEN

Tilt steering Tilt steering allows you to adjust thesteering wheel before you drive. You canalso raise it to give your legs more roomwhen you exit and enter the vehicle.

The steering wheel should be positionedso that it is comfortable for you to drive,while permitting you to see the instru-ment panel warning lights and gauges.

STEERING WHEEL

CAUTIONNever hold the steering wheel to theextreme right or left for more than 5seconds with the engine running.Holding the steering wheel for morethan 5 seconds in either positionmay cause damage to the powersteering pump.

WARNING• Never adjust the angle of the

steering wheel while driving. Youmay lose steering control andcause severe personal injury,death or accidents.

• After adjusting, push the steeringwheel both up and down to becertain it is locked in position.


384

D130301AHM

Manual type (if equipped)To change the steering wheel angle,adjust the steering wheel to the desiredangle (2) while pulling the lock-releaselever (1) and then release the lock-release lever to lock the steering wheel inplace. Be sure to adjust the steeringwheel to the desired position before driv-ing.

D130302AHM-EE

Electric type (if equipped)Adjust the steering wheel angle (2) andposition (3) with the control switch (1).Never adjust the position of the steeringwheel while driving.

D130500AUN

HornTo sound the horn, press the horn sym-bol on your steering wheel. Check thehorn regularly to be sure it operatesproperly.

✽✽ NOTICETo sound the horn, press the area indi-cated by the horn symbol on your steer-ing wheel (see illustration). The horn willoperate only when this area is pressed.

OHM048034N OHM048035N OHM048036N

CAUTIONDo not strike the horn severely tooperate it, or hit it with your fist. Donot press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.

4 39


D140100AHM

Inside rearview mirrorAdjust the rearview mirror so that thecenter view through the rear window isseen. Make this adjustment before youstart driving.

D140101AHM

Day/night rearview mirror Make this adjustment before you startdriving and while the day/night lever is inthe day position.Pull the day/night lever toward you toreduce the glare from the headlights ofthe vehicles behind you during night driv-ing.Remember that you lose some rearviewclarity in the night position.

D140102AHM-EE

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) (if equipped)The electric rearview mirror automatical-ly controls the glare from the headlightsof the vehicles behind you in nighttime orlow light driving conditions. The sensormounted in the mirror senses the lightlevel around the vehicle, and automati-cally controls the headlight glare from thevehicles behind you.When the engine is running, the glare isautomatically controlled by the sensormounted in the rearview mirror.Whenever the shift lever is shifted intoreverse (R), the mirror will automaticallygo to the brightest setting in order toimprove the drivers view behind the vehi-cle.

MIRRORS

WARNING - Rear visibilityDo not place objects in the rearseat or cargo area which wouldinterfere with your vision throughthe rear window. OHM048037

CAUTIONWhen cleaning the mirror, use apaper towel or similar materialdampened with glass cleaner. Donot spray glass cleaner directly onthe mirror. It may cause the liquidcleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Day

Night

WARNING Do not adjust the rearview mirrorwhile the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, andan accident which could causedeath, serious injury or propertydamage.


404

To operate the electric rearview mirror:• Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn

the automatic dimming function on.The mirror indicator light will illuminate.Press the ON/OFF button to turn theautomatic dimming function off. Themirror indicator light will turn off.

• The mirror defaults to the ON positionwhenever the ignition switch is turnedon.

D140105AEN-EC

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) withcompass and HomeLink® system (if equipped)Your vehicle may be equipped with aGentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror with aZ-Nav™ Electronic Compass Displayand an Integrated HomeLink® WirelessControl System. During nighttime driving,this feature will automatically detect andreduce rearview mirror glare while thecompass indicates the direction the vehi-cle is pointed. The HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver allows you to activate yourgarage door(s), electric gate, home light-ing, etc.

(1) Channel 1 button(2) Channel 2 button(3) Status indicator LED(4) Channel 3 button(5) Rear light sensor(6) Dimming ON/OFF button(7) Compass control button(8) Compass display

OHM048129

OHM048039

■ Type A

■ Type B

Indicator

Rear view display

Indicator

Sensor

Sensor

OHM048238N

4 41


Automatic-Dimming Night VisionSafety™ (NVS®) MirrorThe NVS® Mirror in your vehicle is themost advanced way to reduce annoyingglare in the rearview mirror during anydriving situation. For more informationregarding NVS® mirrors and other appli-cations, please refer to the Gentex web-site:www.gentex.com

Automatic-dimming functionYour mirror will automatically dim upondetecting glare from the vehicles travel-ing behind you. The auto-dimming func-tion can be controlled by the DimmingON/OFF Button:

1. Pressing the button turns the auto-dimming function OFF which is indicat-ed by the green Status Indicator LEDturning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns theauto-dimming function ON which isindicated by the green Status IndicatorLED turning on.

✽✽ NOTICEThe mirror defaults to the ON positioneach time the vehicle is started.

Z-Nav™ Compass DisplayThe NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is alsoequipped with a Z-Nav™ Compass thatshows the vehicle Compass heading inthe Display Window using the 8 basiccardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

Compass functionThe Compass can be turned ON andOFF and will remember the last statewhen the ignition is cycled. To turn thedisplay feature ON/OFF:1. Press and release the button to

turn the display feature OFF.2. Press and release the button again

to turn the display back ON.Additional options can be set with pressand hold sequences of the button andare detailed below.

There is a difference between magneticnorth and true north. The compass in themirror can compensate for this differencewhen it knows the Magnetic Zone inwhich it is operating. This is set either bythe dealer or by the user. The operatingZone Numbers for North America areshown in the figure on the following sec-tion.

CAUTIONThe NVS® Mirror automaticallyreduces glare during driving condi-tions based upon light levels moni-tored in front of the vehicle andfrom the rear of the vehicle. Theselight sensors are visible throughopenings in the front and rear of themirror case. Any object that wouldobstructs either light sensor willdegrade the automatic dimmingcontrol feature.


424

To adjust the Zone setting:1. Determine the desired Zone Number

based upon your current location onthe Zone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for morethan 3 but less than 6 seconds, thecurrent Zone Number will appear onthe display.

3. Pressing and holding the buttonagain will cause the numbers to incre-ment (Note: they will repeat …13, 14,15, 1, 2, …). Releasing the buttonwhen the desired Zone Numberappears on the display will set the newZone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the compasswill start displaying a compass head-ing again.

There are some conditions that cancause changes to the vehicle magnets,such as installing a ski rack or a CBantenna. Body repair work on the vehiclecan also cause changes to the vehicle'smagnetic field. In these situations, thecompass will need to be re-calibrated toquickly correct for these changes. To re-calibrate the compass:

B520C05NF

4 43


1. Press and hold the button for morethan 6 seconds. When the compassmemory is cleared a "C" will appear inthe display.

2. To calibrate the compass, drive thevehicle in 2 complete circles at lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

Integrated HomeLink® Wireless ControlSystemThe HomeLink® Wireless ControlSystem provides a convenient way toreplace up to three hand-held radio-fre-quency (RF) transmitters with a singlebuilt-in device. This innovative feature willlearn the radio frequency codes of mostcurrent transmitters to operate devicessuch as gate operators, garage dooropeners, entry door locks, security sys-tems, even home lighting. Both standardand rolling code-equipped transmitterscan be programmed by following the out-lined procedures. Additional HomeLink®

information can be found at: www.home-link.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Retain the original transmitter of the RFdevice you are programming for use inother vehicles as well as for futureHomeLink® programming. It is also sug-gested that upon the sale of the vehicle,the programmed HomeLink® buttons beerased for security purposes.

Programming HomeLink®

✽✽ NOTICE• When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park the vehi-cle outside of the garage.

• It is recommended that a new batterybe placed in the hand-held transmit-ter of the device being programmed toHomeLink® for quicker training andaccurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

• Some vehicles may require the igni-tion switch to be turned to the second(or "accessories") position for pro-gramming and/or operation ofHomeLink.

• In the event that there are still pro-gramming difficulties or questionsafter following the programming stepslisted below, contact HomeLink® at:www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

CAUTIONBefore programming HomeLink® toa garage door opener or gate oper-ator, make sure that people andobjects are out of the way of thedevice to prevent potential harm ordamage. Do not use HomeLink®

with any garage door opener thatlacks the safety stop and reversefeatures required by U.S. federalsafety standards (this includes anygarage door opener model manu-factured before April 1, 1982). Agarage door that cannot detect anobject - signaling the door to stopand reverse - does not meet currentU.S. federal safety standards. Usinga garage door opener without thesefeatures increases the risk of seri-ous injury or death.


444

Standard programmingTo train most devices, follow theseinstructions:1. For first-time programming, press and

hold the two outside buttons,HomeLink® Channel 1 and Channel 3Buttons, until the indicator light beginsto flash (after 20 seconds). Releaseboth buttons. Do not hold the buttonsfor longer than 30 seconds.

2. Position the end of your hand-heldtransmitter 2-8 cm (1-3 inches) awayfrom the HomeLink® buttons whilekeeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold boththe HomeLink® and hand-held trans-mitter button. DO NOT release the but-tons until step 4 has been completed.

4. While continuing to hold the buttonsthe red Indicator Status LED will flashslowly and then rapidly afterHomeLink® successfully trains to thefrequency signal from the hand-heldtransmitter. Release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trainedHomeLink® button and observe the redStatus Indicator LED. If the indicatorlight stays on constantly, programmingis complete and your device shouldactivate when the HomeLink® button ispressed and released.

6. To program the remaining twoHomeLink® buttons, follow steps 2through 5.

Rolling code programmingRolling code devices which are "code-protected" and manufactured after 1996may be determined by the following:• Reference the device owner's manual

for verification.• The handheld transmitter appears to

program the HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver but does not activate thedevice.

• Press and hold the trained HomeLinkbutton. The device has the rolling codefeature if the indicator light flashes rap-idly and then turns solid after 2 sec-onds.

To train rolling code devices, follow theseinstructions:1. At the garage door opener receiver

(motor-head unit) in the garage, locatethe "learn" or "smart" button. This canusually be found where the hangingantenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. Exact location and color ofthe button may vary by garage dooropener brand.

If there is difficulty locating the trainingbutton, reference the device owner'smanual or please visit our Web site atwww.homelink.com.

2. Firmly press and release the "learn" or"smart" button (which activates the"training light").

✽✽ NOTICEThere are 30 seconds in which to initiatestep 3.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,hold for two seconds and then releasethe desired HomeLink® button. Repeatthe "press/hold/release" sequence asecond time to complete the program-ming. (Some devices may require youto repeat this sequence a third time tocomplete the programming.)

4. Press and hold the just-trainedHomeLink® button and observe the redStatus Indicator LED. If the indicatorlight stays on constantly, programmingis complete and your device shouldactivate.

5. To program the remaining twoHomeLink® buttons, follow either steps1 through 4 above for other RollingCode devices or steps 2 through 5 inStandard Programming for standarddevices.

4 45


Gate operator & Canadian program-mingDuring programming, your handheldtransmitter may automatically stop trans-mitting. Continue to press the IntegratedHomeLink® Wireless Control System but-ton (note steps 2 through 4 in theStandard Programming portion of thisdocument) while you press and re-press("cycle") your handheld transmitter everytwo seconds until the frequency signalhas been learned. The indicator light willflash slowly and then rapidly after sever-al seconds upon successful training.

Operating HomeLink®

To operate, simply press and release theprogrammed HomeLink® button.Activation will now occur for the traineddevice (i.e. garage door opener, gateoperator, security system, entry doorlock, home/office lighting, etc.). For con-venience, the hand-held transmitter ofthe device may also be used at any time.

Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

buttonTo program a new device to a previouslytrained HomeLink® button, follow thesesteps:1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. Do NOT release until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehandheld transmitter 2 to 8 cm (1 to 3inches) away from the HomeLink® sur-face.

3. Press and hold the handheld transmit-ter button. The HomeLink® indicatorlight will flash, first slowly and then rap-idly.

4. When the indicator light begins to flashrapidly, release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trainedHomeLink® button and observe the redStatus Indicator LED. If the indicatorlight stays on constantly, programmingis complete and your new deviceshould activate.

Erasing HomeLink® buttonsIndividual buttons cannot be erased.However, to erase all three programmedbuttons:1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink® buttons until the indicatorlight begins to flash-after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold forlonger than 30 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink® WirelessControl System is now in the training(learn) mode and can be programmed atany time following the appropriate stepsin the Programming sections above.


464

FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. this device may not cause harmful



NVS® is a registered trademark and Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the GentexCorporation, Zeeland, Michigan.HomeLink® is a registered trademarkowned by Johnson Controls,Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

D140200AHM-EU

Outside rearview mirror Be sure to adjust the mirror anglesbefore driving.Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearviewmirrors. The mirrors can be adjustedremotely with the remote switch. The mir-ror heads can be folded back to preventdamage during an automatic car wash orwhen passing through a narrow street.

WARNINGThe transceiver has been testedand complies with FCC andIndustry Canada rules. Changes ormodifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsiblefor compliance could void theuser's authority to operate thedevice.

WARNING - Rearview mir-rors

• The right outside rearview mirroris convex. Objects seen in themirror are closer than theyappear.

• Use your interior rearview mirroror direct observation to deter-mine the actual distance of fol-lowing vehicles when changinglanes.

CAUTIONDo not scrape ice off the mirrorface; this may damage the surfaceof the glass. If ice should restrictthe movement of the mirror, do notforce the mirror for adjustment. Toremove ice, use a deicer spray, or asponge or soft cloth with very warmwater.

CAUTIONIf the mirror is jammed with ice, donot adjust the mirror by force. Usean approved spray de-icer (not radi-ator antifreeze) to release thefrozen mechanism or move thevehicle to a warm place and allowthe ice to melt.

WARNING Do not adjust or fold the outsiderearview mirrors while the vehicleis moving. This could result in lossof control, and an accident whichcould cause death, serious injuryor property damage.

4 47


D140201AHM-EE

Remote controlThe electric remote control mirror switchallows you to adjust the position of theleft and right outside rearview mirrors. Toadjust the position of either mirror theignition switch should be in the ACC posi-tion. Push the switch (1) to R or L toselect the right side mirror or the left sidemirror, then press a corresponding pointon the mirror adjustment control to posi-tion the selected mirror up, down, left orright.After the adjustment, put the switch intothe neutral (center) position to preventinadvertent adjustment.

D140202AHM-EU

Folding the outside rearview mirrorTo fold the outside rearview mirror, graspthe housing of the mirror and then fold ittoward the rear of the vehicle.

OHM048040N

CAUTION• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-ing angles, but the motor contin-ues to operate while the switch ispressed. Do not press the switchlonger than necessary, the motormay be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the out-side rearview mirror by hand.Doing so may damage the parts.

OHM048220N


484

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

1. Tachometer

2. Turn signal indicators

3. Speedometer

4. Engine temperature gauge

5. Warning and indicator lights

6. Shift position indicator

7. Odometer

8. Trip computer*

9. Fuel gauge

10. LCD display*

* : if equipped

OHM048042C/OHM048043CD150000AHM-EE

■■ Type A

■■ Type B

* The actual cluster in the vehicle may differfrom the illustration.For more details refer to the "Gauges" inthe next pages.

4 49


D150100AHM-EE

Instrument panel illumination(if equipped)When the vehicle’s parking lights orheadlights are on, rotate the illuminationcontrol knob to adjust the brightness ofthe instrument panel illumination.The instrument cluster (Type B) illumina-tion intensity can be adjusted by rotatingthe control knob with the headlight switchin any position when the ignition switch isin the ON position.

GaugesD150201AHM

Speedometer The speedometer indicates the forwardspeed of the vehicle.The speedometer is calibrated in kilome-ters per hour and/or miles per hour.

D150202AHM

Tachometer The tachometer indicates the approxi-mate number of engine revolutions perminute (rpm).Use the tachometer to select the correctshift points and to prevent lugging and/orover-revving the engine.

OHM048044N OHM048047N

OHM048045L

OHM048046L

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type A ■ Type B


504

When the door is opened, or if the engineis not started within 1 minute, thetachometer pointer may move slightly inthe ON position with the engine OFF.This movement is normal and will notaffect the accuracy of the tachometeronce the engine is running.

D150203AUN

Engine temperature gauge This gauge shows the temperature of theengine coolant when the ignition switchis ON.Do not continue driving with an overheat-ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, referto “If the engine overheats” in section 6.

OHM048048

CAUTIONIf the gauge pointer moves beyondthe normal range area toward the“H” position, it indicates overheat-ing that may damage the engine.

CAUTIONDo not operate the engine withinthe tachometer's RED ZONE.This may cause severe engine dam-age.

WARNINGNever remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. The enginecoolant is under pressure andcould cause severe burns. Waituntil the engine is cool beforeadding coolant to the reservoir.

■■ TType Aype A ■ Type B

4 51


D150204BHM-EE

Fuel gaugeThe fuel gauge indicates the approxi-mate amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. The fuel tank capacity is given in sec-tion 8. The fuel gauge is supplemented bya low fuel warning light, which will illumi-nate when the fuel tank is nearly empty.On inclines or curves, the fuel gaugepointer may fluctuate or the low fuelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual due to the movement of fuel in thetank.

D150206AHM-EU

Odometer ⋅⋅ Tripmeter/Trip computer (if equipped)The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system thatdisplays information related to driving,such as odometer, tripmeter, distance toempty, average speed, driving time, aver-age fuel consumption and instant fuelconsumption on the display when theignition switch is in the ON position. Allstored driving information (exceptodometer, distance to empty and instantfuel consumption) is reseted if the bat-tery is disconnected.

OHM048049 OHM048052

WARNING - Fuel gaugeRunning out of fuel can exposevehicle occupants to danger.You must stop and obtain addition-al fuel as soon as possible after thewarning light comes on or when thegauge indicator comes close to theE level.

■ Type A ■ Type B

CAUTIONAvoid driving with a very low fuellevel. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, damag-ing catalytic converter.


524

The odometer is always displayed untilthe display is turned off.Press the TRIP button for less than 1second to select tripmeter, distance toempty, average speed, driving time, aver-age fuel consumption or instant fuel con-sumption function as follows:

* : if equipped

OdometerThe odometer indicates the total dis-tance the vehicle has been driven.You will also find the odometer useful todetermine when periodic maintenanceshould be performed.

TripmeterTRIP A : Tripmeter ATRIP B : Tripmeter BThis mode indicates the distance of indi-vidual trips selected since the last trip-meter reset.The meter's working range is from 0.0 to999.9 km (0.0 to 999.9 miles).Pressing the RESET button for morethan 1 second, when the tripmeter (TRIPA or TRIP B) is being displayed, clearsthe tripmeter to zero (0.0).

OHM048050 OHM048051Tripmeter B

Average speed (AVG)*

Driving time (E/T)*

Average fuel consumption (AVG)*

Tripmeter A

Distance to empty (RANGE)*

Instant fuel consumption (Instant)*

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type B

4 53


Distance to empty (if equipped)This mode indicates the estimated dis-tance to empty based on the current fuelin the fuel tank and the amount of fueldelivered to the engine. When theremaining distance is below 30 km (50miles), “---” will be displayed and the dis-tance to empty indicator will blink.The meter’s working range is from 30 to990 km (50 to 990 miles).

Average speed (if equipped)This mode calculates the average speedof the vehicle since the last averagespeed reset.Even if the vehicle is not in motion, theaverage speed keeps going while theengine is running.Pressing the RESET button for morethan 1 second, when the average speedis being displayed, clears the averagespeed to zero (---).

Driving time (if equipped)This mode indicates the total time trav-eled since the last driving time reset.Even if the vehicle is not in motion, thedriving time keeps going while the engineis running.The meter’s working range is from0:00~99:59.Pressing the RESET button for morethan 1 second, when the driving time isbeing displayed, clears the driving time tozero (0:00).

OHM048054C

■ Type A

■ Type B

OHM048057C

■ Type A

■ Type B

OHM048058N

■ Type A

■ Type B


544

Average fuel consumption (if equipped)This mode calculates the average fuelconsumption from the total fuel used andthe distance since the last average con-sumption reset. The total fuel used is cal-culated from the fuel consumption input.For an accurate calculation, drive morethan 50 m (0.03 miles).Pressing the RESET button for more than1 second, when the average fuel con-sumption is being displayed, clears theaverage fuel consumption to zero (--.-).

Instant fuel consumption (if equipped)This mode calculates the instant fuelconsumption during the last few sec-onds.

✽✽ NOTICE• If the vehicle is not on level ground or

the battery power has been interrupt-ed, the “Distance to empty” functionmay not operate correctly.The trip computer may not registeradditional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6gallons) of fuel are added to the vehi-cle.

• The fuel consumption and distance toempty values may vary significantlybased on driving conditions, drivinghabits, and condition of the vehicle.

• The distance to empty value is an esti-mate of the available driving distance.This value may differ from the actualdriving distance available.

OHM048236C

■ Type A

■ Type B

OHM048237L

■ Type A

■ Type B

4 55


D150300AUN

Warnings and indicatorsAll warning lights are checked by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine). Any light that does not illuminateshould be checked by an authorized KIAdealer.After starting the engine, check to makesure that all warning lights are off. If anyare still on, this indicates a situation thatneeds attention. When releasing theparking brake, the brake system warninglight should go off. The fuel warning lightwill stay on if the fuel level is low.

D150302AUN

Air bag warning light

This warning light will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds each time youturn the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.This light also comes on when the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) isnot working properly. If the AIR BAGwarning light does not come on, or con-tinuously remains on after operating forabout 6 seconds when you turned theignition switch to the ON position or start-ed the engine, or if it comes on whiledriving, have the SRS inspected by anauthorized KIA dealer.

D150303AHM-EE

Anti-lock brake system(ABS) warning light

This light illuminates if the ignition switchis turned ON and goes off in approxi-mately 3 seconds if the system is operat-ing normally.If the ABS warning light remains on,comes on while driving, or does notcome on when the ignition switch isturned to the ON position, this indicatesthat the ABS may have malfunctioned.If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby an authorized KIA dealer as soon aspossible. The normal braking system willstill be operational, but without the assis-tance of the anti-lock brake system.


564

Electronic brakeforce distribution(EBD) systemwarning lightIf these two warning lights illuminate atthe same time while driving, the ABS andEBD system may have malfunctioned.In this case, your ABS and regular brakesystem may not work normally. Have thevehicle checked by an authorized KIAdealer as soon as possible.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the ABS warning light or EBD warn-ing light is on and stays on, thespeedometer or odometer/tripmetermay not work. In this case, have yourvehicle checked by an authorized KIAdealer as soon as possible.

D150304AHM-EU

Seat belt warning

As a reminder to the driver, the seat beltwarning light will blink for approximately6 seconds each time you turn the ignitionswitch ON, regardless of belt fastening.If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedwhen the ignition switch is turned on, theseat belt warning light and the seat beltwarning chime will operate for approxi-mately 6 seconds. But if it is fastenedwithin the 6 seconds, the warning lightwill blink till the 6 seconds and the warn-ing chime will turn off immediately.If the driver's seat belt is disconnectedafter the ignition switch is turned to theON position, the seat belt warning lightwill blink for approximately 6 seconds.But if it is fastened within the 6 seconds,the warning light will turn off immediately.If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h(6 mph), the seat belt warning light andchime will operate approximately 11times with a pattern of 6 seconds on and24 seconds off until the belt is fastenedor the vehicle speed decreases below 5km/h (3 mph).

D150305AHM

Turn signal indicator

The blinking green arrows on the instru-ment panel show the direction indicatedby the turn signals. If the arrow comes onbut does not blink, blinks more rapidlythan normal, or does not illuminate at all,it indicates a malfunction in the turn sig-nal system.You should consult your deal-er for repairs.

D150306AUN

High beam indicator

This indicator illuminates when the head-lights are on and in the high beam posi-tion or when the turn signal lever is pulledinto the Flash-to-Pass position.

WARNINGIf both ABS and brake warninglights are on and stay on, your vehi-cle’s brake system will not worknormally during sudden braking. Inthis case, avoid high speed drivingand abrupt braking. Have your vehi-cle checked by an authorized KIAdealer as soon as possible.

4 57


D150341AHM

Light on indicator (if equipped)

The indicator illuminates when the taillights or headlights are ON.

D150309AUN

Front fog light indicator (if equipped)

The indicator illuminates when the frontfog lights ON.

D150307AHM

Engine oil pressure warning light

This warning light indicates the engine oilpressure is low.If the warning light illuminates while driv-ing:1. Drive safely to the side of the road and

stop.2. With the engine off, check the engine

oil level. If the level is low, add oil asrequired.

If the warning light remains on afteradding oil or if oil is not available, call anauthorized KIA dealer.

CAUTIONIf the engine is not stopped imme-diately after the engine oil pressurewarning light is illuminated, severedamage could result.

CAUTIONIf the oil pressure warning lightstays on while the engine is run-ning, serious engine damage mayresult. The oil pressure warninglight comes on whenever there isinsufficient oil pressure. In normaloperation, it should come on whenthe ignition switch is turned on,then go out when the engine isstarted. If the oil pressure warninglight stays on while the engine isrunning, there is a serious malfunc-tion.If this happens, stop the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so, turn offthe engine and check the oil level. Ifthe oil level is low, fill the engine oilto the proper level and start theengine again. If the light stays onwith the engine running, turn theengine off immediately. In anyinstance where the oil light stays onwhen the engine is running, theengine should be checked by anauthorized KIA dealer before thevehicle is driven again.


584

D150308AHM-EE

Parking brake & brakefluid warning light

Parking brake warning This light is illuminated when the parkingbrake is applied with the ignition switch inthe START or ON position. The warninglight should go off after a few secondswhen the parking brake is released.

Low brake fluid level warningIf the warning light remains on, it mayindicate that the brake fluid level in thereservoir is low.If the warning light remains on:1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and addfluid as required. Then check all brakecomponents for fluid leaks.

3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks arefound, the warning light remains on orthe brakes do not operate properly.Have the vehicle towed to any author-ized KIA dealer for a brake systeminspection and necessary repairs.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diago-nal braking systems. This means you stillhave braking on two wheels even if oneof the dual systems should fail. With onlyone of the dual systems working, morethan normal pedal travel and greaterpedal pressure are required to stop thevehicle. Also, the vehicle will not stop inas short a distance with only a portion ofthe brake system working. If the brakesfail while you are driving, shift to a lowergear for additional engine braking andstop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.To check bulb operation, check whetherthe parking brake and brake fluid warninglight illuminates when the ignition switchis in the ON position.

D150312AAM

Shift patternindicator

This indicator displays which automatictransaxle shift position is selected.

D150301AHM-EE

Engine coolanttemperature warning light(if equipped)

The warning light illuminates if the tem-perature of the engine coolant is above125±2.5°C (257±4.5°F).Do not continue driving with an overheat-ed engine. If your vehicle overheats, referto “Overheating” in the Index.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the engine coolant temperature warn-ing light illuminates, it indicates over-heating that may damage the engine.

WARNING Driving the vehicle with a warninglight on is dangerous. If the brakewarning light remains on, have thebrakes checked and repaired imme-diately by an authorized KIA dealer.

Type A Type B

4 59


D150331AHM

Low tire pressure telltale

The low tire pressure telltale comes onfor 3 seconds after the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position.If the warning light does not come on, orcontinuously remains on after coming onfor about 3 seconds when you turned theignition key to the "ON" position, the TirePressure Monitoring System is not work-ing properly. If this occurs, have yourvehicle checked by an KIA authorizeddealer as soon as possible.This warning light will also illuminate ifone or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. You should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible. Ifthe warning light illuminates while driv-ing, reduce vehicle speed immediatelyand stop the vehicle.Avoid hard braking and overcorrecting atthe steering wheel. Inflate the tires to theproper pressure as indicated on the vehi-cle’s tire information placard.

D150332AHM

TPMS (Tire PressureMonitoring System)malfunction indicator

TPMS malfunction indicator comes on for3 seconds after the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position. If the warning lightdoes not come on, or continuouslyremains on after coming on for about 3seconds when you turned the ignition keyto the "ON" position, the Tire PressureMonitoring System is not working proper-ly. If this occurs, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized KIA dealer assoon as possible.The warning light also comes on andstays on when there is a problem with theTire Pressure Monitoring System.If this happens, the system may not mon-itor the tire pressure. Have the systemchecked by an authorized KIA dealer assoon as possible.

WARNING Significantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstable and cancontribute to loss of vehicle controland increased braking distances.Continued driving tire with lowpressure tires will cause the tires tooverheat and fail.

TPMS


604

D150313AUN

Charging system warninglight

This warning light indicates a malfunctionof either the generator or electricalcharging system.If the warning light comes on while thevehicle is in motion:1. Drive to the nearest safe location.2. With the engine off, check the genera-

tor drive belt for looseness or break-age.

3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a prob-lem exists somewhere in the electricalcharging system. Have an authorizedKIA dealer correct the problem assoon as possible.

D150316AHM

Door open posi-tion indicator

This indicator illuminates when a door isnot closed securely.The indicator displays which door isopened.

D150315AUN

Tailgate open warning light

This warning light illuminates when thetailgate is not closed securely with theignition switch in any position.

WARNING • The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire damagecaused by external factors.

• If you feel any vehicle instability,immediately take your foot off theaccelerator, apply the brakesgradually and with light force,and slowly move to a safe posi-tion off the road.

Type A Type B

4 61


D150316AUN

Door ajar warning light

This warning light illuminates when adoor is not closed securely with the igni-tion switch in any position.

D150317AHM-EE

Immobilizer indicator (if equipped)Without smart key systemThis indicator light illuminates when theimmobilizer key is inserted and turned tothe ON position to start the engine.At this time, you can start the engine.Thelight goes out after the engine is running.If this light blinks when the ignition switchis in the ON position before starting theengine, have the system checked by anauthorized KIA dealer.

With smart key system If any of the following occurs in a vehicleequipped with the smart key, the immobi-lizer indicator illuminates, blinks or goesoff.• When the smart key is in the vehicle, if

the ENGINE START/STOP button is inthe ACC or ON position, the indicatorwill illuminate for a few minutes to indi-cate that you are able to start theengine. However, when the smart keyis not in the vehicle, if the ENGINESTART/STOP button is pressed, theindicator will blink for a few minutes toindicate that you are not be able tostart the engine.

• When the ENGINE START/STOP but-ton is turned to the ON position fromthe ACC position without the smart keyin the vehicle, the indicator light blinksfor a few minutes to indicate that youare not be able to start the engine.

• When the battery is weak, if theENGINE START/STOP button ispressed, the indicator will blink and youare not able to start the engine.However, you are able to start theengine by inserting the smart key inthe smart key holder. If the smart keysystem related parts have a problem,the indicator will blink.

D150318AHM

Low fuel level warning light

This warning light indicates the fuel tankis nearly empty. When it comes on, youshould add fuel as soon as possible.Driving with the fuel level warning light onor with the fuel level below “E” can causethe engine to misfire and damage thecatalytic converter (if equipped).

D150319AHM

Low washer fluid levelwarning light (if equipped)

This warning light indicates the washerfluid reservoir is nearly empty. Refill thewasher fluid as soon as possible.


624

D150320AHM-EU

Malfunction indicator (MIL)(check engine light) (if equipped)This indicator light is part of the EngineControl System which monitors variousemission control system components. Ifthis light illuminates while driving, it indi-cates that a potential malfunction hasbeen detected somewhere in the emis-sion control system.This light will also illuminate when theignition switch is turned to the ON posi-tion, and will go out in a few secondsafter the engine is started. If it illuminateswhile driving, or does not illuminate whenthe ignition switch is turned to the ONposition, take your vehicle to your near-est authorized KIA dealer and have thesystem checked.Generally, your vehicle will continue to bedrivable, but have the system checked byan authorized KIA dealer promptly.

D150323AUN-EU

ESC (Electronic StabilityControl) indicator (if equipped)The ESC indicator will illuminate whenthe ignition switch is turned ON, butshould go off after approximately 3 sec-onds. When the ESC is on, it monitorsthe driving conditions and under normaldriving conditions, the ESC light willremain off. When a slippery or low trac-tion condition is encountered, the ESCwill operate, and the ESC indicator willblink to indicate the ESC is operating.

D150324AUN-EU

ESC OFF indicator (if equipped)

The ESC OFF indicator will illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turned ON,but should go off after approximately 3seconds. To switch to ESC OFF mode,press the ESC OFF button. The ESCOFF indicator will illuminate indicatingthe ESC is deactivated. If this indicatorstays on when ESC OFF is not selected,the ESC may have malfunctioned. Takeyour vehicle to an authorized KIA dealerand have the system checked.

ESC

ESCOFF

CAUTIONIf the Emission Control SystemMalfunction Indicator Light illumi-nates, potential catalytic converterdamage is possible. This couldresult in loss of engine power. Havethe Engine Control System inspect-ed as soon as possible by anauthorized KIA dealer.

CAUTIONProlonged driving with the EmissionControl System MalfunctionIndicator Light illuminated maycause damage to the emission con-trol systems which could effect dri-vability and/or fuel economy.

4 63


D150343AHM-EU

DBC (Downhillbrake control)indicator(if equipped)

Type AThe DBC indicator will illuminate whenthe DBC button is pressed and the sys-tem is on.When driving down a steep hill at aspeed under 35 km/h (22 mph) the DBCwill operate and the DBC indicator willblink to indicate the DBC is operating.

Type BThe white DBC indicator will illuminatewhen the DBC button is pressed and thesystem is on.When driving down a steep hill at aspeed under 35 km/h (22 mph) the DBCwill operate and the yellow DBC indicatorwill illuminate to indicate the DBC isoperating.

If the red indicator illuminates, the DBCsystem may have malfunctioned. Takeyour vehicle to an authorized KIA dealerand have the system checked.

D150325AHM

Cruise indicators (if equipped)

CRUISE indicator

The indicator light illuminates when thecruise control system is enabled.The cruise indicator light in the instru-ment cluster is illuminated when thecruise control ON-OFF switch on thesteering wheel is pulled.The indicator light goes off when thecruise control ON-OFF switch is pulledagain. For more information about theuse of cruise control, refer to “Cruisecontrol system” in section 5.

Cruise SET indicator

The indicator light illuminates when thecruise function switch (-/SET or RES/+)is ON.The cruise SET indicator light in theinstrument cluster is illuminated whenthe cruise control switch (-/SET orRES/+) is pushed.The cruise SET indicator light does notilluminate when the cruise control switch(CANCEL) is pushed or the system isdisengaged.

D150327AUN

Key reminder warning chime (if equipped)If the driver’s door is opened while theignition key is left in the ignition switch(ACC or LOCK position), the keyreminder warning chime will sound. Thisis to prevent you from locking your keysin the vehicle. The chime sounds until thekey is removed from the ignition switch orthe driver’s door is closed.

CRUISE

SETType A Type B


644

D150336AHM

4WD system warning light(if equipped)

If the 4WD system warning light illumi-nates, this indicates that there is a mal-function in the 4WD system. If thisoccurs, have your vehicle checked by anauthorized KIA dealer as soon as possi-ble.

D150337AHM-EE

4WD LOW indicator (if equipped)

When the ignition switch is turned to theON position, the 4WD LOW indicator willilluminate and then go off in a few sec-onds. The 4WD LOW indicator illumi-nates when the transfer shift knob is setto the 4L(Low-speed 4-wheel drive) posi-tion.

D150337AHM-EE

4WD HI indicator (if equipped)

When the ignition switch is turned to theON position, the 4WD HI indicator willilluminate and then go off in a few sec-onds. The 4WD HI indicator illuminateswhen the transfer shift knob is set to the4H(High-speed 4-wheel drive) position.

D150338AHM

KEY OUT indicator (if equipped)

When the ENGINE START/STOP buttonis in the ACC or ON position, if any dooris open, the system checks for the smartkey. If the smart key is not in the vehicle,the indicator will blink, and if all doors areclosed, the chime will also sound forabout 5 seconds. The indicator will go offwhile the vehicle is moving. Keep thesmart key in the vehicle or insert it in thesmart key holder.

D150326AHM-EE

Lights on warning chime (if equipped)The lights on warning chime will sound ifthe driver's door is opened when theheadlight switch is left in the 1st or 2ndposition with the ignition switch removed(for smart key, in OFF position).

4WDLOW

4WDHI

KEYOUT

4 65


D150400AHM

LCD display warning (if equipped)Key is not in vehicle If the smart key is not in the vehicle andif any door is opened or closed with theENGINE START/STOP button in theACC, ON, or START position, the warn-ing illuminates on the LCD display. Also,the chime sounds for 5 seconds whenthe smart key is not in the vehicle and thedoor is closed.Always have the smart key with you.

Key is not detected If the smart key is not in the vehicle or isnot detected and you press the ENGINESTART/STOP button, the warning illumi-nates on the LCD display for 10 seconds.Also, the immobilizer indicator and thekey holder light blinks for 10 seconds.

Low key battery If the ENGINE START/STOP button turnsto the OFF position when the smart keyin the vehicle discharges, the warningilluminates on the LCD display for about10 seconds. Also, the warning chimesounds once.Replace the battery with a new one.

Press brake pedal to start engine If the ENGINE START/STOP button turnsto the ACC position twice by pressing thebutton repeatedly without depressing thebrake pedal, the warning illuminates onthe LCD display for about 10 seconds toindicate that you should depress thebrake pedal to start the engine.

Shift to "P" position If you try to turn off the engine without theshift lever in the P (Park) position, theENGINE START/STOP button will turn tothe ACC position. If the button is pressedonce more it will turn to the ON positionThe warning illuminates on the LCD dis-play for about 10 seconds to indicate thatyou should press the ENGINESTART/STOP button with the shift leverin the P (Park) position to turn off theengine.

Remove key When you turn off the engine with thesmart key in the smart key holder, thewarning illuminates on the LCD displayfor about 10 seconds. Also, the smart keyholder light blinks for about 10 seconds.To remove the smart key push the smartkey once and pull it out from the smartkey holder.


664

Insert key If you press the ENGINE START/STOPbutton while "Key is not detected" illumi-nates on the LCD display, the warning“Insert key” illuminates for about 10 sec-onds. Also, the immobilizer indicator andthe key holder light blinks for about 10seconds.

Press start button againIf you can not operate the ENGINESTART/STOP button when there is aproblem with the ENGINE START/STOPbutton system, the warning illuminatesfor 10 seconds and the chime soundscontinuously to indicate that you couldstart the engine by pressing the ENGINESTART/STOP button once more.The chime will stop if the ENGINESTART/STOP button system works nor-mally or the theft alarm system is armed.If the warning illuminates each time youpress the ENGINE START/STOP button,take your vehicle to an authorized KIAdealer and have the system checked.

Shift to "P" or "N" to start the engine If you try to start the engine with the shiftlever not in the P(Park) or N(Neutral)position, the warning illuminates forabout 10 seconds on the LCD display.You can also start the engine with theshift lever in the N(Neutral) position, butfor your safety start the engine with theshift lever in the P(Park) position.

Press button while turn steering If the steering wheel does not unlock nor-mally when the ENGINE START/STOPbutton is pressed, the warning illumi-nates for 10 seconds on the LCD display.Also, the warning chime sounds onceand the ENGINE START/STOP buttonlight blinks for 10 seconds.When you are warned, press theENGINE START/STOP button while turn-ing the steering wheel right and left.

Check steering wheel lock If the steering wheel does not lock nor-mally when the ENGINE START/STOPbutton turns to the OFF position, thewarning illuminates for 10 seconds onthe LCD display. Also, the warning chimesounds for 3 seconds and the ENGINESTART/STOP button light blinks for 10seconds.

4 67


D170000AEN-EU

The rear parking assist system assiststhe driver during backward movement ofthe vehicle by chiming if any object issensed within a distance of 120 cm (47in.) behind the vehicle. This system is asupplemental system and it is not intend-ed to nor does it replace the need forextreme care and attention of the driver.The sensing range and objectsdetectable by the back sensors are limit-ed. Whenever backing-up, pay as muchattention to what is behind you as youwould in a vehicle without a rear parkingassist system.

D0170500AHM

Rear parking assist system OFFbutton (if equipped)To turn off the rear parking assist system,push the button (the indicator light willilluminate).

REAR PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OHM048060N

WARNINGThe rear parking assist system is asupplementary function only. Theoperation of the rear parking assistsystem can be affected by severalfactors (including environmentalconditions). It is the responsibilityof the driver to always check thearea behind the vehicle before andwhile backing up.Sensors

OHM048229N


684

Operation of the rear parkingassist systemD170101AEN-EU

Operating condition• This system will activate when backing

up with the ignition switch ON.If the vehicle is moving at a speed over5 km/h (3 mph), the system may not beactivated correctly.

• The sensing distance while the rearparking assist system is in operation isapproximately 120 cm (47 in.).

• When more than two objects aresensed at the same time, the closestone will be recognized first.

D170102AUN-EU

Types of warning sound• When an object is 120 cm to 81 cm (47

in. to 32 in.) from the rear bumper:Buzzer beeps intermittently.

• When an object is 80 cm to 41 cm (31in. to 16 in.) from the rear bumper:Buzzer beeps more frequently.

• When an object is within 40 cm (15 in.)of the rear bumper:Buzzer sounds continuously.

D170200AEN-EU

Non-operational conditions ofrear parking assist systemThe rear parking assist system maynot operate properly when:1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will

operate normally when the moisturehas been cleared.)

2. The sensor is covered with foreignmatter, such as snow or water, or thesensor cover is blocked. (It will operatenormally when the material is removedor the sensor is no longer blocked.)

3. Driving on uneven road surfaces(unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, gradi-ent).

4. Objects generating excessive noise(vehicle horns, loud motorcycleengines, or truck air brakes) are withinrange of the sensor.

5. Heavy rain or water spray exists.6. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones

are within range of the sensor.7. The sensor is covered with snow.8. Trailer towing

The detecting range may decreasewhen:1. The sensor is stained with foreign mat-

ter such as snow or water. (The sens-ing range will return to normal whenremoved.)

2. Outside air temperature is extremelyhot or cold.

The following objects may not be rec-ognized by the sensor:1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes,

chains or small poles.2. Objects which tend to absorb the sen-

sor frequency such as clothes, spongymaterial or snow.

3. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m(40 in.) in height and narrower than 14cm (6 in.) in diameter.

4 69


D170300AEN-EU

Rear parking assist system pre-cautions• The rear parking assist system may

not sound sequentially depending onthe speed and shapes of the objectsdetected.

• The rear parking assist system maymalfunction if the vehicle bumperheight or sensor installation has beenmodified or damaged. Any non-factoryinstalled equipment or accessoriesmay also interfere with the sensor per-formance.

• The sensor may not recognize objectsless than 40 cm (15 in.) from the sen-sor, or it may sense an incorrect dis-tance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is frozen or stainedwith snow, dirt, or water, the sensormay be inoperative until the stains areremoved using a soft cloth.

• Do not push, scratch or strike the sen-sor. Sensor damage could occur.

✽✽ NOTICEThis system can only sense objects with-in the range and location of the sensors;It can not detect objects in other areaswhere sensors are not installed. Also,small or slim objects, such as poles orobjects located between sensors may notbe detected by the sensors.Always visually check behind the vehi-cle when backing up.Be sure to inform any drivers of thevehicle that may be unfamiliar with thesystem regarding the systems capabili-ties and limitations.

D170400AHM

Self-diagnosisIf you don’t hear an audible warningsound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-tently when shifting the gear to the R(Reverse) position, this may indicate amalfunction in the rear parking assist sys-tem. If this occurs, have your vehiclechecked by an authorized KIA dealer assoon as possible.

WARNINGPay close attention when the vehi-cle is driven close to objects on theroad, particularly pedestrians, andespecially children. Be aware thatsome objects may not be detectedby the sensors, due to the object’sdistance, size or material, all ofwhich can limit the effectiveness ofthe sensor. Always perform a visu-al inspection to make sure the vehi-cle is clear of all obstructionsbefore moving the vehicle in anydirection.

WARNINGYour new vehicle warranty does notcover any accidents or damage tothe vehicle or injuries to its occu-pants due to a rear parking assistsystem malfunction. Always drivesafely and cautiously.


704

D330000AHM-EE

The rearview camera will activate whenthe back-up light is ON with the ignitionswitch ON and the shift lever in the R(Reverse) position.This system is a supplemental systemthat shows behind the vehicle throughthe rearview display mirror while back-ing-up.

D180000AHM

The hazard warning flasher should beused whenever you find it necessary tostop the vehicle in a hazardous location.When you must make such an emer-gency stop, always pull off the road as faras possible.The hazard warning lights are turned onby pushing in the hazard switch. Bothturn signal lights will blink. The hazardwarning lights will operate even thoughthe key is not in the ignition switch.To turn the hazard warning lights off,push the switch again.

OHM068001N

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

WARNING• This system is a supplementary

function only. It is the responsi-bility of the driver to alwayscheck the inside/outside rearviewmirror and the area behind thevehicle before and while backingup because there is a dead zonethat can't see through the cam-era.

• Always keep the camera lensclean. If lens is covered with for-eign matter, the camera may notoperate normally.

OHM048062

OHM048061L

REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

4 71


D190100AHM

Battery saver function• The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-charged. The system automaticallyturns off the exterior lights when thedriver removes the ignition key andopens the driver-side door.

• With this feature, the parking lights willbe turned off automatically if the driverparks on the side of the road at night.If necessary, to keep the lights onwhen the ignition key is removed, per-form the following:1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON

again using the light switch on thesteering column.

D190200AHM-EU

Headlight escort functionThe headlights and taillights remain onfor approximately 5 minutes after theignition key is removed or turned to theACC or LOCK position. However, if thedriver’s door is opened and closed, theheadlights and taillights are turned offafter 30 seconds.The headlights and taillights can beturned off by pressing the lock button onthe transmitter or turning off the lightswitch from the headlight or Auto lightposition.

D190300AHM

Rescue mode functionIf your vehicle has any problem on thevehicle network system, the headlights(low beam) turn on automatically with theignition switch in the ON position eventhough the headlight switch is not turnedon. At this time, the emergency lighting isnot turned off when the headlight switchis turned off.

LIGHTING

CAUTIONIf the rescue mode occurs, haveyour vehicle checked by an author-ized KIA dealer as soon as possi-ble.


724

D190400AUN

Lighting controlThe light switch has a Headlight and aParking light position.To operate the lights, turn the knob at theend of the control lever to one of the fol-lowing positions:(1) OFF position(2) Parking light position(3) Headlight position(4) Auto light position (if equipped)

D190401AHM

Parking light position ( )When the light switch is in the parkinglight position (1st position), the tail,license and instrument panel lights willturn ON.

D190402AHM

Headlight position ( )When the light switch is in the headlightposition (2nd position), the head, tail,license and instrument panel lights willturn ON.

✽✽ NOTICEThe ignition switch must be in the ONposition to turn on the headlights.

OHM048066LOHM048065LOHM048064L

4 73


D190403AHM

Auto light position (if equipped)When the light switch is in the AUTO lightposition, the taillights and headlights willturn ON or OFF automatically dependingon the amount of light outside the vehi-cle.

D190500AUN

High beam operation To turn on the high beam headlights,push the lever away from you. Pull it backfor low beams.The high beam indicator will light whenthe headlight high beams are switchedon.To prevent the battery from being dis-charged, do not leave the lights on for aprolonged time while the engine is notrunning.

OHM049069L

CAUTION• Never place anything over sensor

(1) located on the instrumentpanel. This will ensure betterauto-light system control.

• Don’t clean the sensor using awindow cleaner. The cleaner mayleave a light film which couldinterfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint orother types of coating on thefront windshield, the Auto lightsystem may not work properly.

OHM048067L


744

To flash the headlights, pull the levertowards you. It will return to the normal(low beam) position when released. Theheadlight switch does not need to be onto use this flashing feature.

D190600AHM

Turn signals and lane change sig-nalsThe ignition switch must be on for theturn signals to function. To turn on theturn signals, move the lever up or down(A). The green arrow indicators on theinstrument panel indicate which turn sig-nal is operating. They will self-cancelafter a turn is completed. If the indicatorcontinues to flash after a turn, manuallyreturn the lever to the OFF position.

To signal a lane change, move the turnsignal lever slightly and hold it in position(B). The lever will return to the OFF posi-tion when released.If an indicator stays on and does notflash or if it flashes abnormally, one of theturn signal bulbs may be burned out andwill require replacement.

One-touch lane change functionTo activate an one-touch lane changefunction, move the turn signal leverslightly for less than 0.5 second and thenrelease it. The lane change signals willblink 3 times.

✽✽ NOTICEIf an indicator flash is abnormally quickor slow, a bulb may be burned out orhave a poor electrical connection in thecircuit.

OHM048070LOHM048068L

4 75


D190700AHM-EU

Front fog light (if equipped)Fog lights are used to provide improvedvisibility when visibility is poor due to fog,rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turnon when the fog light switch (1) is turnedon after the headlight (low beam) isturned on.To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog lightswitch (1) to the OFF position.

D190900AUN-EU

Daytime running light Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can makeit easier for others to see the front of yourvehicle during the day. DRL can be help-ful in many different driving conditions,and it is especially helpful after dawn andbefore sunset.The DRL system will make the head-lights turn OFF when:1. The headlight switch is ON.2. The parking brake is applied.3. Engine stops.

OHM048071N

CAUTIONWhen in operation, the fog lightsconsume large amounts of vehicleelectrical power. Only use the foglights when visibility is poor.


764

D200000AHM-EE

A : Wiper speed control· MIST – Single wipe· OFF – Off· INT – Intermittent wipe · LO – Low wiper speed· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes

D : Rear wiper/washer control· – Spraying washer fluid

· ON – Intermittent wipe after somenormal wipe

· OFF – Off· – Wash with brief wipes

WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer (if equipped)

OHM048200/OHM048203

4 77


D200100AHM

Windshield wipers Operates as follows when the ignitionswitch is turned ON.MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push the

lever upward and release it withthe lever in the OFF position. Thewipers will operate continuously ifthe lever is pushed upward andheld.

OFF : Wiper is not in operationINT : Wiper operates intermittently at the

same wiping intervals. Use thismode in a light rain or mist. To varythe speed setting, turn the speedcontrol knob(1).

LO : Normal wiper speedHI : Fast wiper speed

✽✽ NOTICEIf there is heavy accumulation of snowor ice on the windshield, defrost thewindshield for about 10 minutes, oruntil the snow and/or ice is removedbefore using the windshield wipers toensure proper operation.

✽✽ NOTICE• When you operate the wipers, if your

vehicle has a problem in any part ofthe wiper operation system, the wipermay operate in the LO mode regard-less of the wiper switch position. Inthis case, have your vehicle checkedby an authorized KIA dealer as soonas possible.

• When the ignition key is removed, thewiper blade may sometimes slightlymove to reduce the deterioration ofthe windshield wipers.

D200200ASA

Windshield washersIn the OFF position, pull the lever gentlytoward you to spray washer fluid on thewindshield and to run the wipers 1-3cycles.Use this function when the windshield isdirty.The spray and wiper operation will con-tinue until you release the lever.If the washer does not work, check thewasher fluid level. If the fluid level is notsufficient, you will need to add appropri-ate non-abrasive windshield washer fluidto the washer reservoir.The reservoir filler neck is located in thefront of the engine compartment on thepassenger side.

OHM048201 OHM048206


784

D200300AHM

Rear window wiper and washerswitch (if equipped)The rear window wiper and washerswitch is located at the end of the wiperand washer switch lever. Turn the switchto desired position to operate the rearwiper and washer.

- Spraying washer fluid and wiping

ON - Intermittent wiper operation aftersome normal wiper operation

OFF - Wiper is not in operation

- Wash with brief wipes

OHM048207

CAUTION• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windshield, do notoperate the wipers when thewindshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.

• To prevent damage to the wiperarms and other components, donot attempt to move the wipersmanually.

CAUTIONTo prevent possible damage to thewasher pump, do not operate thewasher when the fluid reservoir isempty.

WARNINGDo not use the washer in freezingtemperatures without first warmingthe windshield with the defrosters;the washer solution could freeze onthe windshield and obscure yourvision.

4 79


D210000AEN

D210100AHM

Map lampPush the lens to turn the map lamp on oroff. This light produces a spot beam forconvenient use as a map lamp at night oras a personal lamp for the driver and thefront passenger.

D210200AHM-EU

Room lampType AThe light will turn on as below if the but-ton is pressed. The light will turn off if thebutton is pressed again.• DOOR : The light comes on when any

door (or tailgate) is openedregardless of the ignitionswitch position. When doorsare unlocked by the transmit-ter, the light comes on forapproximately 30 seconds aslong as any door is notopened. The light goes outgradually after approximately30 seconds if the door isclosed.

However, if the ignition switchis ON or all doors are locked,the light will turn off immediate-ly. If a door is opened with theignition switch in the ACC orLOCK position, the light stayson for about 20 minutes.However, if a door is openedwith the ignition switch in theON position, the light stays oncontinuously.

• ON : The light stays on at all times.

INTERIOR LIGHT

CAUTIONDo not use the interior lights forextended periods when the engineis not running.It may cause battery discharge.

OHM048077

OHM048078

■ Type A


804

Type BThe light will turn on and off according tothe switch position.• DOOR : The light comes on when any

door (or tailgate) is openedregardless of the ignitionswitch position. When doorsare unlocked by the transmit-ter, the light comes on forapproximately 30 seconds aslong as any door is notopened. The light goes outgradually after approximately30 seconds if the door isclosed.

However, if the ignition switchis ON or all doors are locked,the light will turn off immediate-ly. If a door is opened with theignition switch in the ACC orLOCK position, the light stayson for about 20 minutes.However, if a door is openedwith the ignition switch in theON position, the light stays oncontinuously.

• ON : The light stays on at all times.• OFF : The light stays off at all times.

D210300AHM

Luggage lamp (if equipped)• DR : The light comes on when the tail-

gate is opened.• OFF: The light stays off at all times.

OHM048080OHM048079

■ Type B

4 81


D210400AEN

Door courtesy lamp (if equipped)The door courtesy lamp comes ON whenthe door is opened to assist entering orexiting the vehicle. It also serves as awarning to passing vehicles that the vehi-cle door is open.

D210500AUN

Glove box lamp (if equipped)The glove box lamp comes on when theglove box is opened.The parking lights or headlights must beON for the glove box lamp to function.

D210600AUN

Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)Opening the lid of the vanity mirror willautomatically turn on the mirror light.

OHM049082OHM048081 OHM048083


824

D220000AUN

✽✽ NOTICEIf you want to defrost and defog thefront windshield, refer to “Windshielddefrosting and defogging” in this sec-tion.

D220100AEN

Rear window defrosterThe defroster heats the window toremove frost, fog and thin ice from therear window, while the engine is running.

To activate the rear window defroster,press the rear window defroster buttonlocated in the center facia switch panel.The indicator on the rear windowdefroster button illuminates when thedefroster is ON.If there is heavy accumulation of snow onthe rear window, brush it off before oper-ating the rear defroster.The rear window defroster automaticallyturns off after approximately 20 minutesor when the ignition switch is turned off.To turn off the defroster, press the rearwindow defroster button again.

D220101AEN

Outside rearview mirror defroster (if equipped)If your vehicle is equipped with the out-side rearview mirror defrosters, they willoperate at the same time you turn on therear window defroster.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the conduc-tors bonded to the inside surface ofthe rear window, never use sharpinstruments or window cleanerscontaining abrasives to clean thewindow.

DEFROSTER

OHM048084N

OHM048085

■ Type A

■ Type B

4 83


D220200AHM

Front windshield deicer(if equipped)The engine must be running to enablethis feature. To activate the front wind-shield deicer, press the front windshielddeicer button. The indicator on the buttonilluminates when the deicer is ON.

The front windshield deicer automaticallyturns off after 20 minutes or when theignition switch is turned off. To turn off thedeicer, press the front windshield deicerbutton again.

OHM048086N

OHM048087

■ Type A

■ Type B


844

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

OHM048088L/OHM048101

D230000AHM

■■ Type A• Front climate control

• Rear climate control

1. Fan speed control switch2. Recirculated air position button3. Air conditioning button4. Mode selection knob5. Front windshield deicer button*6. Rear window defroster button7. Rear fan speed control switch

(controlled from the front)8. Front blower ON/OFF button9. Temperature control button10. Rear blower ON/OFF button

(controlled from the front)11. Rear temperature control switch12. Rear mode selection button13. Rear blower ON/OFF button14. Rear fan speed control switch* : if equipped

4 85


OHM048234L/OHM048088

1. Fan speed control switch2. Front blower ON/OFF button3. Mode selection knob4. Air conditioning button5. Temperature control switch6. Air intake control button7. Rear window defroster button

■■ Type B

■■ Type C

1. Fan speed control switch2. Front blower ON/OFF button3. Mode selection knob4. Air conditioning button5. Temperature control switch6. Recirculated air position button7. Outside (fresh) air position button8. Front windshield deicer button9. Rear window defroster button


864

D230100AEN

Heating and air conditioning1. Start the engine.2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness ofheating and cooling;- Heating:- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to thedesired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside(fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn theair conditioning system (if equipped)on.

OHM048090N

4 87


D230101AHM

Mode selectionThe mode selection knob controls thedirection of the air flow through the venti-lation system.Air can be directed to the floor, dash-board outlets, or windshield. Six symbolsare used to represent MAX A/C, Face,Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrostair position.The MAX A/C mode is used to cool theinside of the vehicle faster.

MAX A/C-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upper bodyand face.In this mode, the air conditioning and therecirculated air position will be selectedautomatically.To improve the effectiveness of cooling, asmall amount of air is directed to thefloor.

Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upper bodyand face. Additionally, each outlet can becontrolled to direct the air dischargedfrom the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, E, C, F)

Air flow is directed towards the face andthe floor.

Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor, with a small amount of the air beingdirected to the windshield and side win-dow defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floorand the windshield with a small amountdirected to the side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (A, D)

Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side window defrosters.

OHM048089


884

Instrument panel ventsThe outlet vents can be opened or closedseparately using the thumbwheel.Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents using the ventcontrol lever as shown.

D230102AHM-EC

Temperature controlThe temperature control switch allowsyou to control the temperature of the airflow from the ventilation system. Tochange the air temperature in the pas-senger compartment;Type A: Press the right side button ( )

for warm and hot air (H), or pressthe left side button ( ) forcooler air (C).

Type B, C: Pull up ( ▲ ) the switch forwarm and hot air (H), or pushdown ( ▼ ) the switch for cool-er air (C).

OHM048092N OHM048093L

■ Type A

OHM048093

■ Type B,C

4 89


Outside temperature conversionYou can switch the temperature modebetween Fahrenheit to Centigrade as fol-lows:While pressing the air intake control(recirculated air position) button, pressdown the temperature control switch for 3seconds or more.The display will change from Fahrenheitto Centigrade or from Centigrade toFahrenheit.If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, the temperature mode dis-play will reset to Centigrade.

D230103AHM

Air intake control The air intake control is used to selectthe outside (fresh) air position or recircu-lated air position.To change the air intake control position,press the control button.

Recirculated air position With the recirculated airposition selected, air fromthe passenger compart-ment will be drawn throughthe heating system andheated or cooled accordingto the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position With the outside (fresh) airposition selected, airenters the vehicle from out-side and is heated orcooled according to thefunction selected.

✽✽ NOTICEProlonged operation of the heater in therecirculated air position (without airconditioning selected) may cause fog-ging of the windshield and side windowsand the air within the passenger com-partment may become stale.In addition, prolonged use of the airconditioning with the recirculated airposition selected will result in excessive-ly dry air in the passenger compart-ment.


904

D230104AHM

Fan speed controlThe ignition switch must be in the ONposition for fan operation.The fan speed switch allows you to con-trol the fan speed of the air flow from theventilation system. To change the fanspeed, pull up ( ▲ ) the switch for higherspeed (+), or push down ( ▼ ) the switchfor lower speed (-). To turn the fan speedcontrol off, press the front blowerON/OFF button (the indicator light is notilluminated).

D230105AHM

Air conditioning (if equipped)Press the A/C button to turn the air con-ditioning system on (indicator light willilluminate). Press the button again to turnthe air conditioning system off.

WARNING• Continued use of the climate con-

trol system in the recirculated airposition may allow humidity toincrease inside the vehicle whichmay fog the glass and obscurevisibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with theair conditioning or heating sys-tem on. It may cause seriousharm or death due to a drop in theoxygen level and/or body temper-ature.

• Continued use of the climate con-trol system in the recirculated airposition can cause drowsiness orsleepiness, and loss of vehiclecontrol. Set the air intake controlto the outside (fresh) air positionas much as possible while driv-ing.

OHM048095 OHM048096N

4 91


D230200AHM-EE

Rear heating and air conditioning(if equipped)

To turn on the rear climate control sys-tem 1. Press the rear blower ON/OFF button

located on the front and rear climatecontrol panel (indicator light will illumi-nate).Operating the fan speed switch willalso turn on the rear climate controlsystem.

2. Set the fan speed to the desired speedwith the front or rear fan speed switch.

3. The rear temperature and mode iscontrolled automatically by the frontclimate control system.• Rear temperature: same as the front

temperature• Rear mode control - Front mode control is MAX A/C,

: Rear mode control is - Front mode control is

: Rear mode control is - Front mode control is , ,

: Rear mode control is 4. To turn off the rear climate control sys-

tem, press the rear ON/OFF buttonlocated on the front and rear climatecontrol panel once more (indicatorlight is not illuminated).

• If you operate the rear temperature ormode on the rear climate control panel,the corresponding rear temperature ormode will operate independentlyregardless of the front climate controlsystem operation.

• If the ignition switch is turned OFF andON again, the rear temperature andmode will be controlled automaticallyby the front climate control system.

• To activate the rear air conditioning,press the A/C button on the front cli-mate control system.

OHM048112L

OHM048159

■ Front

■ Rear


924

D230201AHM

Rear mode selectionThe rear mode is selected by pressingthe rear mode selection button on therear control panel as follows:

• : Rear air blows from the uppervents on the rear ceiling.

• : Rear air blows from the uppervents on the rear ceiling and thelower vents.

• : Rear air blows from the lowervents.

OHM048113

OHM048114

OHM048210

OHM048115

■ 2nd row

■ Ceiling

■ 3rd row

4 93


Rear ventsThe vent can be adjusted by rotating theblade.

✽✽ NOTICEIf all the vents are closed, it may causesome noise. Always have more than 2vents opened.

D230202AHM

Rear temperature controlTo change the air temperature in the rearpassenger compartment, pull up ( ▲ )the switch for warm and hot air (H) orpush down ( ▼ ) the switch for cooler air(C).

D230203AHM

Rear fan speed controlTo change the fan speed, pull up ( ▲ ) theswitch for higher speed (+), or push down( ▼ ) the switch for lower speed (-).To turn the fan speed control off, pressthe rear blower ON/OFF button. (indica-tor light is not illuminated)

OHM048116 OHM048117 OHM048118

■ Front

■ Rear


944

System operationD230501AUN

Ventilation1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

D230502AHM

Heating1. Set the mode to the position.2. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position.3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn

the air conditioning system (ifequipped) on.

• If the windshield fogs up, set the modeto the or position.

Operation Tips• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from

entering the vehicle through the venti-lation system, temporarily set the airintake control to the recirculated airposition. Be sure to return the controlto the fresh air position when the irrita-tion has passed to keep fresh air in thevehicle. This will help keep the driveralert and comfortable.

• Air for the heating/cooling system isdrawn in through the grilles just aheadof the windshield. Care should betaken that these are not blocked byleaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.

• To prevent interior fog on the wind-shield, set the air intake control to thefresh air position and fan speed to thedesired position, turn on the air condi-tioning system, and adjust the temper-ature control to desired temperature.

D230503AHM

Air conditioning (if equipped) All KIA Air Conditioning Systems arefilled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant which does not dam-age the ozone layer.1. Start the engine. Press the air condi-

tioning button.2. Set the mode to the position.3. Set the air intake control to the outside

air or recirculated air position.4. Adjust the fan speed control and tem-

perature control to maintain maximumcomfort.

• When maximum cooling is desired, setthe temperature control to the extremeleft position, set the mode control tothe MAX A/C position, then set the fanspeed control to the highest speed.

4 95


✽✽ NOTICE• When using the air conditioning sys-

tem, monitor the temperature gaugeclosely while driving up hills or inheavy traffic when outside tempera-tures are high. Air conditioning sys-tem operation may cause engine over-heating. Continue to use the blowerfan but turn the air conditioning sys-tem off if the temperature gauge indi-cates engine overheating.

• When opening the windows in humidweather air conditioning may createwater droplets inside the vehicle.Since excessive water droplets maycause damage to electrical equipment,air conditioning should only be usedwith the windows closed.

Air conditioning system operation tips • If the vehicle has been parked in direct

sunlight during hot weather, open thewindows for a short time to let the hotair inside the vehicle escape.

• To help reduce moisture inside of thewindows on rainy or humid days,decrease the humidity inside the vehi-cle by operating the air conditioningsystem.

• During air conditioning system opera-tion, you may occasionally notice aslight change in engine speed as theair conditioning compressor cycles.This is a normal system operationcharacteristic.

• Use the air conditioning system everymonth only for a few minutes to ensuremaximum system performance.

• When using the air conditioning sys-tem, you may notice clear water drip-ping (or even puddling) on the groundunder the passenger side of the vehi-cle. This is a normal system operationcharacteristic.

• Operating the air conditioning systemin the recirculated air position providesmaximum cooling, however, continualoperation in this mode may cause theair inside the vehicle to become stale.

• During cooling operation, you mayoccasionally notice a misty air flowbecause of rapid cooling and humid airintake. This is a normal system opera-tion characteristic.


964

D230300AHM-EC

Climate control air filter (if equipped)The climate control air filter installedbehind the glove box filters the dust orother pollutants that come into the vehi-cle from the outside through the heatingand air conditioning system. If dust orother pollutants accumulate in the filterover a period of time, the air flow from theair vents may decrease, resulting inmoisture accumulation on the inside ofthe windshield even when the outside(fresh) air position is selected. If this hap-pens, have the climate control air filterreplaced by an authorized KIA dealer.

✽✽ NOTICE• If the vehicle is being driven in severe

conditions such as dusty or roughroads, more frequent air conditionerfilter inspections and changes arerequired.

• When the air flow rate suddenlydecreases, the system should bechecked at an authorized KIA dealer.

D230400AHM

Checking the amount of air con-ditioner refrigerant and compres-sor lubricantWhen the amount of refrigerant is low,the performance of the air conditioning isreduced. Overfilling also has a negativeimpact on the air conditioning system.Therefore, if abnormal operation isfound, have the system inspected by anauthorized KIA dealer.

✽✽ NOTICEIt is important that the correct type andamount of oil and refrigerant is used.Otherwise, damage to the compressorand abnormal system operation mayoccur.

WARNINGThe air conditioning system shouldbe serviced by an authorized KIAdealer. Improper service may causeserious injury to the person per-forming the service.

OHM048209

Outside air

Recirculatedair

Climate control air filterBlower

Evaporator coreHeater core

4 97


AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

D240000AHM

OHM048100/OHM048101

1. A/C display2. Front fan speed control switch3. Driver's temperature control switch4. AUTO (automatic control) button5. Front blower OFF button6. Air conditioning button* 7. Front windshield defroster button8. Dual temperature control selection button9. Mode selection button10. Front windshield deicer button*11. Rear window defroster button12. Air intake control button* or

recirculated air position button*13. Rear blower ON/OFF button*

(controlled from the front) or outside (fresh) air position button*

14. Passenger's temperature control switch15. Rear fan speed control switch*

(controlled from the front)16. Rear temperature control switch17. Rear mode selection button*18 Rear blower ON/OFF button*19 Rear fan speed control switch** : if equipped

■■ Type A

• Front climate control

• Rear climate control (if equipped)


984

OHM048224N/OHM048101

1. A/C display2. Front fan speed control switch3. Driver's temperature control switch4. AUTO (automatic control) button5. Front blower OFF button6. Air conditioning button* 7. Front windshield defroster button8. Dual temperature control selection button9. Mode selection button10. Outside (fresh) air position button*11. Rear window defroster button12. Recirculated air position button13. Rear blower ON/OFF button*

(controlled from the front)14. Passenger's temperature control switch15. Rear fan speed control switch*

(controlled from the front)16. Rear temperature control switch* 17. Rear mode selection button*18. Rear blower ON/OFF button*19. Rear fan speed control switch** : if equipped

■■ Type B

• Front climate control

• Rear climate control (if equipped)

4 99


D240100AHM-EU

Automatic heating and air condi-tioningThe automatic climate control system iscontrolled by simply setting the desiredtemperature.The Full Automatic Temperature Control(FATC) system automatically controls theheating and cooling system as follows;

1. Press the AUTO button. The modes,fan speeds, air intake and air-condi-tioning will be controlled automaticallyby setting the temperature.

2. Set the temperature switch to thedesired temperature.If the temperature is set to the lowestsetting (Lo), the air conditioning sys-tem will operate continuously.

3. To turn the automatic operation off,select any button or switch of the fol-lowing:• Mode selection button• Air conditioning button• Front windshield defroster button• Air intake control button• Fan speed switchThe selected function will be controlledmanually while other functions operateautomatically.

For your convenience and to improve theeffectiveness of the climate control, usethe AUTO button and set the temperatureto 23°C (73°F).

✽✽ NOTICENever place anything over the sensorlocated on the instrument panel toensure better control of the heating andcooling system.

OHM048103OHM048102


1004

D240200AHM

Manual heating and air condition-ingThe heating and cooling system can becontrolled manually by pressing buttonsother than the AUTO button. In this case,the system works sequentially accordingto the order of buttons selected.1. Start the engine.2. Set the mode to the desired position.

For improving the effectiveness ofheating and cooling;- Heating:- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to thedesired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside(fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn theair conditioning system on.

Press the AUTO button in order to con-vert to full automatic control of the sys-tem.

D240201AHM

Mode selectionThe mode selection button controls thedirection of the air flow through the venti-lation system.The air flow outlet port is converted asfollows:

Refer to the illustration in the “Manual cli-mate control system”.

Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upper bodyand face. Additionally, each outlet can becontrolled to direct the air dischargedfrom the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, D, E, C, F)

Air flow is directed towards the face andthe floor.

Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to thefloor, with a small amount of the air beingdirected to the windshield and side win-dow defrosters.

Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floorand the windshield with a small amountdirected to the side window defrosters.

OHM048104

4 101


Defrost-Level (A, D)Most of the air flow is directed to thewindshield with a small amount of airdirected to the side window defrosters.

Instrument panel ventsThe outlet vents can be opened or closedseparately using the thumbwheel.Also, you can adjust the direction of airdelivery from these vents using the ventcontrol lever as shown.

D240202AHM-EC

Temperature controlThe temperature will increase to themaximum (HI) by pulling up ( ▲ ) theswitch.The temperature will decrease to the min-imum (Lo) by pushing down ( ▼ ) theswitch.When operating the switch, the tempera-ture will increase or decrease by0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest tem-perature setting, the air conditioning willoperate continuously.

OHM048105 OHM048092N OHM048106


1024

Adjusting the driver and passenger sidetemperature individually 1. Press the DUAL button to operate the

driver and passenger side temperatureindividually. Also, if the passenger sidetemperature control switch (PASS) isoperated, it will automatically changeto the DUAL mode as well.

2. Operate the left temperature control toadjust the driver side temperature.Operate the right temperature controlto adjust the passenger side tempera-ture.

When the driver side temperature is setto the highest (HI) or lowest (Lo) temper-ature setting, the DUAL mode is deacti-vated for maximum heating or cooling.

Adjusting the driver and passenger sidetemperature equally1. Press the DUAL button again to deac-

tivate DUAL mode. The passengerside temperature will be set to thesame temperature as the driver side.

2. Operate the driver side temperaturecontrol switch. The driver and passen-ger side temperature will be adjustedequally.

Temperature conversionYou can switch the temperature modebetween Fahrenheit to Centigrade as fol-lows:While pressing the OFF button, press theAUTO button for 3 seconds or more. Thedisplay will change from Fahrenheit toCentigrade, or from Centigrade toFahrenheit.If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the temperature mode dis-play will reset to Centigrade.

D240203AEN

Air intake controlThis is used to select the outside (fresh)air position or recirculated air position.To change the air intake control position,push the control button.

OHM048107

4 103


Recirculated air positionWith the recirculated airposition selected, air fromthe passenger compart-ment will be drawn throughthe heating system andheated or cooled accordingto the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air positionWith the outside (fresh) airposition selected, airenters the vehicle from out-side and is heated orcooled according to thefunction selected.

✽✽ NOTICEProlonged operation of the heater in therecirculated air position (without airconditioning selected) may cause fog-ging of the windshield and side windowsand the air within the passenger com-partment may become stale.In addition, prolonged use of the air con-ditioning with the recirculated air posi-tion selected will result in excessively dryair in the passenger compartment.

WARNING• Continued use of the climate con-

trol system in the recirculated airposition may allow humidity toincrease inside the vehicle whichmay fog the glass and obscure vis-ibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with theair conditioning or heating systemon. It may cause serious harm ordeath due to a drop in the oxygenlevel and/or body temperature.

• Continued use of the climate con-trol system in the recirculated airposition can cause drowsiness orsleepiness, and loss of vehiclecontrol. Set the air intake control tothe outside (fresh) air position asmuch as possible while driving.


1044

D240205AHM

Fan speed controlThe fan speed can be set to the desiredspeed by operating the fan speed controlswitch.To change the fan speed, pull up ( ▲ ) theswitch for higher speed ( ), or pushdown ( ▼ ) the switch for lower speed ( ). To turn the fan speed control off,press the front blower OFF button.

D240206AUN

Air conditioningPress the A/C button to turn the air con-ditioning system on (indicator light willilluminate).Press the button again to turn the airconditioning system off.

D240208AHM-EE

OFF modePress the front blower OFF button to turnoff the front air climate control system.However, you can still operate the modeand air intake buttons as long as the igni-tion switch is in the ON position.

OHM048109 OHM048110 OHM048108

4 105


D240300AHM-EE

Rear heating and air conditioning(if equipped)

To turn on the rear climate control sys-tem 1. Press the rear blower ON/OFF button

located on the front and rear climatecontrol panel (indicator light will illumi-nate).Operating the fan speed switch willalso turn on the rear climate controlsystem.

2. Set the fan speed to the desired speedwith the front or rear fan speed switch.

3. The rear temperature and mode iscontrolled automatically by the frontclimate control system.• Rear temperature: same as the front

temperature• Rear mode control

- Front mode control is : Rear mode control is

- Front mode control is : Rear mode control is

- Front mode control is , , : Rear mode control is

4. To turn off the rear climate control sys-tem, press the rear blower ON/OFFbutton located on the front and rear cli-mate control panel once more (indica-tor light is not illuminated).

• If you operate the rear temperature ormode on the rear climate control panel,the corresponding rear temperature ormode will operate independentlyregardless of the front climate controlsystem operation.

• If the ignition switch is turned OFF andON again, the rear temperature andmode will be controlled automaticallyby the front climate control system.

• To activate the rear air conditioning,press the A/C button on the front cli-mate control system.

OHM048112

OHM048159

■ Front

■ Rear


1064

D240301AHM

Rear mode selectionThe rear mode is selected by pressingthe rear mode selection button on therear control panel as follows:

• : Rear air blows from the uppervents on the rear ceiling.

• : Rear air blows from the uppervents on the rear ceiling and thelower vents.

• : Rear air blows from the lowervents.

OHM048113

OHM048114

OHM048210

OHM048115

■ 2nd row

■ Ceiling

■ 3rd row

4 107


Rear ventsThe vent can be adjusted by rotating theblade.

✽✽ NOTICEIf all the vents are closed, it may causesome noise. Always have more than 2vents opened.

D240302AHM

Rear temperature controlTo change the air temperature in the rearpassenger compartment, pull up ( ▲ )the switch for warm and hot air (H) orpush down ( ▼ ) the switch for cooler air(C).

D240303AHM

Rear fan speed controlTo change the fan speed, pull up ( ▲ ) theswitch for higher speed (+), or push down( ▼ ) the switch for lower speed (-).To turn the fan speed control off, pressthe rear blower ON/OFF button. (indica-tor light is not illuminated)

D240500AHM

❈ For information on “Climate control airfilter”, etc., refer to “Manual climatecontrol system” in this section.

OHM048117OHM048116 OHM048118

■ Front

■ Rear


1084

D250000AHM • For maximum defrosting, set the tem-perature control to the extremeright/hot position and the fan speedcontrol to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired whiledefrosting or defogging, set the modeto the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and icefrom the windshield, rear window, out-side rear view mirrors, and all side win-dows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hoodand air inlet in the cowl grill to improveheater and defroster efficiency and toreduce the probability of fogging up theinside of the windshield.

Manual climate control systemD250101AEN

To defog inside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-

tion.2. Select desired temperature.3. Select the or position.4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-

tioning will be selected automatically.If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)air position are not selected automatical-ly, press the corresponding button manu-ally.If the position is selected, lower fanspeed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

OHM048119L

WARNING - Windshieldheating

Do not use the or positionduring cooling operation inextremely humid weather. The dif-ference between the temperature ofthe outside air and the windshieldcould cause the outer surface ofthe windshield to fog up, causingloss of visibility. In this case, setthe mode selection to the posi-tion and fan speed control to alower speed.

4 109


D250102AEN

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-

tion.2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

position.3. Select the position.4. The outside (fresh) air and air condi-

tioning will be selected automatically.If the position is selected, lower fanspeed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

Automatic climate control systemD250201AHM

To defog inside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the desired posi-

tion.2. Select desired temperature.3. Press the defroster button ( ).4. The air conditioning will turn on

according to the detected ambient tem-perature and outside (fresh) air posi-tion will be selected automatically.

If the air conditioning and outside (fresh)air position are not selected automatical-ly, adjust the corresponding button man-ually. If the position is selected,lower fan speed is adjusted to a higherfan speed.

D250202AHM

To defrost outside windshield 1. Set the fan speed to the highest posi-

tion.2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot

(HI) position.3. Press the defroster button ( ).4. The air conditioning will turn on

according to the detected ambienttemperature and outside (fresh) airposition will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fanspeed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

OHM048121 OHM048122OHM048120L


1104

D250300AHM

Defogging logicTo reduce the probability of fogging upthe inside of the windshield, the air intakeor air conditioning are controlled auto-matically according to certain conditionssuch as or position. To cancel orreturn to the defogging logic, do the fol-lowing.

D250301AHM-EE

Manual climate control system1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.2. Turn the mode selection knob to the

defrost position ( ).3. Press the air intake control button at

least 5 times within 3 seconds.The indicator light in the air intake controlbutton will blink 3 times with 0.5 secondof interval. It indicates that the defogginglogic is canceled or returned to the pro-grammed status.

If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, it resets to the defog logicstatus.

D250302AHM-EE

Automatic climate control system1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.2. Select the defroster position pressing

the defroster button ( ).3. While pressing the air conditioning

button (A/C), press the air intake con-trol button at least 5 times within 3 sec-onds.

The A/C display blinks 3 times with 0.5second of interval. It indicates that thedefogging logic is canceled or returned tothe programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged ordisconnected, it resets to the defog logicstatus.

OHM048123L OHM048124L

4 111


D270000AHM

These compartments can be used tostore small items.

D270100AHM

Center console storage (if equipped)To open the center console storage, pushthe button (1) or pull up the lever (2).

D270200AEN

Glove boxThe glove box can be locked andunlocked with a master key.To open the glove box, pull the handleand the glove box will automaticallyopen. Close the glove box after use.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT

WARNING - Flammablematerials

Do not store cigarette lighters,propane cylinders, or other flamma-ble/explosive materials in the vehi-cle. These items may catch fireand/or explode if the vehicle isexposed to hot temperatures forextended periods.

CAUTION• To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storagecompartment.

• Always keep the storage com-partment covers closed whiledriving. Do not attempt to placeso many items in the storagecompartment that the storagecompartment cover cannot closesecurely.

OHM048126OHM048125

WARNING To reduce the risk of injury in anaccident or sudden stop, alwayskeep the glove box door closedwhile driving.


1124

D270300AHM

Sunglass holder To open the sunglass holder, press thecover and the holder will slowly open.Place your sunglasses in the compart-ment door with the lenses facing out.Push to close.

D270400AHM

Multi boxTo open the cover, press the button andthe cover will slowly open.

OHM048127

WARNING• Do not keep objects except sun-

glasses inside the sunglass hold-er. Such objects can be thrownfrom the holder in the event of asudden stop or an accident, pos-sibly injuring the passengers inthe vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass holderwhile the vehicle is moving. Therear view mirror of the vehiclecan be blocked by an openedsunglass holder.

OHM048211

OHM048226N

4 113


D270500AHM

Luggage boxYou can place a first aid kit, a reflector tri-angle, tools, etc. in the box for easyaccess.Grasp the handle on the edge of thecover and lift it.

OHM048129

OHM048130


1144

INTERIOR FEATURES D280300AHM

Cup holder

D280301AHM

Cups or small beverage cans may beplaced in the cup holders.

D280302AHM

CenterTo open the cover, press the cover and itwill slowly open.Place a cup or small beverage can in theholder after spreading the support (1).

WARNING - Hot liquids• Do not place uncovered cups of

hot liquid in the cup holder whilethe vehicle is in motion. If the hotliquid spills, you may burn your-self. Such a burn to the drivercould lead to loss of control ofthe vehicle.

• To reduce the risk of personalinjury in the event of sudden stopor collision, do not place uncov-ered or unsecured bottles, glass-es, cans, etc., in the cup holderwhile the vehicle is in motion.

OHM048133N

OHM048134

■ Front

■ RearOHM048152

■ Center

4 115


D280400AHM

SunvisorUse the sunvisor to shield direct lightthrough the front or side windows.To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.To use the sunvisor for the side window,pull it downward, unsnap it from thebracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).To use the vanity mirror, pull down thevisor and slide the mirror cover (3).Adjust the sunvisor extension forward orbackward (4).The ticket holder (5) is provided for hold-ing a tollgate ticket. (if equipped)

OHM048135

OHM048164N

OHM048160

■ Center (if equipped)

■ Front

■ Rear

OEN046157

CAUTION - Vanity mirrorlamp (if equipped)

Close the vanity mirror coversecurely and return the sunvisor toits original position after use. If thevanity mirror is not closed securely,the lamp will stay on and couldresult in battery discharge and pos-sible sunvisor damage.


1164

D280500AEN

Power outletThe power outlet is designed to providepower for mobile telephones or otherdevices designed to operate with vehicleelectrical systems. The devices shoulddraw less than 10 amps with the enginerunning.

D281300AHM

AC inverter (if equipped)The AC inverter supplies 115VAC/150Welectric power to operate electric acces-sories or equipment when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position or engine isrunning.

CAUTION• Use the power outlet only when

the engine is running and removethe accessory plug after use.Using the accessory plug for pro-longed periods of time with theengine off could cause the bat-tery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessorieswhich are less than 10A in elec-tric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner orheater to the lowest operatinglevel when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.(Continued)

(Continued)• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interferencewhen plugged into a vehicle’spower outlet. These devices maycause excessive audio static andmalfunctions in other electronicsystems or devices used in yourvehicle.

WARNINGDo not put a finger or a foreign ele-ment (pin, etc.) into a power outletand do not touch with a wet hand.You may get an electric shock.

OHM048227N

OHM048228N

4 117


The AC inverter is turned on by pushingin the switch. To turn the AC inverter off,push the switch a second time.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen pushing the AC inverter switch,the switch indicator illumination isdelayed momentarily while the systemconducts a self-check.

WARNINGThe AC inverter can be dangerous!When using the AC inverter, care-fully observe the following precau-tions to avoid serious injuries.• Do not use heated electric prod-

ucts (coffeepot, toaster, heater,iron, etc.).

• Do not insert foreign objects intoor touch the AC inverter; you mayget shocked.

• Do not let children operate ortouch the AC inverter.

• When not using the AC inverter,close the cover.

CAUTION• When not using the AC inverter,

make sure that the switch isturned off, and is closed the ACinverter cover.

• Only use the AC inverter when theengine is running, and removethe plug from the AC inverter afterusing the accessory. Using whenthe engine is not running or leav-ing the accessory plugged in for along time may cause the batteryto discharge.

• Do not use electric accessoriesor equipment with maximum elec-tric power consumption greaterthan 150W (115VAC).

(Continued)

(Continued)• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interferencewhen plugged into the AC invert-er. These devices may causeexcessive audio noise and mal-functions in other electronic sys-tems or devices used in yourvehicle.

• Do not use broken electric acces-sories or equipment, as they maydamage the AC inverter and vehi-cle's electrical system.

• Do not use two or more electricaccessories or equipment at thesame time.

• When input voltage is under 11V,the outlet LED and indicator willblink, and will automatically turnoff.


1184

D280600AEN

Digital clock

Whenever the battery terminals or relat-ed fuses are disconnected, you mustreset the time.When the ignition switch is in the ACC orON position, the clock buttons operate asfollows:

D280601AHM

Hour (1)Pressing the H button will advance thetime displayed by one hour.

D280602AHM

Minute (2)Pressing the M button will advance thetime displayed by one minute.

D280603AHM

Reset (3)To clear away minutes, press the R but-ton. Then the clock will be set preciselyon the hour.For example, if the R button is pressedwhile the time is between 9:01 and 9:29,the display will reset to 9:00.9:01 ~ 9:29 display changed to 9:009:30 ~ 9:59 display changed to 10:00

D280604AHM

Display conversionTo change the 12 hour format to the 24hour format, press the R button until thedisplay blinks.For example, if the R button is pressedwhile the time is 10:15 p.m., the displaywill change to 22:15.

OHM048137

OHM048136

■ Type A

■ Type B

WARNINGDo not adjust the clock while driv-ing. You may lose your steeringcontrol and cause an accident thatresults in severe personal injury ordeath.

4 119


D281200AHM-EU

Outside thermometerThe current outside temperature is dis-played in 1°C (1°F) increments. The tem-perature range is between -40°C ~ 60°C(-40°F~140°F).

• The outside temperature on the displaymay not change immediately like ageneral thermometer to prevent thedriver from being inattentive.

For details, refer to the "Climate controlsystem" in section 4.

• Temperature ↔↔ Seconds1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.2. Press the H button at least 3 times

within 3 seconds while pressing the Rbutton.

3. The temperature mode will change tothe time mode. The time displays inseconds.

4. If the M button is pressed, the clock’sminute will change and the countingwill start again from the beginning(00).

5. To return to the temperature mode,press the H button at least 3 timeswithin 3 seconds while pressing the Rbutton.

If the ignition switch turns OFF and ONagain, the temperature mode will be dis-played.

D280800AHM

Clothes hanger

CAUTIONDo not hang heavy clothes, thehook may be damaged.

OHM048153

OHM048138

OHM048139

■ Type A

■ Type B


1204

D281000AHM

Luggage net holder (if equipped)To keep items from shifting in the cargoarea, you can use the holders located inthe cargo area to attach the luggage net.If necessary, contact your authorized KIAdealer to obtain a luggage net.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the goods orthe vehicle, care should be takenwhen carrying fragile or bulkyobjects in the luggage compart-ment.

WARNINGTo avoid eye injury, DO NOT over-stretch the luggage net. ALWAYSkeep your face and body out of theluggage net’s recoil path. DO NOTuse the luggage net when the straphas visible signs of wear or dam-age.

OHM048155

4 121


D290100AHM

Roof rack (if equipped)If the vehicle has a roof rack, you canload cargo on top of your vehicle.The two crossbars on the roof rack canbe repositioned forward or rearward forconveniently loading cargo or a roof car-rier. To move the crossbar, pull the leverand move the crossbar to the desiredposition. Release the lever and lock thecrossbar by moving the crossbar slightlyforward or rearward.For your convenience and to preventdamage, with an assistant on the oppo-site side of the vehicle, pull and hold thelever on each side, then move the crossbar to the desired position.

✽✽ NOTICE• The crossbars (if equipped) should be

placed in the proper load carryingpositions prior to placing items ontothe roof rack.

• If the vehicle is equipped with a sun-roof, be sure not to position cargo ontothe roof rack in such a way that itcould interfere with sunroof operation.

• When the roof rack is not being usedto carry cargo, the crossbars mayneed to be repositioned if wind noise isdetected.

EXTERIOR FEATURES

CAUTION• When carrying cargo on the roof

rack, take the necessary precau-tions to make sure the cargo doesnot damage the roof of the vehicle.

• When carrying large objects onthe roof rack, make sure they donot exceed the overall roof lengthor width.

WARNING • The following specification is the

maximum weight that can beloaded onto the roof rack.Distribute the load as evenly aspossible across the crossbars (ifequipped) and roof rack andsecure the load firmly.

Loading cargo or luggage inexcess of the specified weightlimit on the roof rack may dam-age your vehicle.

• The vehicle center of gravity willbe higher when items are loadedonto the roof rack. Avoid suddenstarts, braking, sharp turns,abrupt maneuvers or high speedsthat may result in loss of vehiclecontrol or rollover resulting in anaccident.

(Continued)

OUN026355

ROOF 100 kg (220 lbs.)RACK EVENLY DISTRIBUTED


1224

D290200AEN

Side step (if equipped)When entering or exiting the vehicle, usethe side step for your convenience.

OHM048145

WARNING• Watch your steps so as not to slip

on a slippery side step when it israiny or snowy.

• If you try to open the door whenthe temperature is below freezingor when the side step is coveredwith snow or ice, the door couldbe damaged. Remove any snowthat may accumulate on the sidesteps.

(Continued)• Always drive slowly and turn cor-

ners carefully when carryingitems on the roof rack. Severewind updrafts, caused by passingvehicles or natural causes, cancause sudden upward pressureon items loaded on the roof rack.This is especially true when car-rying large, flat items such aswood panels or mattresses. Thiscould cause the items to fall offthe roof rack and cause damageto your vehicle or others aroundyou.

• To prevent damage or loss ofcargo while driving, check fre-quently before or while driving tomake sure the items on the roofrack are securely fastened.

4 123


AntennaD300102AHM-EU

Your vehicle uses a roof antenna or glassantenna to receive AM and/or FM broad-cast signals.

The roof antenna is removable. Toremove the roof antenna, turn it counter-clockwise. To install the roof antenna,turn it clockwise.

AUDIO SYSTEM

OHM048154N

OHM048235N

Roof antenna (if equipped)

Glass antenna (if equipped)

CAUTION• Before entering a place with a low

height clearance, be sure that theroof antenna is removed.

• Be sure to remove the roof anten-na before washing the car in anautomatic car wash or it may bedamaged.

• When reinstalling your roofantenna, it is important that it isfully tightened and adjusted tothe upright position to ensureproper reception. But it could beremoved when parking the vehi-cle or when loading cargo on theroof rack.

• When cargo is loaded on the roofrack, do not place the cargo nearthe antenna pole to ensure properreception.

CAUTION• Do not clean the inside of the rear

quarter glass with a cleaner oruse a scraper to remove any for-eign deposits as this may causedamage to the antenna elements.

• Avoid adding metallic coatingsuch as Ni, Cd, and so on. Thesecan interfere with FM reception.


1244

D300200AEN

Steering wheel audio control (if equipped) The steering wheel audio control buttonis installed to promote safe driving.

D300204AHM

VOLUME (VOL / ) (1)• Pull the up button ( ) to increase the

volume.• Pull the down button ( ) to decrease

the volume.

D300203AHM

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)The SEEK/PRESET button has differentfunctions based on the system mode. Forthe following functions the button shouldbe pressed for 0.8 second or more.

RADIO modeIt will function as the AUTO SEEK selectbutton.

CDP modeIt will function as the FF/REW button.

CDC modeIt will function as the DISC UP/DOWNbutton.

If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressedfor less than 0.8 second, it will work asfollows in each mode.

RADIO modeIt will function as the PRESET STATIONselect buttons.

CDP modeIt will function as the TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.

CDC modeIt will function as the TRACK UP/DOWNbutton.

D300202AEN

MODE (3)Press the button to select Radio or CD(compact disc).

D300205AHM

MUTE (4)• Pull the MUTE button to cancel the

sound.• Pull the MUTE button again to activate

the sound.

Detailed information for audio controlbuttons is described in the followingpages in this section.

OHM048146N

CAUTIONDo not operate audio remote con-trol buttons simultaneously.

4 125


D300600AHM-EE

Aux, USB and iPod port(if equipped)If your vehicle has an aux and/or USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod port,you can use an aux port to connect audiodevices and an USB port to plug in anUSB and also an iPod port to plug in aniPod.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen using a portable audio deviceconnected to the power outlet, noise mayoccur during playback. If this happens,use the power source of the portableaudio device.

D300800AHM

How vehicle audio worksAM(MW, LW) and FM radio signals arebroadcast from transmitter towers locat-ed around your city. They are intercept-ed by the radio antenna on your vehicle.This signal is then received by the radioand sent to your vehicle speakers.When a strong radio signal has reachedyour vehicle, the precise engineering ofyour audio system ensures the best pos-sible quality reproduction. However, insome cases the signal coming to yourvehicle may not be strong and clear. Thiscan be due to factors such as the dis-tance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the pres-ence of buildings, bridges or other largeobstructions in the area.

AM(MW, LW) broadcasts can bereceived at greater distances than FMbroadcasts. This is because AM(MW,LW) radio waves are transmitted at lowfrequencies. These long, low frequencyradio waves can follow the curvature ofthe earth rather than travelling straightout into the atmosphere. In addition, theycurve around obstructions so that theycan provide better signal coverage.

¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢

JBM002

AM(MW, LW) reception

¢ ¢ ¢

JBM001

FM reception

OHM048151


1264

FM broadcasts are transmitted at highfrequencies and do not bend to follow theearth's surface. Because of this, FMbroadcasts generally begin to fade atshort distances from the station. Also,FM signals are easily affected by build-ings, mountains, or other obstructions.These can result in certain listening con-ditions which might lead you to believe aproblem exists with your radio. The fol-lowing conditions are normal and do notindicate radio trouble:

• Fading - As your vehicle moves awayfrom the radio station, the signal willweaken and sound will begin to fade.When this occurs, we suggest that youselect another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between the trans-mitter and your radio can disturb thesignal causing static or fluttering nois-es to occur. Reducing the treble levelmay lessen this effect until the distur-bance clears.

• Station Swapping - As a FM signalweakens, another more powerful sig-nal near the same frequency maybegin to play. This is because yourradio is designed to lock onto the clear-est signal. If this occurs, select anoth-er station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signalsbeing received from several directionscan cause distortion or fluttering. Thiscan be caused by a direct and reflect-ed signal from the same station, or bysignals from two stations with closefrequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition haspassed.

JBM005

¢ ¢ ¢

JBM004JBM003

FM radio station

4 127


Using a cellular phone or a two-wayradioWhen a cellular phone is used inside thevehicle, noise may be produced from theaudio equipment. This does not meanthat something is wrong with the audioequipment. In such a case, use the cellu-lar phone at a place as far as possiblefrom the audio equipment.

Care of discs• If the temperature inside the vehicle is

too high, open the vehicle windows forventilation before using your vehicleaudio.

• It is illegal to copy and use MP3/WMAfiles without permission. Use CDs thatare created only by lawful means.

• Do not apply volatile agents such asbenzene and thinner, normal cleanersand magnetic sprays made for ana-logue disc onto CDs.

• To prevent the disc surface from get-ting damaged. Hold and carry CDs bythe edges or the edges of the centerhole only.

• Clean the disc surface with a piece ofsoft cloth before playback (wipe it fromthe center to the outside edge).

• Do not damage the disc surface orattach pieces of sticky tape or paperonto it.

• Make sure objects other than CDs arenot inserted into the CD player (Do notinsert more than one CD at a time).

• Keep CDs in their cases after use toprotect them from scratches or dirt.

• Depending on the type of CD-R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may not operatenormally according to manufacturingcompanies or making and recordingmethods. In such circumstances, if youstill continue to use those CDs, theymay cause the malfunction of yourvehicle audio system.

✽✽ NOTICE - Playing anIncompatible CopyProtected Audio CD

Some copy protected CDs, which do notcomply with the international audio CDstandards (Red Book), may not play onyour vehicle audio. Please note that ifyou try to play copy protected CDs andthe CD player does not perform correct-ly the CDs maybe defective, not the CDplayer.

CAUTIONWhen using a communication sys-tem such a cellular phone or a radioset inside the vehicle, a separateexternal antenna must be fitted.When a cellular phone or a radio setis used with an internal antennaalone, it may interfere with the vehi-cle's electrical system and adverse-ly affect safe operation of the vehi-cle.

WARNINGDon't use a cellular phone whenyou are driving. You should stop ata safe place to use a cellular phone.


1284

A-200HMU

1. FM/AM Selection Button

2. Power ON/OFF Button and Volume

Control Knob

3. Automatic Channel Selection Button

4. SCAN Selection Button

5. Preset Selection Button

6. TUNE/AUDIO Knob

7. MUTE Button

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL ■ Type A

4 129


A-300HMU



Control Knob




6. TUNE/AUDIO Knob

■ Type B


1304

A-350HMU



Control Knob




6. TUNE/AUDIO Knob

■ Type C

4 131


How to Activate RADIO,SET UP, VOLUME Control

1. FM/AM Selection Button The FM/AM button toggles between FMand AM. Listed below are the paths asthe system switches from FM to AM andback to FM.• FM/AM : FM1➟FM2➟AM➟FM1...• FM : FM1➟FM2➟FM1...

2. Power ON/OFF Button &Volume Control Knob

• Turns the audio system on/off whenthe ignition switch is on ACC or ON.

• If the knob is turned clockwise/counter-clockwise, the volume will increase/decrease.

3. Automatic Channel SelectionButton

• When the [TRACK ] is pressed, itwill automatically tune to the next lowerstation.

• When the [SEEK ] is pressed, it willautomatically tune to the next higherstation.

4. SCAN Selection Button• When the button is pressed, it auto-

matically scans the radio stationsupwards.

• The SCAN feature steps through eachstation, starting from the initial station,for ten seconds.

• Press the [SCAN] button again to stopthe scan feature and to listen to thecurrently selected channel.

5. Preset Selection Button• Press [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec-

ond to play the station saved in eachbutton.

• Press [1]~[6] button more than 0.8 sec-ond or longer to save the current stationto the respective button with a beep.

6. TUNE/AUDIO KnobIf the knob is turned clockwise/counter-clockwise, the frequency will increase/decrease.(AM 10kHz, FM 200kHz)

■ Audio Setup MODE Press and Rotate [AUDIO] repeatedly tochoose the desired mode.Each press changes the mode as below :(Hierarchy 4 (AUTO VOLUME CON-TROL) mode is only selected in the CDP.)

• Hierarchy 1

• Hierarchy 2


1324

• Hierarchy 3

• Hierarchy 4

• Hierarchy 5

❈ For example: To Adjusting FADER • Press [AUDIO] to activate SETUP

mode, then Hierarchy 1 is selected.• Rotate [AUDIO], Hierarchy 2 is dis-

played.• Press [AUDIO] to select the FADER

control mode.• Rotate [AUDIO], to adjust the FADER

level.- If [AUDIO] is not pressed/rotated for 5

seconds after adjusting, the displayautomatically returns to normal mode.

- Another adjusting mode can be usedfor same operation.

❈ To Select "SIRIUS DISPLAY" modeIf "CAT/CH" or "ART/TITLE" is selectedin the SIRIUS DISPLAY mode, selectedmode will be displayed basically andanother display mode will be displayedfor 3 seconds automatically once.

7. MUTE Button (CDP ONLY)Press [MUTE] to stop the sound and"MUTE" is displayed on the LCD.

4 133


A-200HMU

1. CD Loading SLOT

2. CD Eject Button

3. RANDOM Play Button

4. Automatic Track Selection Button

5. REPEAT Play Button

6. SCROLL Play Button

7. CD Indicator

8. CD Selection Button

9. SCAN Play Button

10. Track(File) Search Knob and ENTER

Button

11. Folder search Button

12. INFORMATION Button

CDP


1344

A-300HMU

1. CD Loading Slot

2. CD Eject Button





7. CD Indicator


9. SCAN Play Button

10. Track(File) Search Knob and ENTERButton

11. Folder search Button


13. DISC UP/DOWN Button

14. CD Loading Button

(a). CD Number Indicator field

(b). CD Slot indicator

CD CHANGER■ Type A

4 135


1. CD Loading Slot

2. CD Eject Button





7. CD Indicator


9. SCAN Play Button

10. Track(File) Search Knob and ENTERButton

11. FOLDER Search Button


13. DISC UP/DOWN Button

14. CD Loading Button

(a). CD Number Indicator field

(b). CD Slot indicator

A-350HMU

■ Type B


1364

How to Activate CDP/CD CHANGER

1. CD Loading Slot• Please place the CD with the printed

side upward, and then gently push in.• CDP models support both 8cm and 12

cm CDs.• CDC models support only 12 cm CD.• If VCD, Data CD, DVD are loaded,

"MEDIA ERROR" message will appearand the CD will eject.

2. CD Eject Button• Press this button to eject the CD during

CD playback.• If there is no CD in the deck, "NO

DISC" will be displayed for 5 secondsand returns to the previous mode.

❈ ALL EJECT(CDC ONLY)Press this button for more than 0.8second to eject all discs inside thedecks in the respective order.

3. RANDOM Play ButtonPress this button for less than 0.8 secondto activate 'RDM' mode and more than0.8 second to activate 'ALL RDM' mode.• RDM : Only files/tracks in a folder/disc

are played in random sequence.• ALL RDM (MP3/WMA Only) : All files

/tracks in a folder/disc are played inrandom sequence.

4. Automatic Track Selection Button• Press [TRACK ] to return to the

beginning of the current track(file).Press again within 1 seconds to returnto the previous track(file).

• Press and hold [TRACK ] to initiaterewind search.

• Press [SEEK ] for less than 0.8 sec-ond to advance the next track(file).

• Press and hold [SEEK ] to initiatefast forward search.

5. REPEAT Play ButtonPress this button for less than 0.8 secondto activate 'RPT' mode and more than 0.8second to activate 'FLD RPT' mode.• RPT : Only a track(file) is played

repeatedly.• FLD RPT(MP3/WMA Only) : Only files

in a folder are played repeatedly.

6. SCROLL Play ButtonFile names are scrolled for 5 seconds onthe display.

7. CD Indicator (CDP ONLY)When the ignition switch is in the ACC orON position and if the CD is loaded, thisindicator is illuminated.

8. CD Selection Button• If the CD is loaded, turns to CD mode.• If there is no Disc in the deck, it dis-

plays "NO DISC" for 5 seconds andreturns to the previous mode.

9. SCAN Selection ButtonPlays back the first 10 seconds of eachsong in the CD.

CAUTION Don’t insert a CD, if CD indicator isilluminated in the CDP.

4 137


10. Track (File) Search Knob andENTER Button

• Turn this knob clockwise to display theTrack NO (File name) after the currentsong.

• Turn this button counterclockwise todisplay the Track NO (File Name)before the current song.

• To select the displayed song, press thebutton.

11. FOLDER Search Button • Folder name/File name (the first song

in the folder) is moved up or down fromthe currently playing folder.

• To select the displayed folder, pressENTER (NO.10) button.

12. INFORMATION ButtonDisplays the information of the current CDTRACK (FILE) as below when the buttonis pressed each time.• CDDA : DISC TITLE➟DISC ARTIST➟

TRACK TITLE➟TRACK ARTIST➟TOTALTRACK...

• MP3/WMA : FILE NAME➟TITLE➟

ARTIST➟ALBUM➟FOLDER NAME➟

TOTAL FILE...

13. DISC UP/DOWN Button(CDC ONLY)

Disc is moved up or down from the cur-rently playing disc.

14. CD Loading Button (CDC ONLY)How to load a CD• Press [LOAD] for less than 0.8 second.• An empty slot is selected and the CD

number indicator(a) blinks on the LCD.• After "WAIT" is displayed for a moment,

"INSERT DISC(1~6)" is diplayed andthe CD slot indicator(b) blinks.

• Insert a CD while the slot indicatorblinks.

How to load CDs (ALL Load)• Press [LOAD] for more than 0.8 sec-

ond.• An empty slot is selected and the CD

number indicator (a) blinks on the LCD.• After "WAIT" is displayed for a

moment, "INSERT DISC(1~6)" isdiplayed and the CD slot indicator (b)blinks.

• Insert a CD while the slot indicatorblinks.

• After the CD is inserted, the rest of theempty CD slots' number blink.

• Repeat step 2 and 3 until all of the slotsare loaded.

CAUTION • Insert a CD only while "Insert

Disc (1~6)" is displayed and theslot indicator blinks.

• Don't insert two CDs for one oper-ation.


1384

CAUTION - Using USBdevice

• To use the external USB device,make sure the device is not con-nected when starting the vehicle.Connect the device after starting.

• If you start the vehicle when theUSB device is mounted, it maydamage the USB device. (USB isnot ESA)

• If the vehicle is started or turnedoff while the external USB deviceis connected, the external USBdevice may not work.

• It may not play inauthentic MP3 orWMA files.1) It can only play MP3 files with

the compression rate between8Kbps~320Kbps.

2) It can only play WMA musicfiles with the compression ratebetween 8Kbps~320Kbps.

• Take cautions for static electricitywhen connect or disconnect theexternal USB device.

• Encoded MP3 PLAYER is not rec-ognizable.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Depending on the condition of

the external USB device, the con-nected external USB device canbe unrecognizable.

• When the VHAPTTL byte/sectorsetting of External USB devices isnot either 512byte or 2048byte,then the device will not be recog-nized.

• The USB device should only beformatted to FAT 12/16/32.

• USB device without USB I/F(IMPLEMENTERS FORUM)authentication may not be recog-nizable.

• Make sure the USB connectionterminal does not come in con-tact with human body or anyobject.

• If you repeat connecting or dis-connecting USB device in a shortperiod of time, it may break thedevice.

• You might hear a strange noisewhen connecting or disconnect-ing USB device.

(Continued)

(Continued)• If you disconnect the external

USB device during playback inUSB mode, the external USBdevice can be damaged or mal-function. Therefore, connect theexternal USB device when theengine is turned off or in anothermode.

• Depending on the type andcapacity of the external USBdevice or the type of files storedin the device, there is a differencein the time taken for recognitionof the device, so you may have towait.

• Do not use the USB device forother purposes than playingmusic files.

• Use of USB accessories such asrecharger or heater using USB I/F(IMPLEMENTERS FORUM) maylower the performance or causetrouble.

(Continued)

4 139


(Continued)• If you use devices such as a USB

hub you purchased separately,the vehicle’s audio system maynot recognize the USB device.Connect the USB device directlyto the multimedia terminal of thevehicle.

• If the USB device is divided bylogical drives, only the music fileson the highest-priority drive arerecognized by the vehicle’s audio.

• Devices such as MP3 Player/Cellular phone/Digital camera,those are not recognizable bystandard USB I/F (IMPLE-MENTERS FORUM) can be unrec-ognizable.

• USB devices other than standard-ized goods (METAL COVER TYPEUSB) can be unrecognizable.

• USB flash memory reader (suchas CF, SD, microSD, etc.) or exter-nal-HDD type devices can beunrecognizable.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Music files protected by

DRM(DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-MENT) are not recognizalbe.

• The data in the USB memory mayget lost while using this AUDIO. Itis recommeded to back up impor-tant data.

• Please avoid using USB memoryproducts which can be used askey chains or cellular phoneaccessories as they could causedamage to the USB jack. Pleasemake sure only to use plug typeconnector products as shownbelow.


1404

A-200HMU





5. USB/AUX/iPod Selection Button


7. File Search Knob and ENTER Button

8. FOLDER/CATEGORY Search Button


USB MEMORY/AUX/iPod®

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

■ Type A

4 141


A-300HMU










■ Type B


1424










A-350HMU

■ Type C

4 143


How to activate USB MEMORY

1. RANDOM Play ButtonPress this button for less than 0.8 secondto activate 'RDM' mode and more than0.8 second to activate 'ALL RDM' mode.• RDM : Only files in a folder are played

back in random sequence.• ALL RDM : All files in a USB memory are

played back in random sequence.


beginning of the current file.Press again within 1 seconds to returnthe previous file.


• Press [SEEK ] for less than 0.8 sec-ond to advance the next file.


3. REPEAT Play ButtonPress this button for less than 0.8 secondto activate 'RPT' mode and more than0.8 second to activate 'FLD RPT' mode.

• RPT : Only a file is played repeatedly.• FLD RPT : Only files in a folder are

played repeatedly.

4. SCROLL Play ButtonFile names are scrolled for 5 seconds onthe display.

5. USB/AUX Selection Button• If auxiliary device/USB/ is connected, it

turns to USB/AUX mode and togglesas below when the button is pressedeach time.AUX/USB : AUX➟USB➟AUX.......

• If no auxiliary device and USB is con-nected, it displays "No Media" for 5seconds and returns to the previousmode.

6. INFORMATION ButtonDisplays the information of the currentCD TRACK(FILE) as below when thebutton is pressed each time.FILE NAME➟TITLE➟ARTIST➟ALBUM➟FOLDER NAME➟TOTAL FILE...

7. File Search Knob and ENTERButton

• Turn this knob clockwise to display Filename after the current song.

• Turn this knob counterclockwise to dis-play File Name before the currentsong.

• To select the displayed song, press thebutton.

8. FOLDER Search Button • Folder name/File name(the first song

in the folder) is moved up or down fromcurrently playing folder.

• To select the displayed folder, pressENTER (NO.6) button.

9. SCAN Play Button Plays back the first 10 seconds of eachsong in the USB memory.


1444

Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3 Hierarchy 4 Hierarchy 5

Playlist Playlists Songs - -Artist Artists Albums Songs -Album Albums Songs - -Song Songs - - -Genre Genres Artists Albums Songs

Composer Composers Albums Songs -

How to Activate iPod Device

1. RANDOM Play ButtonPress this button for less than 0.8 secondto activate ' ' mode and more than 0.8second to activate ' ' mode.• ' ' : All songs in the current catego-

ry are played in random.• ' ' : An album in the iPod is selected

in random and is played in the order ofthe songs in the album.


beginning of the current file.Press again within 1 second to returnthe previous file.


• Press [SEEK ] for less than 0.8 sec-ond to advance to the next file.


3. REPEAT Play ButtonA single song is played repeatedly.

4. SCROLL Play ButtonFile names are scrolled for 5 second onthe display.

5. iPod Selection Button If iPod is connected, it turns to iPod mode.

6. INFORMATION ButtonDisplays the information of the file cur-rently played as below when the button ispressed each time.TITLE➟ARTIST➟ALBUM...

■ Searching for a desired Song/TitleUsing search mode's individual hierar-chy, you can narrow down your search asshown in the table below.

❈ For example : Searching by Composers• Press [FOLDER ] or turn [ENTER]

to activate the Menu Select mode.• Turn [ENTER] to select the Compo-

sers, and press ENTER.• Turn [ENTER] to select the Albums,

and press ENTER.• Turn [ENTER] to select the Song, and

press ENTER. The selected song isplayed.

- In the search mode, pressing[FOLDER ] will return to the previ-ous mode.

- Other search modes scan be adjustedas above. Although, the hierarchy dif-fers.

4 145


✽✽ NOTICE - Using iPod device• Some iPod models might not support

the communication protocol and thefiles will not be played. (iPod modelssupported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano,5G)

• The order of search or playback ofsongs in the iPod can be differentfrom the order searched in the audiosystem.

• If the iPod crashes due to its own trou-ble, reset iPod. (Reset: Refer to iPodmanual)

• iPod may not operate normally on lowbattery.

❈ iPod to AUDIO Buttons(It is displayed once at the beginning ofiPod mode)

(Continued)• When connecting the device with

iPod cable, push in the jack fullynot to interfere with communica-tion.

• When adjusting the sound effectsof iPod and the audio system, thesound effects of both devices willoverlap and might reduce or dis-tort the quality of the sound.

• Deactivate (turn off) the equalizerfunction of iPod when adjustingthe audio system’s volume, andturn off the equalizer of the audiosystem when using the equalizerof iPod.

• When the iPod cable is connect-ed, the system can be switched tothe AUX mode even without theiPod device and can cause noise.Disconnect iPod cable when youare not using the iPod device.

• When the iPod is not used withthe audio system, iPod cable hasto be separated from iPod device.Origin display of iPod may not bedisplayed.

CAUTION - Using iPoddevice

• You need the power cable exclu-sive for iPod in order to operateiPod with the buttons on theaudio system. The PC cable pro-vided by Apple may cause mal-function and do not use it forvehicle use.

(Continued)

MENU

FILE DOWN/REW

FILE UP/FF

TRACK

CAT

ENTER

ROTATEENCODER

SEEK

RO

TATION


1464

1. DVDP TRACK UP/DOWN Button

2. DVDP TITLE UP/DOWN Button

3. RSE ON/OFF, RSE LOCK/UNLOCK

Button

4. AUX2/DVD Selection Button

A-350HMU

RSE(DVD/AUX2)

4 147


Using the Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE)1. DVD Chapter Selection Button• Press [TRACK ] button to play from

the beginning of current track.• Press [TRACK ] button again within

3 seconds to play the previous track.• Press [SEEK ] button for less than

0.8 second to play the next track.

2.DVD Title Selection Button• Press [FOLDER ] button to play the

previous track.• Press [CAT ] button to play the next

track.

3. RSE ON/OFF, LOCK/UNLOCKButton

When the RSE ON/OFF, LOCK/UNLOCKbutton is pushed for less than 0.8 sec-ond, the red color LED of the button willlight and RSE unit will be locked. If youpush button for more than 0.8 second,the green color LED of the button willlight and RSE unit will turn on and [RSE]will appear on the LCD.

4. DVD/AUX2 Selection ButtonIn the event there is a DVD inserted andan auxiliary device is connected to theRSE system, pressing the DVD/AUX2button will switch between DVD andAUX2 modes.


1484

1. SATELLITE RADIO Selection Button

2. Channel Selection Button



5. Tune Knob and Enter Button

6. CAT/FOLDER Button

7. INFO Selection Button

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO

A-200HMU

■ Type A

4 149









A-300HMU

■ Type B


1504








A-350HMU

■ Type C

4 151


How to Use SIRIUS SatelliteRadioYour Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3month complimentary period of SIRIUSSatellite Radio so you have access toover 130 channels of music, information,and entertainment programming.

ActivationIn order to extend or reactivate your sub-scription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, youwill need to contact SIRIUS CustomerCare at 888-539-7474. Have your 12 digitSID (Sirius Identification Number)/ESN(Electronic Serial Number) ready. Toretrieve the SID/ESN, turn on the radio,press the [SAT] button, and tune to chan-nel zero. Please note that the vehicle willneed to be turned on, in Sirius mode, andhave an unobstructed view of the sky inorder for the radio to receive the activa-tion signal.

1. SATELLITE RADIO SelectionButton (SIRIUS Satellite Radio)

Press the [SAT] button to switch to SIR-IUS Satellite Radio. It cycles through thedifferent bands as noted below.SAT1➟SAT2➟SAT3➟SAT1➟...

2. Channel Selection Button• Press [TRACK ] or [SEEK ] but-

ton for less than 0.8 second to selectprevious or next channel.

• Press [TRACK ] or [SEEK ] but-ton for 0.8 second or longer to continu-ously move to previous or next chan-nel.

• if "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed at thetop of the screen, channel up/down isdone through the channels within cur-rent category.

3. Preset Selection Button• Press [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 sec-

ond to play the channel saved in eachbutton.

• Press [1]~[6] button for 0.8 second orlonger to save current channel to therespective button with a beep.

4. SCAN Selection Button • When the [SCAN] button is pressed, it

automatically scans the radio stationsupwards.

• The SCAN feature steps through everychannel, starting from the initial chan-nel, for ten seconds.

• Press the [SCAN] button again to stopthe scan feature and to listen to thecurrently selected channel.

• if "CATEGORY" Icon is displayed at thetop of the screen, channel changing isdone through the channels within cur-rent category.

5. Tune Knob and Enter Button• Rotate clockwise to increase the chan-

nel number or to scroll down the cate-gory list.

• Rotate counterclockwise to decreasethe channel number or to scroll up thecategory list.

• Press this button to make selection ofchannels or items.


1524

6. CAT/FOLDER Button• Press [CAT ] or [FOLDER ] but-

ton to enter the Category List Mode.The display will indicate the categoryitems, highlight the category that thecurrent channel belongs to.

• In the Category List Mode, press thesebuttons to navigate category list.

• Press [ENTER] Button to select thelowest channel in highlighted category.

• If channel is selected by selecting cat-egory "CATEGORY" Icon is displayedat the top of the screen.

7. INFO Selection ButtonDisplays the information of the currentchannel as below when the button ispressed each time.• When default display is CAT/CH

Category/Channel➟ Ar t is t /T i t le➟

Composer (if available)➟ Category/Channel ➟...

• When default display is ART/TITLEAr t is t /T i t le➟ Category/Channel➟Composer(if available)➟Artist/Title➟...

✽✽ Troubleshooting1. Antenna Error

If this message is displayed, the anten-na or antenna cable is broken orunplugged. Please consult with yourKIA dealership.

2. Acquiring SignalIf this message is displayed, it meansthat the antenna is covered and thatthe SIRIUS Satellite Radio signal isnot available. Ensure the antenna isuncovered and has a clear view of thesky.

4 153


REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (RSE) (IF EQUIPPED)Important Safety InformationPlease read the following for safety pre-cautions.

✽✽ NOTICEInformation which the user mustobserve in order to prevent vehicle dam-age or malfunction.Warnings which must be observed inthe case of vehicle malfunction.Information which the user must haveprior knowledge. Information which allows for more con-venient operation.

Closely observe and comply with the fol-lowing cautions before using the product.All problems which occur in violation ofthe following will not be the responsibilityof the manufacturer.For user and passenger safety, pleaseread the user manual carefully beforeusing the product.

1. Do not disassemble, assemble, ormodify the AVN system.

2. Set the volume to a level which allowsthe driver to be aware of external con-ditions.

3. Do not operate the AVN system forprolonged periods of time with thevehicle ignition turned off. Such opera-tions may lead to battery discharge.

4. Be cautious not to spill water or intro-duce foreign objects into the device.

5. Opening the Roof Monitor with exces-sive force may lead to damage.

6. In case of product malfunction, pleasecontact your place of purchase or AfterService center.




CAUTIONIgnoring the cautions listed withinthis user manual may lead to acci-dents or injury. Cautions indicatematters which may lead to vehicledamage or malfunction.

WARNINGIgnoring the warnings listed withinthis user manual may cause fatal orserious injuries. Warnings indicatematters which may directly lead toaccidents.

CAUTIONWhen cleaning this product, makesure to turn off the device and use adry and soft cloth. Never use harshmaterials, chemical cloths, or sol-vents (alcohol, benzene, thinners,etc.) as such materials may damagethe device panel or cause color andquality deterioration.



1544

Dolby

DTS

DVD FLLC

Macrovision

Dolby DigitalDolby

Logo

Notice Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolbyand double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Notice DTS 2.0

Manufactured under license from one or more of the followingDTS, Inc, U.S. Pat. No’s : 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380;5,978,762; 6,226,616; 6,487,535 and other U.S. andworld-wide patents issued and pending. “DTS” and “DTSDigital Surround” are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.Copyright 1996, 2002-2006, DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Logo

Notice

“DTS” and “DTS 2.0” are trademarks of Digital TheaterSystems, Inc

DVD Video Player

U.S. Patent Nos. 4,631,603; 4,577,216; 4,819,098; 4,907,093;and 6,516,132

This product incorporates copyright protection technology thatis protected by U.S patents and other intellectual propertyrights. Use of this copyright protection technology must beauthorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and otherlimited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized byMacrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Logo

Notice

Notice

4 155


Product CharacteristicsThis device is a total AV system support-ing radio (FM1, FM2, AM), SIRIUS, audioCD, MP3, VCD, and DVD. With a WIDEVGA LCD (176.7 X 99.4mm.), this deviceallows for powerful sound and drivingenjoyment.

DisplayLarge-size (176.7 X 99.4mm) WIDE VGALCD with CCFL installed large-size(176.7 X 99.4 mm) WIDE VGA LCD pro-vides high viewing pleasure.With NORMAL, FULL, WIDE screens,the display can be selected in accor-dance to user preference and video suit-ability.

DVD PlayerAuto Play function Inserting an audio CD, MP3, VCD, DVDwill automatically turn on the device andbegin playing. (Auto conversion to RoofMonitor)

PBC support (PLAY BACK CONTROL)The various information encoded in theVideo CD can be enjoyed by using theinteractive menu encoded in MPEG1Version 2.0 Video CD discs.

OthersDigital screen control functionThe brightness, saturation, color andcontrast of the screen can be easilyadjusted.


1564

Name and function of systempartsREAR Roof Mount Monitor

1. This switch is used to light up the vehi-cle interior in accordance to the open-ing and closing of the door.

2. This switch is used to open the REARmonitor.

3. This switch is used to constantly lightup the vehicle interior regardless ofwhether the doors are open or closed.

4. A receiver is installed within theRemote Control.

5. A device which transmits signals to theinfrared wireless headset is installed.

REAR DVDP DECK

1. This switch is used to eject the DISCfrom the REAR DVDP DECK.

2. No message is displayed when operat-ing a mode other than the DVDP modein the REAR system. A message stat-ing to eject the DISC will be displayedwhen in DVDP mode.

DISC-IN

4 157


Rear Wireless Headset

1. This is used to turn the power on/off.

2. This is used to make volume adjust-ments.

Rear Panel

1. The [MODE] operating on the REARsystem is displayed.

2. Used to turn the power on/off or adjustthe volume for the speaker.

3. Used to display the menu for the modecurrently operating on the REAR sys-tem.

4. Used to make screen adjustments forthe mode currently operating on theREAR system.

5. Used to change to a different mode onthe REAR system.

• Pressing this button will display ascreen in which the 6 supportedmodes of FM, AM, SIRIUS, CDC,DVDP, AUX can be selected.

• Re-pressing the button will return tothe currently playing mode.

• If there are no operations for 10 sec-onds while in mode selection screen,the previously operated mode will berestored.

• If the REAR system power is off, themonitor will turn on and the modescreen will become displayed.

6. This is used to play/pause when thedevice is operating a VCD, Audio CD,MP3 CD or DVD.

7. The 4-direction JOYSTICK is used tomove the select area on the screen ofthe REAR System. The JOYSTICK keyis used to select the button within theselect area.

CAUTIONThe power button and volume arepositioned at the left side of theheadset. Wearing the headset withthe left and right-side reversed mayreduce sound quality and recep-tion. Check to see that the headsetsare properly worn.


1584

Rear Remote Control 1. Used to turn the power of the Rearsystem on/off.

2. Used to illuminate the remote controlwhen the interior of the vehicle is dark.

3. Switches to the RADIO mode.(FM1➟FM2➟AM)

4. Switches to SIRIUS mode.5. Switches to Auxiliary device (USB➟

iPod➟AUX1➟AUX2) mode.6. Switches to the CDC/DVDP mode 7. This displays the menu buttons for the

mode currently operating on the REARsystem.

8. Used to return to the previous screen.(When moving to the parent menufrom the child menu (menu which isone level lower), there will be no oper-ation within the main menu screen orother screens.)

9. Used to move the select area upwards.10. Used to move the select area left-

wards.11. Used to move the select area right-

wards.12. Used to move the selected area

downwards.

13. Used to select the button within theselected area.

14. Used to operate the SEEK or TRACKselection function in accordance tothe currently playing AV mode.

15. Used to operate the TUNE or FF/REW functions for the current AVmode.

16. Used to make screen settings for themode currently operating on the Rearsystem.

17. Used to pause or replay the currentfile on the Rear system. (The play/pause function will not operate in theREAR system during CDC mode.)

18. Used to mute the REAR speaker. (Therear speakers can be muted when lis-tening through the rear headsets.

19. Used to set the DVD menu.20. Used to change the DVD AUDIO lan-

guage.21. Used to change the DVD SUBTITLE.

4 159


Operating the Rear (RSE) System

Starting the System1. Position the ignition key onto ACC or

ON.

2. If the [Push Power] button or the [PWR]button on the remote control is pressed,the AV system will turn on and displaythe most recently operated mode. (EX:turning on the system will display FM1radio mode if the last operated modeprior to turning off the system had beenFM1 radio.)

Turning Off the System1. If the [Push Power] button or the [PWR]

button on the remote control is pressedwhile the Rear system is operating, theRear AV system will stop operation andturn off.

Methods of RSE System Operation 1. The Rear system is operated by using

the 4-direction and [ENTER] key onthe Rear panel, 4-dreiction key and[ENTER] key on the remote controland the Back key.

Operating the REAR System1. Press a button on the remote control to

display a select area.

2. If the 4-direction key button on theremote control is pressed, the selectarea will move in the direction of thepressed button.Move to the desired direction andpress the select key on the remotecontrol to select the current button.

3. If there are no operations for 10 sec-onds, the select area will disappear.Re-pressing one of the 4-directionkeys will re-create the select area.

✽✽ NOTICEThe 4-direction and ENT keys on theREAR panel and the 4-direction andENT keys on the Remote control areused to conduct the same functions.

Adjusting the Screen Settings for theRSE (REAR) SystemAdjusting the Video Screen Quality 1. Press the [DISP] button on the REAR

panel or the Remote Control to displaythe semi-transparent video modescreen setting menu on the screen.

2. The 4-direction keys on the REARpanel or the Remote Control can beused to make adjustments to thebrightness, saturation, color, contrast,day/night modes, auto-light, screenratio, etc.


1604

Adjusting the Non-Video Screen Quality1. Press the [DISP] button on the REAR

panel or the remote control while non-video mode is playing to display thenon-video mode screen setup menu.

2. Use the 4-direction keys on the REARpanel or the Remote Control to adjustthe brightness, day/night modes andAuto Light function.

✽✽ NOTICEUpon selecting DAY LIGHT, the brightscreen is always maintained regardlessof the on/off state of the car taillights.However, brightness may be set to 90%in accordance to the external auto lightsensor. Upon selecting AUTO LIGHT, the dis-play is automatically brightened ordarkened in accordance to externalbrightness.

Adjusting the Volume1. Use the [PWR/VOLUME] button on the

REAR panel to adjust the sound vol-ume in the rear of the vehicle.

2. When adjusting the sound volume, thevolume level will be displayed as anumber on the Panel display and RoofMount monitor.

✽✽ NOTICEThe volume for the REAR is controlledin accordance to the volume level set forthe FRONT. Although the volume for the REAR canbe set to a level lower than the FRONT,it cannot be set to a volume level higherthan the FRONT as set through theFRONT system.

4 161


FM/AM mode

Starting FM/AM mode by use of Rearpanel 1. Press the [MODE] button on the REAR

panel to display a screen allowing the 6modes of FM, AM, SIRIUS, CDC, AUX,DVDP to be selected.

2. While in mode selection screen, usethe 4-direction keys on the REAR panelto move the select area and press thekey to select FM mode.

3. The FM1/FM2/AM mode screen willbecome displayed. Select the desiredbroadcast station to begin listening.

Starting FM/AM mode by use of Rearremote control 1. When operating a different mode,

pressing the [RADIO] key on the RearRemote Control will display the mostrecently operated RADIO mode. Inaddition, pressing the RADIO key willchange the mode in FM1➟FM2➟AM➟

FM1➟... order.

FM/AM mode menu screen configura-tion

1. Mode display This will display the current mode.FM1/FM2/AM

2. PRESET button The station can be easily selected bystoring the desired frequency in advance.

3. TUNE buttonThe frequency/station is increased orreduced incrementally.

4. SEEK buttonThe channel is automatically searchedthrough the SEEK function.

5. BAND button The mode is changed in FM1➟FM2➟AM➟FM1➟... order.

6. SCAN/SEEK displayThis becomes displayed when theSCAN/SEEK functions are operating.(The RSE supports only the AUDIOSCAN function.)

7. Station display The station of the currently playingbroadcast is displayed.


1624

8. Stereo reception display This is displayed when the currentbroadcast is a stereo broadcast.

Methods of Station selection Selecting station through Preset This function allows station previouslysaved to be selected for broadcast.1. After selecting one of the FM1/FM2/

AM modes, move the select area to oneof the six preset buttons stored with thebroadcast station desired for listeningand press the ENTER key.

✽✽ NOTICEThe channels possible for preset are 6channels each for FM1, FM2 and AM.(Refer to [Chapter # Storing a broadcastchannel to a preset button] for moreinformation on storing presets)

Selecting station through SEEK This function is used to automatically selectchannels through the SEEK function.1. After selecting one of the FM1/FM2/

AM modes, press the [SEEK] buttonon the Remote Control to automatical-ly search for stations with high-recep-tion.

2. In addition, press the [SEEK UP/DOWN]on the remote control to increase ordecrease the station automatically tosearch for high-reception stations.

Selecting a station through TUNE This function allows the TUNE function tobe used to directly select the desiredbroadcast station.1. After selecting one of the FM1/FM2/

AM modes, press the TUNE button toincrease or decrease the station in 1-step increments (FM : 0.1MHz, AM :9kHz). Use the TUNE button to selectthe broadcast station desired for lis-tening.

2. In addition, each time the [TUNE UP/DOWN] button on the remote control ispressed, the station will increase ordecrease.

Storing station a preset button Storing Manually1. To store the current station, use the 4-

direction key on the REAR panel or theRemote Control to display the selectarea and move it to the PRESET but-ton desired for storing.

2. After positioning the select area to thePRESET button desired for storing,press the select key on the JOYSTICKof the REAR panel or the select key onthe Remote Control for over 0.8 sec-onds to store the current station.

✽✽ NOTICEThe SCAN function which automatical-ly searches for broadcast stations withsuperior reception is only supported bythe FRONT system. Using the SCANfunction through the FRONT systemwill apply the same settings in theREAR system.

4 163


SIRIUS satellite radio mode

Starting SIRIUS mode by use of Rearpanel1. Press the [MODE] button on the REAR

panel to display a screen allowing the6 modes of FM, AM, SIRIUS, CDC,AUX, DVDP to be selected.

2. While in mode selection screen, usethe 4-direction keys on the REARpanel to move the cursor to SIRLUSmode and press the joystick key toenter SIRIUS mode.

3. The selected SIRIUS1/SIRIUS2/SIR-IUS3 mode screen will be displayed.Select the desired broadcast station tobegin listening.

Starting SIRIUS mode by use of Rearremote control1. When operating a different mode,

pressing the [SIRIUS] key on the RearRemote Control will display the mostrecently operated SIRIUS mode.Pressing the SIRIUS key will changethe mode in SIRIUS1, SIRIUS2, SIR-IUS3, SIRIUS1 order.

SIRIUS mode menu screen configura-tion

1. Mode display This displays that the current mode isSIRIUS1/SIRIUS2/SIRIUS3 mode.

2. PRESET button The station can be easily selected bystoring the desired station in advance.

3. CHANNEL Search buttonThe channels within the category arechanged.(All of the channels will be searchedwhen set to ALL Category. When in CATSEARCHING mode, search will be doneonly for the current category.)

4. CATEGORY UP/DOWN Search but-ton

This button will conduct a cyclic search ofthe CATEGORY. The current channel willbe maintained during the search.

5. ENTER button This button will change the channel tothe desired channel.

6. SAT buttonThe SIRIUS1/SIRIUS2/SIRIUS3 modesare changed.

7. INFORMATION buttonThis button will display the INFORMA-TION pop-up window for the currentbroadcast.

8. SCAN button This button scans the channels within thecurrent Category.


1644

9. Channel name, Channel name display The NUMBER and Channel name of thecurrent channel are displayed.

10. CATEGORY display The name of the current category is dis-played.

11. SONG TITLE display The title and broadcast title of the currentsong are displayed.

Methods of Frequency selectionSelecting a station through Preset This function allows station previouslysaved to be selected for broadcast.

1. After selecting one of the SIRIUS1/SIRIUS2/SIRIUS3 modes, move theselect area to the preset button storedwith the broadcast station desired forlistening and press ENTER.

✽✽ NOTICEThe stations possible for preset are 6channels each for SIRIUS1, SIRIUS2and SIRIUS3.

Selecting a station through Channelsearch1. After selecting one of the SIRIUS1/

SIRIUS2/SIRIUS3 modes, press theChannel Search button on the RemoteControl to increase or decrease thestation in 1-step increments. Use theChannel Search button to select thestation desired for broadcast.

2. Press the [SEEK UP/DOWN] buttonon the Remote Control to automatical-ly increase or decrease the station.

Storing a broadcast channel to aPreset button Storing Manually1. To store the current station, use the 4-

direction key on the REAR panel or theRemote Control to display the cursorand move it to the PRESET buttondesired for storing.

2. After positioning the cursor to thePRESET button desired for storing,press the JOYSTICK select key on theREAR panel or the select key on theRemote Control for over 0.8 secondsto store the current frequency.

4 165


CDC/rear DVDP mode

Starting CDC / DVDP mode by use ofRear panel 1. Press the [MODE] button on the REAR

panel to display the MODE selectionscreen.

2. If the joystick located at the far right-side of the REAR panel is moved inany direction, the cursor will highlightthe button of the most recently operat-ed mode. (EX: The most recent RADIOFM mode)

3. While in mode selection screen, usethe 4-direction keys on the REAR panelto move the cursor to CDC/DVDP modeand press the joystick key.

4. If the CDC mode is selected, the DISCselection screen displaying the No. 1 ~6 DISC will display. If the DVDP modeis selected, the DISC already insertedin the DVD PLAYER will begin playing.

5. When in CDC mode, use the 4-directionjoystick to move to the select area of thedesired DISC and press ENTER tobegin playing.

Starting CDC/DVDP mode by use ofRear remote control 1. When operating a different mode,

pressing the [DISC] key on the RearRemote Control will display the mostrecently operated mode between CDCmode and DVDP mode. In addition,pressing the DISC key will change themode in CDC➟DVDP➟CDC order.

2. When in CDC mode, use the 4-direc-tion joystick on the REAR panel tomove the cursor to the desired track ofthe Disc and press the select button onthe remote control to begin playing.

✽✽ NOTICEIf there are no discs already inserted inthe CD Changer or the DVD player,pressing the [DISC] key on the remotecontrol will not begin mode operation.


1664

CD Changer mode menu screen con-figuration

1. Mode display This displays that the current mode isCDC mode.

2. CD Changer info display The operational status of the CDCchanger is displayed.

3. DISC select button The disc status is displayed.

4. BACK This button will remain inactive if the DISCis not properly playing. When in properplaying state, pressing this button will dis-play the DISC mode of the CD Changer.

4 167


CD mode

Starting CD mode by use of Rearpanel 1. Press the [MODE] button on the REAR


2. If the 4-direction joystick located at thefar right-side of the REAR panel ismoved in any direction, the select areawill become displayed on the button ofthe most recently operated mode

3. While in mode selection screen, usethe 4-direction keys on the REARpanel to move the cursor to CDC/DVDP mode and press the joystickkey to enter.

4. If the CDC mode is selected, the DISCselection screen displaying the No. 1 ~6 DISC becomes displayed. If theDVDP mode is selected, the CDalready inserted in the DVD PLAYERwill begin playing.

5. When in CDC mode, use the 4-direc-tion joystick to move to the select areaof the DISC where the CD has beeninserted and press the joystick key tobegin playing.

Starting CD mode by use of Rearremote control 1. When operating a different mode,


2. When in CDC mode, use the 4-direc-tion joystick on the REAR panel tomove to the select area of the DISCwhere the CD has been inserted andpress the select button on the remotecontrol to begin playing.


Selecting a track with the RemoteControl & Searching a playing track 1. Press the [SEEK/TRACK UP/DOWN]

key on the Remote Control to move tothe previous or next track.

2. Pressing the [TUNE UP/DOWN] keyon the Remote Control will quicksearch the current track.

✽✽ NOTICEIn the case of CD Changer : The RAN-DOM, REPEAT and SCAN functionsare supported only by the FRONT sys-tem. There are no buttons for thesefunctions in the REAR system and themethod of operating the FRONT sys-tem is the same as the REAR system. In the case of DVD Player : The RAN-DOM, REPEAT and SCAN functionsare not supported in both FRONT andREAR systems.


1684

CD mode menu screen configuration

1. Mode display This displays that the current mode is CDChanger mode.

2. FAST FORWARD buttonThe track can be fast forwarded.

3. FAST REWIND buttonThe track can be rewinded.

4. TRACK DOWN buttonThe start of the current or previous trackwill begin playing. The start of the currenttrack will begin playing if the track hasplayed for over 3 seconds. The start ofthe previous track will begin playing if thetrack has played for under 3 seconds.

5. TRACK UP buttonThe start of the next track will begin play-ing.

6. Play time The play time of the currently playingsong is displayed.

7. DISC number display The DISC number of the currently play-ing disc is displayed.

8. TRACK displayThe current TRACK of the currently play-ing DISC is displayed.

9. RDM/RPT/SCAN displayThis is displayed when the RANDOM/REPEAT/SCAN functions are operating.

10. DISC buttonThe 6-disc CD changer select screen isdisplayed.

✽✽ NOTICEThere is a PLAY/PAUSE function with-in DVDP CD mode.

Selecting a DISC track 1. Select the Track button on the CD

operation screen.(The track will change each time the[TRACK] buttons are pressed.)

Fast-forwarding a track 1. Press the [FAST FORWARD] button to

fast forward the current song.

✽✽ NOTICEThe tracks will continue to be searchedif the button is continuously pressed. Ifreleased, the video will return to normalspeed.

4 169


MP3 mode

Starting MP3 mode by use of Rearpanel 1. Press the [MODE] button on the REAR


2. If the key on the joystick located at thefar right-side of the REAR panel ismoved in any direction, the select areawill become displayed on the button ofthe most recently operated mode.

3. While in mode selection screen, usethe 4-direction keys on the REARpanel to move the select area to CDC/DVDP mode and press the joystickkey to enter.

4. If the CDC mode is selected, the DISCselection screen displaying the No. 1 ~6 DISC becomes displayed. If theDVDP mode is selected, the MP3already inserted in the DVD PLAYERwill begin playing.

5. When in CDC mode, use the 4-direc-tion joystick on the REAR panel tomove to the select area of the DISCwhere the MP3 has been inserted andpress the joystick key to begin playing.

Starting MP3 mode by use of Rearremote control 1. When operating a different mode,

pressing the [DISC] button on theREAR Remote Control will display themost recently operated mode betweenCDC mode and DVDP mode. In addi-tion, pressing the DISC key willchange the mode inCDC➟DVDP➟CDC order.

2. When in CDC mode, use the 4-direc-tion joystick on the REAR panel tomove to the select area of the DISCwhere the MP3 has been inserted andpress the select button on the remotecontrol to begin playing.


Selecting a file or searching currentfile with the Rear Remote Control 1. Press the [SEEK/TRACK UP/DOWN]

button on the Remote Control to moveto the previous or next file.

2. Pressing the [TUNE UP/DOWN] buttonon the Remote Control will quicklysearch the previous or next files.

✽✽ NOTICEIn the case of CD Changer : The RAN-DOM, REPEAT, and SCAN functionsare supported only by the FRONT sys-tem. There are no buttons for thesefunctions in the REAR system and themethod of operating the FRONT systemare the same as the REAR system. In the case of DVD Player : The RAN-DOM, REPEAT and SCAN functionsare not supported in the FRONT andREAR systems.


1704

MP3 mode menu screen configura-tion

1. Mode display This displays that the current mode isMP3 mode of the CD Changer.

2. FAST FORWARD buttonThe file is fast forwarded.

3. FAST REWIND buttonThe file is rewinded.

4. FILE DOWN buttonThe start of the current or previous filewill begin playing. The start of the currentfile will begin playing if the file has playedfor over 3 seconds. The start of the previ-ous file will begin playing if the file hasplayed for under 3 seconds.

5. FILE UP buttonThe start of the next song will begin play-ing.

6. Play time display The play time of the currently playingsong is displayed.

7. DISC number display The DISC number of the currently play-ing song is displayed.

8. RDM/RPT/SCAN function displayDisplays the RANDOM, REPEAT, SCANfunction settings.

9. Folder name display Displays the folder of the currently file.

10. File name display Displays the name of the currently play-ing file.

11. LIST buttonMoves to the MP3 LIST screen.

12. INFO buttonThe information (Album name/Title/Artist)of the currently playing file is displayed.This function is supported only in MP3files inputted within information.

13. DISC buttonThe CD Changer select screen is dis-played.

✽✽ NOTICEThere is a PLAY/PAUSE function with-in DVDP MP3 mode.

4 171


MP3 LIST menu screen configuration

1. Mode display Display the current LIST screen.

2. Folder name display Displays the folder of the current file.

3. File name display Displays the name of the current file.

4. BACK buttonThe MP3 mode menu screen willbecome displayed.

5. Play time display Displays the play time of the currentsong.

6. LIST UP buttonDisplays the previous LIST.

7. LIST DOWN buttonDisplays the next LIST.

8. LIST page display The number of MP3 lists [Current Page/Total Pages) is displayed.

9. Scroll bar display The location of the folder within the cur-rent list is displayed.

10. LIST folder display The folder name which shows what fold-er the current list is in will be displayed.

11. Selected LIST displayThe currently selected LIST is displayed.

12. LISTThe folders and files in the current folderare displayed.

13. HOME buttonWhen having moved to a list which doesnot display the currently playing file,pressing this button will return to theLIST screen of the currently playing file.(This button is inactive when the dis-played LIST includes the currently play-ing file.)

14. PARENT folder button Moves to the Parent Folder.

15. ROOT folder button Moves to the Root Folder.

✽✽ NOTICEThe detail information will only be dis-played when such information has beenrecorded in the ID3 tag of the MP3 file.


1724

VCD mode

Starting VCD mode by use of Rearpanel 1. Press the [MODE] button on the REAR



3. While in mode selection screen, usethe 4-direction keys on the REARpanel to move the select area to DVDPmode. If the joystick key is pressed,the VCD already inserted in the DVDPLAYER will begin playing.

Starting VCD mode by use of Rearremote control 1. When operating a different mode,


Operating the AV MENU by use ofRear Panel 1. Press the AV button on the REAR

panel while a VCD is playing to displaythe semitransparent AV MENU at thetop of the screen.

2. If the [TRACK DOWN/UP] button ispressed by using the 4-direction joy-stick key or the joystick select key onthe REAR panel, the previous or nexttrack will be played. If the [FAST FOR-WARD/REWIND] button is pressed bythe same method, the current trackcan be rewinded or fast forwarded.

Selecting a track with the RemoteControl & Searching playing track 1. Press the [SEEK/TRACK UP/DOWN]

button on the Remote Control to moveto the previous or next track.

2. Pressing the [TUNE UP/DOWN] but-ton on the Remote Control will quicklysearch the current track.

4 173


VCD mode menu screen configura-tion

1. Mode display This displays that the current mode isVCD mode.

2. FAST FORWARD button The track is fast forwarded.

3. FAST REWIND button The track is rewinded.

4. TRACK DOWN buttonThe start of the current or previous trackwill begin playing.

5. TRACK UP buttonThe start of the next track will begin play-ing.

6. PLAY/PAUSE buttonPlays/Pauses the track.

7. PBC(Play Back Control) button As a function supported only with VideoCD version 2.0 discs, the PBC functioncan be turned ON or OFF.

8. INPUT button The desired track can be inputted forplay.

9. PBC setting display The PBC ON or PBC OFF is displayed inaccordance to PBC setting.

10. TRACK number display The current track number is displayed.

11. Play time display The play time of the current VCD is dis-played.

12. END buttonThe VCD menu screen will be removedso that the video can be viewed in FullScreen.

13. MENU buttonThe interactive menu encoded on theVCD is displayed. This menu is displayedonly when the PBC is set to ON in aVideo CD version 2.0 DISC.


1744

Using the PBC function What is the PBC (Play Back Control)function?• This function allows the various infor-

mation stored on the Video CD to beviewed by using the interactive menuencoded on a MPEG1 version 2.0Video CD discs.

• The PBC function is supported only inVideo CD version 2.0 discs.

• The PBC function may operate differ-ently in accordance to the manufactur-ing conditions on the Video CD version2.0 disc.

1. Select the PBC button on the VCDoperation screen while playing.

2. If the PBC ON is displayed at the topside of the info display window, theENTER button will change to theMENU button. Select the MENU but-ton.

3. After the menu screen is displayed,select the desired number betweenthe 0 ~ 9 and press the DONE buttonto complete.

✽✽ NOTICESelecting < , > will display the set menusof the previous or next page.

4. The selected menu will be applied.

✽✽ NOTICEThe PBC will return to OFF state if adifferent DISC is inserted, the power orignition is turned ON/OFF while in PBCON state.

4 175


DVD mode

Starting DVD mode by use of Rearpanel 1. Press the [MODE] button on the REAR



3. While in mode selection screen, usethe 4-direction keys on the REARpanel to move the select area to DVDPmode. If the joystick key is pressed,the DVD already inserted in the DVDPLAYER will begin playing.

4. The DVD title will begin playing.

✽✽ NOTICEUnderstanding DVD titles.

Contents of DVD Title The video and sound recorded on theDVD are divided into titles and can berecognized by their title numbers. Eachtitle is sub-divided into smaller unitscalled chapters and each chapter can berecognized by the chapter number. Thetitle number and chapter number of thecurrent DVD title is displayed on theupper side of the DVD operation menuscreen.

DVD region codeThe DVD player and DVD discs are setwith region codes and can be played inaccordance to the sales region. If a discbesides “Region Code 1(United States,American region, Canada)” or “All-regiondisc” is inserted, then a “Region CodeError” screen will be displayed and discplay will not be supported.

Color TV support This device supports the NTSC color tel-evision system. Other systems besideNTSC are not supported.

DVD mode menu screen configura-tion

1. Mode display This displays that the current mode isDVD mode of the DVD Player.

2. FAST FORWARD buttonThe current title can be fast forwarded.Continue to press the button until thedesired chapter has been reached.

3. FAST REWIND buttonThe current title can be rewinded.Continue to press the button until thedesired chapter has been reached.

4. CHAPTER DOWN buttonMoves to the previous chapter.

5. CHAPTER UP buttonMoves to the next chapter.


1764

6. PLAY/PAUSE buttonPauses or replays the DVD.

7. SEARCH buttonThe desired title/chapter can be directlyselected by searching the chapters/titles.Searches are not supported when theinitial logo video/menu is being dis-played. Searches are possible only whenthe video is playing.

8. MENU buttonThis is used to return to the initial menusetup screen while a DVD title is playing.

9. TITLE buttonFor some types of DVD titles, there couldbe several initial menu setup screens.This is used to return to the root setupmenu screen.

10. TITLE number display The current title number is displayed.

11. CHAPTER number display The current chapter number is displayed.

12. Play time display The play time of the current title is dis-played.

13. SUBTITLE button The subtitle can be set for DVD titlessupporting Multi-Subtitle function.

14. AUDIO button The voice language can be set for DVDtitles supporting Multi-Language func-tion.

15. ANGLE button The angle can be set for DVD titlesencoded with the Multi-Angle function.

16. DVD setting button Restores the initial DVD setup screen.

17. END buttonThe menu screen will be removed to dis-play only the video.

DVD mode setting If the DVD setup button in the DVD modemenu screen is pressed, the setupscreen as shown below will become dis-played.

✽✽ NOTICEThe DVD setup screen is used not tochange the settings of the current DVDtitle but to define the settings of theDVD PLAYER. In order to apply themodified valued, restart the currentDVD from the beginning. The set values will not be applied in thecase of playing a DISC which does notsupport the currently set language orthe current settings.

4 177


Setting voice language 1. Press the voice language button in the

DVD setup screen.

2. Select the desired voice language.If the OTHERS button is pressed, lan-guages other than the ones displayedcan be directly inputted for selection.

3. If the OTHERS button is selected, thevoice language code input screen willbe displayed. Input the desired code.

4. If a proper code is inputted, the DVDsetup screen will be returned and dis-play the set voice language.

5. Press the DONE button to completethe changes and replay from thebeginning.

Setting subtitle language 1. Press the subtitle language button in

the DVD setup screen.

2. Select the desired subtitle language.Press the OTHER button to set a differ-ent subtitle. Press the SUBTITLE OFFbutton to turn off the subtitle display.

3. The method of inputting subtitle lan-guage code is the same as the methodof inputting voice language code.

Setting menu language 1. Press the menu language button in the

DVD setup screen.

2. Select the desired menu language.Press the OTHER button to display adifferent menu language.

3. The method of inputting the menu lan-guage code is the same as the methodof inputting voice language code.

✽✽ NOTICEPlease refer to the Language Code pageat the back of the user manual. The set values will not be applied in thecase of playing a DISC which does notsupport the currently set language orthe current settings.

Searching title/chapter 1. While playing, select the search.

2. When searching for titles, press theTITLE button.


1784

Using the Interactive Menu 1. Upon first playing a DVD title, a menu

screen will become displayed after theinitialization video.While playing, press the menu button,the AV [MENU] button on the REARpanel or the [AV MENU] button on theRemote Control to display the semi-transparent AV MENU at the top of thescreen.

2. Select the desired menu by using theup/down & left/right direction keys orthe 4-direction joystick keys on theRear Panel or the 4-direction keys onthe Remote Control and press ENTER.

✽✽ NOTICEThe menu will operate only in support-ed DVD titles.

4 179


USB mode

Starting USB mode by use of Rearpanel 1. Press the [MODE] button on the REAR



3. Select the AUX mode button.

4. Select the MUSIC button on the AUXmode screen.

5. The USB will begin playing.

✽✽ NOTICERefer to the MP3 mode section inChapter 5 for additional USB relatedoperational instructions.

iPod® modeiPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Starting iPod mode by use of Rearpanel 1. Press the [MODE] button on the REAR



3. Select the AUX mode button.

4. Select the iPod button on the AUXmode screen.

5. The iPod will begin playing.


1804

✽✽ NOTICERefer to the MP3 mode section inChapter 5 for additional USB relatedoperational instructions.

1. Refer to the MP3 mode section inChapter 5 for additional iPod relatedoperational instructions.

2. Some iPod devices may not play if thecommunication protocol is not sup-ported by the device. (SupportediPods : mini, 4G Photo, Nano, 5G).

3. The search and song order on the iPoddevice may differ with the search andsong order of the AV system.

4. RESET the iPod in the case of errorswhich occur due to malfunctions onthe iPod device. (Refer to the iPodmanual)

CAUTION1. In order to operate the iPod with

the AV system buttons, a sepa-rately sold iPod connector cablemust be used.

❈ Please refrain from using the PCcable in the package as thedevice may not properly operate.

2. When connecting the iPod cable,push the end of the JACK underthe terminal so that it does notcause interference with the com-munication.

3. Having the iPod cable connectedeven when there is no iPod canconvert the device into AUXmode causing an occurrence ofnoise. Please make sure toremove the iPod cable when aniPod device is not being used.

4 181


AUX mode (auxiliary device input)

✽✽ NOTICEThe AUX1/AUX2 mode will operate onlywhen an auxiliary AUDIO & VIDEOplayer (camcorder, vehicle VCR, etc.) isconnected and operating.

Starting AUX mode by use of Rearpanel 1. Press the [MODE] button on the REAR



3. Select the AUX button.

4. Select the AUX1 or AUX2 button in theAUX mode screen.

5. The AUX1, AUX2 will begin playing.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the auxiliary device connector jack isremoved while in AUX mode, the previ-ous mode will automatically be dis-played. Pressing the AUX1, AUX2 button whilethe auxiliary device is not is not connect-ed or with only the VIDEO jack connect-ed will display a "The device is not prop-erly connected" message.

CAUTION1. Having the auxiliary cable con-

nected even when there is noauxiliary device can convert thedevice into AUX mode and causenoise.Please make sure to remove theauxiliary cable when an auxiliarydevice is not being used.

2. Connecting an auxiliary device tothe cigarette jack and playingthrough the screen of the devicemay cause an occurrence ofnoise.If such noise occurs, remove thepower cable from the cigarettejack.


1824

Connecting an external VIDEO player1. An auxiliary AUDIO & VIDEO player

(camcorder, vehicle VCR, etc.) can beconnected for viewing.

2. The AUX jack is positioned next to thePOWER OUTLET on the backside ofthe consol box located in between thedriver and passenger seat.

✽✽ NOTICE1. Among the auxiliary VIDEO connec-

tor jacks, the yellow is for video, red isfor right-side audio, and white is forleft-side audio.

2. This device supports the NTSC colorsystem. Other systems beside NTSCwill not be supported.

3. The recommended audio input stan-dard for this device is max 1Vrms. Inputwhich exceeds this value may cause dete-riorated sound quality.

Starting AUX mode by use of Rearremote control 1. When operating a different mode,

pressing the [AUX] button on theREAR Remote Control will display theAUX screen corresponding to the con-nected device. In addition, each timethe [AUX] button on the RemoteControl is pressed, the correspondingAUX mode for the connected deviceswill become displayed.

4 183


DVD language code

CODE NATION CODE NATION CODE NATION CODE NATION0101010201060113011801190125012602010205020702080209021402150218030103150319032504010405042605120514051505190520052106010609061006150618

0625070107040712071407210801080908180821082509010905091109140919092009231009100110221101111111121113111411151119112111251201121412151220

1222130713091311131213141315131813191320132514011405141214151503151315181601161216191620172118131814181518211823190119041907190819091911

1912191319141915191719181919192019211922192320012005200720082009201120122014201520182019202020232111211821262209221523152408251526082621

LatvianMalagasy

MaoriMacedonianMalayalamMongolianMoldavian

MarathiMalay

MalteseBurmese

NauruNepaliDutch

NorwegianOccitanOromoOriya

PunjabiPolishPushto

PortugueseQuechuaRomance

KirundiRomanianRussian

Kinyarwanda Sanskrit

SindhiSanghoCroation

Sinhalese Slovak

SlovenianSamoanShonaSomal

Albanian Serbian Swati

Sesotho Sundanese

SwedishSwahili Tamil

Telugu Tajik Thai

Tigrinya Turkmen Tagalog TswanaTonga TurkishTsonga

Tatar Twi

UkrainianUrdu

Uzbek Vietnamese

Volapuk Wolo

XhosaYoruba

ChineseZulu

AfarAbkhazianAfrikaansAmharic Arabic

Assamese Aymara

AzerbaijaniBashkir

BelarusianBulgarian

BihariBislamaBengaliTibetanBretonCatalanCorsican

CzechWelshDanishGermanBhutaniGreek

EnglishEsperantoSpanishEstonianBasquePersianFinnishFijian

FaroeseFrench

FrisianIrish

ScotsGalleganGuaraniGujaratiHausaHindi

CroatianHungarianArmenianInterlinguaInterlingue

InupiakIndonesianIcelandic

ItalianHebrewYiddish

JapaneseJavaneseGeorgianKazakh

GreenlandicCambodianKannadaKorean

KashmiriKurdishKirghizLatin

LingalaLaotian

Lithuanian


1844

REAR Monitor Connentor Pin Layout

REAR-V-CVBSNCNCNC

REAR-V-GNDD/MIX RD/MIX LFGND

CANO_HILL+NCB+

NCNCNCSG

GNDD/MIX GND

SGSG

CANO_LNC

ACCNC

123456789101112

131415161718192021222324

NO Signal NO Signal

REAR DVD Player Connector Pin Layout

RO_GNDFO_GNDF/AO_L

AUX_A_GNDAUX_AR_DET

FI_GNDF/AIN_R

AUX-V GNDREAR-V GND

NCR/AO_LR/AO_RF/AO_RAUX_ARAUX_AL

AUX_AL_DETF/AIN_LAUX_V

REAR-V-CVBSNCSG

CANO_HNCNCNCILL+ACCB+

GNDCANO_L

NCNCNCILL_NCNC

123456789101112131415161718

192021222324252627282930313233343536

NO Signal NO Signal

4 185


REAR Keyboard Connector Pin Layout

SGCAO_H

NCAuto Light

ALTILL+ACCB+NC

CANO_LNC

GNDNCILL-NCNC

12345678910111213141516

NO Signal

Model Power Voltage Dimensions(WxHxD) WeightRear Monitor 14.4V(10~15V possible) Negative ground 360 x 230 x 40 mm 2.19 kg

Rear Kyeboard 14.4V(10~15V possible) Negative ground 169 x 64 x 93.2 mm 365 g

DVD Player 14.4V(10~15V possible) Negative ground 178 x 54 x 181.2 mm 1.39 kg

Product Specification

5

Before driving / 5-3Key positions / 5-4ENGINE START/STOP button / 5-6Starting the engine / 5-9Automatic transmission / 5-12Four wheel drive (4WD) / 5-18Brake system / 5-27Cruise control system / 5-39Economical operation / 5-43Special driving conditions / 5-45Winter driving / 5-49

Trailer towing / 5-52Vehicle load limit / 5-61Vehicle weight / 5-66



25

E010000AUN

WARNING - ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the win-dows immediately.

• Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxia-tion.

• Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you heara change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have theexhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized KIA dealer.

• Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in yourgarage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

• Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open areawith the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the tailgate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield arekept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

5 3


E020100AUN

Before entering vehicle• Be sure that all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean.• Check the condition of the tires.• Check under the vehicle for any sign of

leaks.• Be sure there are no obstacles behind

you if you intend to back up.

E020200AUN

Necessary inspectionsFluid levels, such as engine oil, enginecoolant, brake fluid, and washer fluidshould be checked on a regular basis,with the exact interval depending on thefluid. Further details are provided in sec-tion 7, “Maintenance”.

E020300BUN

Before starting • Close and lock all doors.• Position the seat so that all controls are

easily reached.• Adjust the inside and outside rearview

mirrors.

• Be sure that all lights work.• Check all gauges.• Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is turned tothe ON position.

• Release the parking brake and makesure the brake warning light goes out.

For safe operation, be sure you are famil-iar with your vehicle and its equipment.

BEFORE DRIVING

WARNINGAll passengers must be properlybelted whenever the vehicle is mov-ing. Refer to “Seat belts” in section3 for more information on theirproper use.

WARNINGAlways check the surroundingareas near your vehicle for people,especially children, before putting acar into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

WARNING - Driving underthe influence of alcohol ordrugs

Drinking and driving is dangerous.Drunk driving is the number onecontributor to the highway deathtoll each year. Even a small amountof alcohol will affect your reflexes,perceptions and judgment. Drivingwhile under the influence of drugsis as dangerous or more dangerousthan driving drunk.You are much more likely to have aserious accident if you drink ortake drugs and drive.If you are drinking or taking drugs,don’t drive. Do not ride with a driv-er who has been drinking or takingdrugs. Choose a designated driveror call a cab.

WARNINGWhen you intend to park or stop thevehicle with the engine on, be care-ful not to depress the acceleratorpedal for a long period of time. Itmay overheat the engine or exhaustsystem and cause fire.


45

E030100AHM

Illuminated ignition switchWhenever a front door is opened, theignition switch will illuminate for your con-venience, provided the ignition switch isnot in the ON position.The light will go offimmediately when the ignition switch isturned on. It will also go off after about 30seconds when the door is closed.

Ignition switch positionE030201AUN

LOCKThe steering wheel locks to protectagainst theft. The ignition key can beremoved only in the LOCK position.When turning the ignition switch to theLOCK position, push the key inward atthe ACC position and turn the key towardthe LOCK position.

E030202AHM

ACC (Accessory)The steering wheel is unlocked and elec-trical accessories are operative.

✽✽ NOTICEIf difficulty is experienced turning theignition switch to the ACC position, turnthe key while turning the steering wheelright and left to release the tension.

E030203AUN

ONThe warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. This is thenormal running position after the engineis started.Do not leave the ignition switch ON if theengine is not running to prevent batterydischarge.

OHM058001N OUN036002

KEY POSITIONS

5 5


E030204AUN

STARTTurn the ignition switch to the STARTposition to start the engine. The enginewill crank until you release the key; thenit returns to the ON position. The brakewarning lamp can be checked in thisposition.

E030205AHM

WARNING - Ignitionswitch

• Never turn the ignition switch toLOCK or ACC while the vehicle ismoving. This would result in lossof directional control and brakingfunction, which could cause anaccident.

• The anti-theft steering column lockis not a substitute for the parkingbrake. Before leaving the driver’sseat, always make sure the shiftlever is engaged in P (Park), set theparking brake fully and shut theengine off. Unexpected and sud-den vehicle movement may occurif these precautions are not taken.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never reach for the ignition switch,

or any other controls through thesteering wheel while the vehicle isin motion. The presence of yourhand or arm in this area couldcause a loss of vehicle control, anaccident and serious bodily injuryor death.

• Do not place any movable objectsaround the driver’s seat as theymay move while driving, interferewith the driver and lead to an acci-dent.


65

Illuminated ENGINE START/STOPbuttonE030100AHM

Whenever the front door is opened, theENGINE START/STOP button will illumi-nate for your convenience. The light willgo off after about 30 seconds when thedoor is closed. It will also go off immedi-ately when the theft-alarm system isarmed.

ENGINE START/STOP buttonpositionE030701AHM

OFF

To turn off the engine (START/RUN posi-tion) or vehicle power (ON position),press the ENGINE START/STOP buttonwith the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-tion. When you press the ENGINESTART/STOP button without the shiftlever in the P (Park) position, theENGINE START/STOP button will notturn to the OFF position but to the ACCposition.Also, the steering wheel locks when theENGINE START/STOP button is in theOFF position to protect you against theft.It locks when the door is opened or whenyou pull out the smart key from the smartkey holder.If the steering wheel is not locked prop-erly when you open the driver's door, thewarning chime will sound. Try locking thesteering wheel again. If the problem isnot solved, have it checked by an author-ized KIA dealer.

In addition, if the ENGINE START/STOPbutton is in the OFF position after the dri-ver's door is opened, the steering wheelwill not lock and the warning chime willsound. In such a situation, close the door.Then the steering wheel will lock and thewarning chime will stop.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the steering wheel doesn't unlockproperly, the ENGINE START/STOPbutton will not work. Press the ENGINESTART/STOP button while turning thesteering wheel right and left to releasethe tension.

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

OHM058001

CAUTIONYou are able to turn off the engine(START/RUN) or vehicle power (ON),only when the vehicle is not inmotion. In an emergency situationwhile the vehicle is in motion, you areable to turn the engine off and to theACC position by pressing the ENGINESTART/STOP button for more than 3seconds or 3 times successively. Ifthe vehicle is still moving, you canrestart the engine without depressingthe brake pedal by pressing theENGINE START/STOP button with theshift lever in the N (Neutral) position.

Not illuminated

5 7


E030202AHM

ACC (Accessory)

Press the ENGINE START/STOP buttonwhile it is in the OFF position withoutdepressing the brake pedal.The steering wheel unlocks and electri-cal accessories are operational.If the ENGINE START/STOP button is inthe ACC position for more than 1 hour,the button is turned off automatically toprevent battery discharge.

E030203AHM

ON

Press the ENGINE START/STOP buttonwhile it is in the ACC position withoutdepressing the brake pedal.The warning lights can be checkedbefore the engine is started. Do not leavethe ENGINE START/STOP button in theON position for a long time. The batterymay discharge, because the engine isnot running.

E030704AHM

START/RUN

To start the engine, depress the brakepedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button with the shift lever in the P(Park) or the N (Normal) position. Foryour safety, start the engine with the shiftlever in the P (Park) position.

✽✽ NOTICEIf you press the ENGINE START/STOPbutton without depressing the brakepedal, the engine will not start and thebutton will change as follow: OFF ➔➔ACC ➔➔ ON ➔➔ OFF or ACC

Orange indicator Green indicator Not illuminated


85

E030205AHM

✽✽ NOTICEIf you leave the ENGINE START/ STOPbutton in the ACC or ON position for along time, the battery will discharge.

WARNING• Never press the ENGINE

START/STOP button while thevehicle is in motion. This wouldresult in loss of directional con-trol and braking function, whichcould cause an accident.

• The anti-theft steering columnlock is not a substitute for theparking brake. Before leaving thedriver's seat, always make surethe shift lever is engaged in P(Park), set the parking brake fullyand shut the engine off.Unexpected and sudden vehiclemovement may occur if theseprecautions are not taken.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Never reach for the ENGINE

START/STOP button or any othercontrols through the steeringwheel while the vehicle is inmotion. The presence of yourhand or arm in the area couldcause loss of vehicle control, anaccident and serious bodilyinjury or death.

• Do not place any movable objectsaround the driver's seat as theymay move while driving, interferewith the driver and lead to anaccident.

5 9


E040000AUN-EU Starting the engine with an igni-tion key (if equipped)E040100AHM

1. Make sure the parking brake isapplied.

2. Place the transmission shift lever in P(Park). Depress the brake pedal fully.You can also start the engine whenthe shift lever is in the N (Neutral)position.

3. Turn the ignition switch to START andhold it there until the engine starts (amaximum of 10 seconds), thenrelease the key.

4. In extremely cold weather (below -18°C/0°F) or after the vehicle has notbeen operated for several days, let theengine warm up without depressingthe accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, itshould be started without depressingthe accelerator.

STARTING THE ENGINE

WARNINGAlways wear appropriate shoeswhen operating your vehicle.Unsuitable shoes (high heels, skiboots,etc.) may interfere with yourability to use the brake and acceler-ator pedal.

CAUTIONIf the engine stalls while you are inmotion, do not attempt to move theshift lever to the P (Park) position. Iftraffic and road conditions permit,you may put the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position while the vehicleis still moving and turn the ignitionswitch to the START position in anattempt to restart the engine.

CAUTIONDo not engage the starter for morethan 10 seconds. If the engine stallsor fails to start, wait 5 to 10 secondsbefore re-engaging the starter.Improper use of the starter maydamage it.


105

E040300AHM-EU

Starting the engine with a smartkey (if equipped)1. Carry the smart key or leave it inside

the vehicle.2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly

applied3. Place the transmission shift lever in P

(Park).4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP but-

ton while depressing the brake pedal.5. In extremely cold weather (below -

18°C/0°F) or after the vehicle has notbeen operated for several days, let theengine warm up without depressingthe accelerator.

Whether the engine is cold or warm, itshould be started without depressing theaccelerator.

• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle,if it is far away from you, the enginemay not start.

• When the ENGINE START/STOP but-ton is in the ACC position or above, ifany door is opened, the system checksfor the smart key. If the smart key is notin the vehicle, the "KEY OUT" indicatorwill blink or the warning "Key is not invehicle" will illuminate on the LCD dis-play. And if all doors are closed, thechime will sound for 5 seconds. Theindicator or warning will turn off whilethe vehicle is moving. Always have thesmart key with you.

WARNINGThe engine will start, only when thesmart key is in the vehicle.Never allow children or any personwho is unfamiliar with the vehicletouch the ENGINE START/STOPbutton or related parts.

CAUTIONIf the engine stalls while the vehicleis in motion, do not attempt to movethe shift lever to the P (Park) posi-tion. If the traffic and road condi-tions permit, you may put the shiftlever in the N (Neutral) positionwhile the vehicle is still moving andpress the ENGINE START/STOPbutton in an attempt to restart theengine.

OHM058033

5 11


✽✽ NOTICE• If the battery is weak or the smart key

does not work correctly, you can startthe engine by inserting the smart keyin the smart key holder. When youpull out the smart key from the smartkey holder, press the smart key andpull it out.

(Continued)

(Continued)• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you

can't start the engine normally.Replace the fuse with a new one. If itis not possible, you can start theengine by pressing the ENGINESTART/STOP button for 10 secondswhile it is in the ACC position. Theengine can start without depressingthe brake pedal. But for your safetyalways depress the brake pedal beforestarting the engine.

CAUTIONDo not press the ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 10 sec-onds except when the stop lampfuse is blown.

OHM058002


125

E060000AUN-EU

E060100AHM-EU

Automatic transmission operationThe automatic transmission has 5 (or 6)forward speeds and one reverse speed.The individual speeds are selected auto-matically, depending on the position ofthe shift lever.

✽✽ NOTICEThe first few shifts on a new vehicle, ifthe battery has been disconnected, maybe somewhat abrupt. This is a normalcondition, and the shifting sequence willadjust after shifts are cycled a few timesby the TCM (Transmission ControlModule) or PCM (Powertrain ControlModule).

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

OHM058004L

Depress the brake pedal when shifting.

The shift lever can be shifted freely.

+ (Up)

- (Down)

5 13


For smooth operation, depress the brakepedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to aforward or reverse gear.

E060101AHM

Transmission rangesThe indicator in the instrument clusterdisplays the shift lever position when theignition switch is in the ON position.

P (Park)Always come to a complete stop beforeshifting into P (Park). This position locksthe transmission and prevents the drivewheels from rotating.

WARNING - Automatictransmission

• Always check the surroundingareas near your vehicle for peo-ple, especially children, beforeshifting the shift lever into D(Drive) or R (Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver’s seat,always make sure the shift leveris in the P (Park) position; thenset the parking brake fully andshut the engine off. Unexpectedand sudden vehicle movementcan occur if these precautionsare not followed in the order iden-tified.

CAUTION• To avoid damage to your trans-

mission, do not accelerate theengine in R (Reverse) or any for-ward gear position with thebrakes on.

• When stopped on an incline, donot hold the vehicle with theengine power. Use the servicebrake or the parking brake.

• Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P(Park) into D (Drive), or R(Reverse) when the engine isabove idle speed.

WARNING• Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion will cause thedrive wheels to lock which willcause you to lose control of thevehicle.

• Do not use the P (Park) positionin place of the parking brake.Always make sure the shift leveris latched in the P (Park) positionand set the parking brake fully.

• Never leave a child unattended ina vehicle.


145

R (Reverse)Use this position to drive the vehiclebackward.

N (Neutral)The wheels and transmission are notengaged. The vehicle will roll freely evenon the slightest incline unless the parkingbrake or service brakes are applied.

D (Drive)This is the normal forward driving posi-tion. The transmission will automaticallyshift through a 5 (or 6)-gear sequence,providing the best fuel economy andpower.

For extra power when passing anothervehicle or climbing grades, depress theaccelerator fully, at which time the trans-mission will automatically downshift tothe next lower gear.

✽✽ NOTICEAlways come to a complete stop beforeshifting into D (Driving).

Sports modeWhether the vehicle is stopped or inmotion, sports mode is selected by push-ing the shift lever from the D (Drive) posi-tion into the manual gate. To return to theD (Drive) range operation, push the shiftlever back into the main gate.

In sports mode, moving the shift leverbackwards and forwards will allow you tomake gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to amanual transmission, the sports modeallows gearshifts with the acceleratorpedal depressed.Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to

shift up one gear.Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once

to shift down one gear.

CAUTIONThe transmission may be damagedif you shift into P (Park) while thevehicle is in motion.

CAUTIONAlways come to a complete stopbefore shifting into or out of R(Reverse); you may damage thetransmission if you shift into R(Reverse) while the vehicle is inmotion, except when “Rocking thevehicle” explained in this section.

OHM058005L

+ (UP)

- (DOWN)

Sportsmode

5 15


✽✽ NOTICE• In sports mode, the driver must exe-

cute upshifts in accordance with roadconditions. Be cautious to keep theengine speed below the red zone.

• In sports mode, only the 5 (or 6) for-ward gears can be selected. To reverseor park the vehicle, move the shiftlever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park)position as required.

• In sports mode, downshifts are madeautomatically when the vehicle slowsdown. When the vehicle stops, 1st gearis automatically selected.

• In sports mode, when the engine rpmapproaches the red zone, shift pointsare varied to upshift automatically.

• To maintain the required levels ofvehicle performance and safety, thesystem may not execute certaingearshifts when the shift lever is oper-ated.

• When driving on a slippery road,push the shift lever forward into the+(up) position. This causes the trans-mission to shift into the 2nd (or 3rd)gear which is better for smooth driv-ing on a slippery road. Push the shiftlever to the -(down) side to shift backto the 1st gear.

E060102AHM

Shift lock system (if equipped)For your safety, the automatic transmis-sion has a shift lock system which pre-vents shifting the transmission from P(Park) or N (Neutral) into R (Reverse)unless the brake pedal is depressed.To shift the transmission from P (Park) orN (Neutral) into R (Reverse):1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.2. Start the engine or turn the ignition

switch to the ON position.3. Move the shift lever.If the brake pedal is repeatedlydepressed and released with the shiftlever in the P (Park) position, a chatteringnoise near the shift lever may be heard. Itis a normal condition.

Shift-lock overrideIf the shift lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) or N (Neutral) position intothe R (Reverse) position even though thebrake pedal is depressed, continuedepressing the brake pedal, then do thefollowing:1. Carefully remove the cap covering the

shift-lock access hole.2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the

access hole and press down on thekey (or screwdriver).

3. Move the shift lever.4. Have your vehicle inspected by an

authorized KIA dealer immediately.

WARNINGAlways fully depress the brakepedal before and while shifting outof the P (Park) position into anoth-er position to avoid inadvertentmotion of the vehicle which couldinjure persons in or around thevehicle.

OHM058006N


165

E060103AHM

Ignition key interlock system The ignition key cannot be removedunless the shift lever is in the P (Park)position. If the shift lever is in any otherposition, the key cannot be removed.

E060200AHM

Good driving practices• Never move the gear shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other posi-tion with the accelerator pedaldepressed.

• Never move the gear shift lever into P(Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

• Be sure the vehicle is completelystopped before you attempt to shift intoR (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Never take the vehicle out of gear andcoast down a hill. This may beextremely hazardous. Always leave thecar in gear when moving.

• Do not "ride" the brakes. This cancause them to overheat and malfunc-tion. Instead, when you are drivingdown a long hill, slow down and shift toa lower gear. When you do this, enginebraking will help slow down the car.

• Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. Otherwise, the lower gear maynot be engaged.

• Always use the parking brake. Do notdepend on placing the transmission inP (Park) to keep the vehicle from mov-ing.

• Exercise extreme caution when drivingon a slippery surface. Be especiallycareful when braking, accelerating orshifting gears. On a slippery surface,an abrupt change in vehicle speed cancause the drive wheels to lose tractionand the vehicle to go out of control.

• Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothlydepressing and releasing the accelera-tor pedal.

5 17


E060203AHM

Moving up a steep grade from a stand-ing startTo move up a steep grade from a stand-ing start, depress the brake pedal, shiftthe shift lever to D (Drive). Select theappropriate gear depending on loadweight and steepness of the grade, andrelease the parking brake. Depress theaccelerator gradually while releasing theservice brakes.

WARNING• Always buckle-up! In a collision,

an unbelted occupant is signifi-cantly more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed than a properlybelted occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when corner-ing or turning.

• Do not make quick steeringwheel movements, such as sharplane changes or fast, sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatlyincreased if you lose control ofyour vehicle at highway speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs iftwo or more wheels drop off theroadway and the driver over-steers to reenter the roadway.

• In the event your vehicle leavesthe roadway, do not steer sharply.Instead, slow down before pullingback into the travel lanes.

• Never exceed posted speed lim-its.

WARNINGIf your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then youmay attempt to rock the vehicle freeby moving it forward and backward.Do not attempt this procedure ifpeople or objects are anywherenear the vehicle. During the rockingoperation the vehicle may suddenlymove forward of backward as itbecomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people orobjects.


185

E170000AHM

Engine power can be delivered to all frontand rear wheels for maximum traction.4WD is useful when extra traction isrequired on road, such as, when drivingon slippery, muddy, wet, or snow-coveredroads. These vehicles are not designedfor challenging off-road use. Occasionaloff-road use such as establishedunpaved roads and trails are OK. It isalways important when traveling off-high-way that the driver carefully reduces thespeed to a level that does not exceed thesafe operating speed for those condi-tions. In general, off-road conditions pro-vide less traction and braking effective-ness than normal road conditions. Thedriver must be especially alert to avoiddriving on slopes which tilt the vehicle toeither side.These factors must be carefully consid-ered when driving off-road. Keeping thevehicle in contact with the driving surfaceand under control in these conditions isalways the driver's responsibility for thesafety of him/herself and his or her pas-sengers.

E170201AHM

Tight corner brake effect

Tight corner brake effect is a uniquecharacteristic of four-wheel drive vehiclescaused by the difference in tire rotation ofthe four wheels and the zero-degreealignment of the front wheels and sus-pension.Sharp turns at low speeds should be car-ried out with caution.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING - Off road drivingThis vehicle is designed primarilyfor on road use although it canoperate effectively off road.However, it was not designed todrive in challenging off-road condi-tions. Driving in conditions thatexceed the vehicle's intendeddesign or the driver's experiencelevel may result in severe injury ordeath.

CAUTION - 4WDWhen turning sharply on a pavedroad at low speed while in four-wheel drive (4L mode for full-time4WD operation or 4L/4H mode forpart-time 4WD operation), steeringcontrol will be difficult.

CAUTION• Do not select four wheel drive on

flat and normal roads.• Four-wheel driving on flat roads

for a long period causes poor fueleconomy and noise and it alsocauses tires to wear faster.

• Four-wheel driving on flat andnormal roads can result in asevere binding and chatteringcondition when turning the steer-ing wheel.

• Four-wheel driving on flat roadsfor a long period can also causethe differential oil temperature toincrease, resulting in damage toparts in the power train.

5 19


Transfer mode Shift knob Indicator light Description

This mode is used when driving on normal roads and highway.

This mode is used when driving on slippery roads such assnowy and rainy roads at normal speed.

Maximum speed: 80 km/h (50 mph)

This mode is used when increased traction is required, such asclimbing or descending hills, driving off-roads, and towing avehicle.


44WWDDHHII

4WDHI

4WDLOW

44WWDDLLOOWW2H

(Rear-wheel drive)

4H (High-speed

4-wheel drive)

4L(Low-speed

4-wheel drive)

(not illuminated)

✽✽ NOTICE4WD transfer has a time delay for a few seconds until the actual shift is made after turning the transfer shift knob. When the 4WD transfer mode is shifted, it may cause mechanical noise. It is not a mechanical failure but a normal condition.

E170800AHM-EU

Part-Time 4WD (if equipped)

CAUTION When you stop the vehicle to transfer the shift knob, wait until the corresponding indicator light turns on or off todepart. If the vehicle moves before the transfer is completed, the vehicle may be damaged.

(illuminated)

(illuminated)


205

E170802AHM-EU

Part-time 4WD knob operation2H ↔↔ 4HTurn the transfer knob from the 2H modeto 4H mode or 4H mode to 2H mode atthe speed below 50 mph (80 km/h). It isnot necessary to put the shift lever intothe N (Neutral) position. Perform thisoperation when driving straight. Therewill be a few seconds of time delaybefore shifting into the desired mode.If the weather is extremely cold (-15°C/5°F) and the engine is not heated, trans-fer from 2H mode to 4H mode when thevehicle is stopped or at low speed.

4H ↔↔ 4L1. Stop the vehicle.2. Put the shift lever into the N (Neutral)

position.3. Turn the transfer knob to the 4H or 4L

position.4. Before shifting to other ranges from

the N (Neutral) position, wait for thecorresponding indicator light to turn onor off in the cluster.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the mode is not shifted like the previ-ous instructions, it will not transfer intothe selected mode and the correspon-ding indicator light will continuouslyblink.

OHM058010N OHM058011

CAUTION - 4WD• Always check the 4WD shift knob

and cluster to see if the systemhas been activated unintentional-ly.

• Do not speed over 80 km/h (50mph) in the 4H mode and 40 km/h(25 mph) in the 4L mode.

5 21


Transfer mode Shift knob Indicator light Description

This mode is used when driving on normal roads and highway.The engine power is distributed to all four wheels automatical-ly without the driver's intervention in accordance with the roadconditions and driving conditions.

This mode is used when driving on slippery roads, such assnowy and rainy roads at normal speed.


This mode is used when increased traction is required, such asclimbing or descending hills, driving off-roads, and towing avehicle.


44WWDDHHII

4WDHI

4WDLOW

44WWDDLLOOWW

AUTO(Automatic

4-wheel drive)

4H (High-speed

4-wheel drive)

4L(Low-speed

4-wheel drive)

(not illuminated)

✽✽ NOTICE4WD transfer has a time delay for a few seconds until the actual shift is made after turning the transfer shift knob. When the 4WD transfer mode is shifted, it may cause mechanical noise. It is not a mechanical failure but a normal condition.

E170900AHM-EU

Full-Time 4WD Operation (if equipped)

CAUTION When you stop the vehicle to transfer the shift knob, wait until the corresponding indicator light turns on or off todepart. If the vehicle moves before the transfer is completed, the vehicle may be damaged.

(illuminated)

(illuminated)


225

E170902AHM-EU

Full-time 4WD knob operationAUTO ↔↔ 4HTurn the transfer knob from the AUTOmode to 4H mode or 4H mode to AUTOmode at the speed below 80 km/h (50mph). It is not necessary to put the shiftlever into the N (Neutral) position.Perform this operation when drivingstraight. There will be a few seconds oftime delay before shifting into the desiredmode.If the weather is extremely cold (-15°C/5°F) and the engine is not heated, trans-fer from AUTO mode to 4H mode whenthe vehicle is stopped or at low speed.

4H ↔↔ 4L1. Stop the vehicle.2. Put the shift lever into the N (Neutral)

position.3. Turn the transfer knob to the 4H or 4L

position.4. Before shifting to other ranges from

the N (Neutral) position, wait for thecorresponding indicator light to turn onor off in the cluster.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the mode is not shifted like the previ-ous instructions, it will not transfer intothe selected mode and the correspon-ding indicator light will continuouslyblink.

OHM058012N OHM058013

CAUTION - Mud or snow• Always check the 4WD shift knob

and cluster to see if the systemhas been activated unintentional-ly.

• Do not speed over 80 km/h (50mph) in the 4H mode and 40 km/h(25 mph) in the 4L mode.

5 23


E170300AHM-EC

For safe four-wheel drive opera-tion

• Do not try to drive in deep standingwater or mud since such conditionscan stall your engine and clog yourexhaust pipes. Do not drive downsteep hills since it requires extremeskill to maintain control of the vehicle.

• When you are driving up or down hillsdrive as straight as possible. Useextreme caution in going up or downsteep hills, since you may flip yourvehicle over depending on the grade,terrain and water/mud conditions.

WARNING - HillsDriving across the contour of steephills can be extremely dangerous.This danger can come from slightchanges in the wheel angle whichcan destabilize the vehicle or, evenif the vehicle is maintaining stabili-ty under power, it can lose that sta-bility if the vehicle stops its forwardmotion. Your vehicle may roll overwithout warning and without timefor you to correct a mistake thatcould cause serious injury ordeath.

HILL1 HILL2

WARNING - Four-wheeldriving

The conditions of on-road or off-road that demand four-wheel drivemean all functions of your vehicleare exposed to extreme stress thanunder normal road conditions. Slowdown and be ready for changes inthe composition and traction of thesurface under your tires. If youhave any doubt about the safety ofthe conditions you are facing, stopand consider the best way to pro-ceed. Do not exceed the ability ofyourself or your vehicle to operatesafely.


245

• You must consciously take the effort tolearn how to corner in a 4WD vehicle.Do not rely on your experience in con-ventional 2WD vehicles in choosingsafe cornering speed in 4WD mode.For starters, you must drive more slow-ly in 4WD.

• Drive carefully off-road because yourvehicle may be damaged by rocks orroots of trees. Become familiar with theoff-road conditions where you aregoing to drive before you begin driving.

• Always hold the steering wheel firmlywhen you are driving off-road.

• Make sure all passengers are wearingseat belts.

• If you need to drive in the water, stopyour vehicle, set your transfer to the 4Lmode and drive at less than 5 mph (8km/h).

WARNING - Steeringwheel

Do not grab the inside of the steer-ing wheel when you are driving off-road. You may hurt your arm by asudden steering maneuver or fromsteering wheel rebound due toimpact with objects on the ground.You could lose control of the steer-ing wheel.

WARNING - Wind dangerIf you are driving in heavy wind, thevehicle's higher center of gravitydecreases your steering controlcapacity and requires you to drivemore slowly.

WARNING - Drivingthrough water

Drive slowly. If you are driving toofast in water, the water can get intothe engine compartment and wetthe ignition system, causing yourvehicle to suddenly stop. If thishappens and your vehicle is in atilted position, your vehicle may rollover.

OHM058102

WARNING - 4WDReduce speed when you turn cor-ners. The center of gravity of 4WDvehicles is higher than that of con-ventional 2WD vehicles, makingthem more likely to roll over whenyou turn corners too fast.

5 25


✽✽ NOTICE• Do not drive in water if the level is

higher than the bottom of the vehicle.• Check your brake condition once you

are out of mud or water. Press thebrake pedal several times as you moveslowly until you feel normal brakingforces return.

• Shorten your scheduled maintenanceinterval if you drive in off-road condi-tions such as sand, mud or water.Always wash your vehicle thoroughlyafter off road use, especially cleaningthe bottom of the vehicle.

• Since the driving torque is alwaysapplied to the 4 wheels the perform-ance of the 4WD vehicle is greatlyaffected by the condition of the tires.Be sure to equip the vehicle with fourtires of the same size and type.

• A full time four wheel drive vehiclecannot be towed by an ordinary towtruck. Make sure that the vehicle isplaced on a flat bed truck for moving.

E170800AHM

Reducing the risk of a rolloverThis multi-purpose passenger vehicle isdefined as a Sports Utility Vehicle (SUV).SUV’s have higher ground clearance anda narrower track to make them capableof performing in a wide variety of off-roadapplications. Specific design characteris-tics give them a higher center of gravitythan ordinary vehicles. An advantage ofthe higher ground clearance is a betterview of the road, which allows you toanticipate problems. They are notdesigned for cornering at the samespeeds as conventional passenger vehi-cles, any more than low-slung sportsvehicles are designed to perform satis-factorily in off-road conditions. Due to thisrisk, driver and passengers are stronglyrecommended to buckle their seat belts.In a rollover crash, an unbelted person ismore likely to die than a person wearinga seat belt. There are steps that a drivercan make to reduce the risk of a rollover.If at all possible, avoid sharp turns orabrupt maneuvers, do not load your roofrack with heavy cargo, and never modifyyour vehicle in any way.

CAUTION - Mud or snowIf one of the front or rear wheelsbegins to spin in mud, snow, etc.the vehicle can sometimes be driv-en out by depressing the accelera-tor pedal further; however avoidrunning the engine continuously athigh rpm because doing so coulddamage the 4WD system.


265

E170600AHM E170700AHM

• Full-time 4WD vehicles must be testedon a special four wheel chassisdynamometer.Part-time 4WD vehicles must be testedon a 2WD roll tester with the transfershift knob in the 2H position.

✽✽ NOTICENever engage the parking brake whileperforming these tests.

• A full-time 4WD vehicle should not betested on a 2WD roll tester. If a 2WDroll tester must be used, perform thefollowing:

WARNING - Jacked vehicleWhile the full-time 4WD vehicle isbeing raised on a jack, never startthe engine or cause the tires torotate.There is the danger that rotatingtires touching the ground couldcause the vehicle to go off the jackand to jump forward.

WARNINGYour vehicle is equipped with tiresdesigned to provide safe ride andhandling capability. Do not use asize and type of tire and wheel thatis different from the one that isoriginally installed on your vehicle.It can affect the safety and perform-ance of your vehicle, which couldlead to steering failure or rolloverand serious injury. When replacingthe tires, be sure to equip all fourtires with the tire and wheel of thesame size, type, tread, brand andload-carrying capacity. If you never-theless decide to equip your vehi-cle with any tire/wheel combinationnot recommended by KIA for offroad driving, you should not usethese tires for highway driving.

WARNING - Rollover As with other Sports Utility Vehicle(SUV), failure to operate this vehi-cle correctly may result in loss ofcontrol, an accident or vehiclerollover.• Utility vehicles have a significant-

ly higher rollover rate than othertypes of vehicles.

• Specific design characteristics(higher ground clearance, nar-rower track, etc.) give this vehiclea higher center of gravity thanordinary vehicles.

• A SUV is not designed for corner-ing at the same speeds as con-ventional vehicles.

• Avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

• In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly more like-ly to die than a person wearing aseat belt. Make sure everyone inthe vehicle is properly buckledup.

5 27


1. Check the tire pressures recommend-ed for your vehicle.

2. Place the rear wheels on the roll testerfor a speedometer test as shown in theillustration.

3. Release the parking brake.4. Place the front wheels on the tempo-

rary free roller as shown in the illustra-tion.

E070100AHM

Power brakesYour vehicle has power-assisted brakesthat adjust automatically through normalusage.In the event that the power-assistedbrakes lose power because of a stalledengine or some other reason, you canstill stop your vehicle by applying greaterforce to the brake pedal than you nor-mally would. The stopping distance, how-ever, will be longer.When the engine is not running, thereserve brake power is partially depletedeach time the brake pedal is applied. Donot pump the brake pedal when thepower assist has been interrupted.Pump the brake pedal only when neces-sary to maintain steering control on slip-pery surfaces.

WARNING - Brakes• Do not drive with your foot rest-

ing on the brake pedal. This willcreate abnormal high brake tem-peratures, excessive brake liningand pad wear, and increasedstopping distances.

• When descending a long or steephill, shift to a lower gear andavoid continuous application ofthe brakes. Continuous brakeapplication will cause the brakesto overheat and could result in atemporary loss of braking per-formance.

• Wet brakes may impair the vehi-cle’s ability to safely slow down;the vehicle may also pull to oneside when the brakes are applied.Applying the brakes lightly willindicate whether they have beenaffected in this way. Always testyour brakes in this fashion afterdriving through deep water. Todry the brakes, apply them lightlywhile maintaining a safe forwardspeed until brake performancereturns to normal.

WARNING - Dynamometertesting

Keep away from the front of the vehi-cle while the vehicle is in gear on thedynamometer. This is very danger-ous as the vehicle can jump forwardand cause serious injury or death.

OHM058020Roll tester (speedometer)

Temporary free roller

BRAKE SYSTEM


285

E070101AUN

In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate while thevehicle is in motion, you can make anemergency stop with the parking brake.The stopping distance, however, will bemuch greater than normal.

E070102AHM

Disc brakes wear indicatorWhen your brake pads are worn and newpads are required, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your frontbrakes or rear brakes. You may hear thissound come and go or it may occurwhenever you depress the brake pedal.Please remember that some driving con-ditions or climates may cause a brakesqueal when you first apply (or lightlyapply) the brakes. This is normal anddoes not indicate a problem with yourbrakes. Parking brake

E070201AHM

Applying the parking brakeTo engage the parking brake, first applythe foot brake and then depress the park-ing brake pedal down as far as possible.In addition it is recommended that whenparking the vehicle on an incline, the shiftlever should be in the P (Park) position.

WARNING - Brake wearThis brake wear warning soundmeans your vehicle needs service.If you ignore this audible warning,you will eventually lose brakingperformance, which could lead to aserious accident.

CAUTION• To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with wornbrake pads.

• Always replace the front or rearbrake pads as pairs.

CAUTIONDriving with the parking brakeapplied will cause excessive brakepad and brake rotor wear.

OHM058021

WARNING - Parking brakeApplying the parking brake whilethe vehicle is moving at normalspeeds can cause a sudden loss ofcontrol of the vehicle. If you mustuse the parking brake to stop thevehicle, use great caution in apply-ing the brake.

5 29


E070202AHM

Releasing the parking brakeTo release the parking brake, depressthe parking brake pedal a second timewhile applying the foot brake. The pedalwill automatically extend to the fullyreleased position. If the parking brakepedal does not release or does notrelease all the way, have the systemchecked by an authorized KIA dealer.

Check the brake warning light by turningthe ignition switch ON (do not start theengine). This light will be illuminated whenthe parking brake is applied with the igni-tion switch in the START or ON position.Before driving, be sure the parking brakeis fully released and the brake warninglight is off.If the brake warning light remains on afterthe parking brake is released while theengine is running, there may be a mal-function in the brake system. Immediateattention is necessary.If at all possible, cease driving the vehi-cle immediately. If that is not possible,use extreme caution while operating thevehicle and only continue to drive thevehicle until you can reach a safe loca-tion or repair shop.

WARNING• To prevent unintentional move-

ment when stopped and leavingthe vehicle, do not use the shiftlever in place of the parkingbrake. Set the parking brake ANDmake sure the shift lever issecurely positioned in P (Park).

• Never allow anyone who is unfa-miliar with the vehicle to touchthe parking brake. If the parkingbrake is released unintentionally,serious injury may occur.

• All vehicles should always havethe parking brake fully engagedwhen parking to avoid inadver-tent movement of the vehiclewhich can injure occupants orpedestrians.

OHM058022 W-75


305

E070300AHM-EC

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)The ABS continuously senses the speedof the wheels. If the wheels are going tolock, the ABS system repeatedly modu-lates the hydraulic brake pressure to thewheels.When you apply your brakes under con-ditions which may lock the wheels, youmay hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from thebrakes, or feel a corresponding sensationin the brake pedal. This is normal and itmeans your ABS is active.In order to obtain the maximum benefitfrom your ABS in an emergency situa-tion, do not attempt to modulate yourbrake pressure and do not try to pumpyour brakes. Press your brake pedal ashard as possible or as hard as the situa-tion allows the ABS to control the forcebeing delivered to the brakes.

WARNINGABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-dents due to improper or danger-ous driving maneuvers. Eventhough vehicle control is improvedduring emergency braking, alwaysmaintain a safe distance betweenyou and objects ahead. Vehiclespeeds should always be reducedduring extreme road conditions.The braking distance for vehiclesequipped with an anti-lock brakingsystem (or Electronic StabilityControl System) may be longerthan for those without it in the fol-lowing road conditions.During these conditions the vehicleshould be driven at reducedspeeds:• Rough, gravel or snow-covered

roads.(Continued)

(Continued)• On roads where the road surface

is pitted or has different surfaceheight.

The safety features of an ABS (orESC) equipped vehicle should notbe tested by high speed driving orcornering. This could endanger thesafety of yourself or others.

5 31


✽✽ NOTICEA click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the vehiclebegins to move after the engine is start-ed. These conditions are normal andindicate that the anti-lock brake systemis functioning properly.

• Even with the anti-lock brake system,your vehicle still requires sufficientstopping distance. Always maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in frontof you.

• Always slow down when cornering.The anti-lock brake system cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from exces-sive speeds.

• On loose or uneven road surfaces,operation of the anti-lock brake systemmay result in a longer stopping dis-tance than for vehicles equipped with aconventional brake system.

✽✽ NOTICEWhen you jump start your vehiclebecause of a drained battery, the enginemay not run as smoothly and the ABSwarning light may turn on at the sametime. This happens because of low bat-tery voltage. It does not mean your ABSis malfunctioned.• Do not pump your brakes!• Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

W-78

CAUTION• If the ABS warning light is on and

stays on, you may have a problemwith the ABS. In this case, howev-er, your regular brakes will worknormally.

• The ABS warning light will stay onfor approximately 3 seconds afterthe ignition switch is ON. Duringthat time, the ABS will go throughself-diagnosis and the light will gooff if everything is normal. If thelight stays on, you may have aproblem with your ABS. Contactan authorized KIA dealer as soonas possible.

CAUTION• When you drive on a road having

poor traction, such as an icy road,and have operated your brakescontinuously, the ABS will beactive continuously and the ABSwarning light may illuminate. Pullyour car over to a safe place andstop the engine.

• Restart the engine. If the ABSwarning light goes off, then yourABS system is normal.Otherwise, you may have a prob-lem with the ABS. Contact anauthorized KIA dealer as soon aspossible.


325

E070500AHM-EU

Electronic stability control (ESC)The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system is designed to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering maneuvers. ESC checkswhere you are steering and where thevehicle is actually going. ESC applies thebrakes on individual wheels andintervenes in the engine managementsystem to stabilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system is an electronic system designedto help the driver maintain vehicle controlunder adverse conditions. It is not asubstitute for safe driving practices.Factors including speed, road conditionsand driver steering input can all affectwhether ESC will be effective inpreventing a loss of control. It is still yourresponsibility to drive and corner atreasonable speeds and to leave asufficient margin of safety.When you apply your brakes under con-ditions which may lock the wheels, youmay hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from thebrakes, or feel a corresponding sensationin the brake pedal. This is normal and itmeans your ESC is active.

✽✽ NOTICEA click sound may be heard in theengine compartment when the vehiclebegins to move after the engine is start-ed. These conditions are normal andindicate that the Electronic StabilityControl System is functioning properly.

OHM058023N

WARNINGNever drive too fast according tothe road conditions or too quicklywhen cornering. Electronic stabilitycontrol (ESC) will not prevent acci-dents. Excessive speed in turns,abrupt maneuvers and hydroplan-ing on wet surfaces can still resultin serious accidents. Only a safeand attentive driver can preventaccidents by avoiding maneuversthat cause the vehicle to lose trac-tion. Even with ESC installed,always follow all the normal precau-tions for driving - including drivingat safe speeds for the conditions.

5 33


E070501AUN-EU

ESC operationESC ON condition

• When the ignition is turnedON, ESC and ESC OFF indi-cator lights illuminate forapproximately 3 seconds,then ESC is turned on.

• Press the ESC OFF buttonfor at least half a second afterturning the ignition ON to turnESC off. (ESC OFF indicatorwill illuminate). To turn theESC on, press the ESC OFFbutton (ESC OFF indicatorlight will go off).

• When starting the engine,you may hear a slight tickingsound. This is the ESC per-forming an automatic systemself-check and does not indi-cate a problem.

When operatingWhen the ESC is in operation,ESC indicator light blinks.• When the Electronic Stability

Control is operating properly,you can feel a slight pulsationin the vehicle. This is only theeffect of brake control andindicates nothing unusual.

• When moving out of the mudor slippery road, pressing theaccelerator pedal may notcause the engine rpm (revo-lutions per minute) toincrease.

E070502AUN-EU

ESC operation offESC OFF state

• To cancel ESC operation,press the ESC OFF button(ESC OFF indicator light illu-minates).

• If the ignition switch is turnedto LOCK position when ESCis off, ESC remains off. Uponrestarting the engine, theESC will automatically turnon again.

-

ESCESCOFF


345

E070503AEN-EU

Indicator lightWhen the ignition switch is turned ON,the indicator light illuminates, then goesoff if ESC system is operating normally.The ESC indicator light blinks wheneverESC is operating.The ESC OFF indicator light comes onwhen either the ESC is turned off withthe button, or ESC fails to operate whenturned on.

E070504AEN-EU

ESC OFF usageWhen driving• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC turned

on for daily driving whenever possible.• To turn ESC off while driving, press the

ESC OFF button while driving on a flatroad surface.

Never press the ESC OFF button whileESC is operating (ESC indicator lightblinks).If ESC is turned off while ESC is operat-ing, the vehicle may slip out of control.

✽✽ NOTICE• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, ensure that the ESC isturned off (ESC OFF light illuminat-ed). If the ESC is left on, it may pre-vent the vehicle speed from increas-ing, and result in false diagnosis.

• Turning the ESC off does not affectABS or brake system operation.

ESC

ESCOFF

■ ESC indicator light (blinks)

■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

CAUTIONDriving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the ESC system tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are the same size asyour original tires.

WARNINGThe Electronic Stability Control sys-tem is only a driving aid; use pre-cautions for safe driving by slowingdown on curved, snowy, or icyroads. Drive slowly and don’tattempt to accelerate whenever theESC indicator light is blinking, orwhen the road surface is slippery.

5 35


E070505AHM-EU

Hill-start assist control (HAC) (if equipped) A vehicle has the tendency to slip backon a steep hill when it starts to go afterstopping. The Hill-start Assist Control(HAC) prevents the vehicle from slippingback by operating the brakes automati-cally for about 2 seconds. The brakes arereleased when the accelerator pedal isdepressed or after about 2 seconds.

✽✽ NOTICE• The HAC does not operate when the

transmission shift lever is in the P(Park) or N (Neutral) position.

• The HAC activates even though theESC is off but it does not activatewhen the ESC has malfunctioned.

WARNINGNever press the ESC OFF buttonwhile ESC is operating.If the ESC is turned off while ESC isoperating, the vehicle may go out ofcontrol.To turn ESC off while driving, pressthe ESC OFF button while drivingon a flat road surface.

WARNINGThe HAC is activated only for about2 seconds, so when the vehicle isstarting off always depress theaccelerator pedal.


365

E070506AHM-EU

Downhill brake control (DBC) (if equipped)The Downhill Brake Control (DBC) sup-ports the driver come down a steep hillwithout the driver depressing the brakepedal. It slows down the vehicle under 8km/h (5 mph) and lets the driver concen-trate on steering the vehicle.

Standby

Press the DBC button when the vehicle speedis under 40 km/h (25 mph). The DBC systemwill turn ON and enter the standby mode.The system does not turn ON if the vehiclespeed is over 40km/h (25 mph).

In the standby mode, if the vehicle speed isunder 35 km/h (22 mph) while driving down asteep hill, the DBC will activate automatically.

In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarilydeactivate under the following conditions:• The hill is not steep enough.• The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.If the above conditions are gone, the DBC willautomatically activate again.

The DBC will turn OFF under the following con-ditions:• The DBC button is pressed again.• The vehicle speed is over 60 km/h (38 mph).

Activated

Temporarilydeactivated

OFF

ModeIndicator light

DescriptionType A Type B

blinks yellow illuminated yellow

illuminated yellow

illuminated white

not illuminated

not illuminated

illuminated yellow

illuminated white

OHM058024N

5 37


✽✽ NOTICE• The DBC does not turn ON in the P

(Park) position.• The DBC may not activate if the ESC

(or BAS) is activated.• Noise or vibration may occur from the

brakes when the DBC is activated.• The rear stop light comes on when the

DBC is activated.• In a very steep hill even though the

brake pedal or accelerator pedal isdepressed the DBC may not deacti-vate.

• Always turn OFF the DBC on normalroads. The DBC might activate fromthe standby mode when abrupt corn-ing or driving through speed bumps.

E070600AHM

Good braking practices• Check to be sure the parking brake is

not engaged and the parking brakeindicator light is out before drivingaway.

• Driving through water may get thebrakes wet. They can also get wetwhen the vehicle is washed. Wetbrakes can be dangerous! Your vehiclewill not stop as quickly if the brakes arewet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicleto pull to one side.To dry the brakes, apply the brakeslightly until the braking action returns tonormal, taking care to keep the vehicleunder control at all times. If the brakingaction does not return to normal, stopas soon as it is safe to do so and callan authorized KIA dealer for assis-tance.

WARNINGIf the DBC red indicator light illumi-nates, the system has overheatedor something is wrong. The DBCwill not activate. If the DBC red indi-cator light illuminates even thoughthe DBC system has been cooledenough have the system checkedby an authorized KIA dealer.

WARNING• Whenever you leave or park your

vehicle, always set the parkingbrake as far as possible and fullyengage the vehicle's transmis-sion into the P (Park) position. Ifthe parking brake is not fullyengaged, the vehicle may moveinadvertently and injure yourselfand others.

• All vehicles should always havethe parking brake fully engagedwhen parking to avoid inadver-tent movement of the vehiclewhich can injure occupants orpedestrians.


385

• Don't coast down hills with the vehicleout of gear. This is extremely haz-ardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at alltimes, use the brakes to slow down,then shift to a lower gear so thatengine braking will help you maintain asafe speed.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Restingyour foot on the brake pedal while driv-ing can be dangerous because thebrakes might overheat and lose theireffectiveness. It also increases thewear of the brake components.

• If a tire goes flat while you are driving,apply the brakes gently and keep thevehicle pointed straight ahead whileyou slow down. When you are movingslowly enough for it to be safe to do so,pull off the road and stop in a safeplace.

• If your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transmission, don't let yourvehicle creep forward. To avoid creep-ing forward, keep your foot firmly onthe brake pedal when the vehicle isstopped.

• Be cautious when parking on a hill.Firmly engage the parking brake andplace the shift lever in P (Park). If yourvehicle is facing downhill, turn the frontwheels into the curb to help keep thevehicle from rolling. If your vehicle isfacing uphill, turn the front wheelsaway from the curb to help keep thevehicle from rolling. If there is no curbor if it is required by other conditions tokeep the vehicle from rolling, block thewheels.

• Under some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engaged posi-tion. This is most likely to happen whenthere is an accumulation of snow or icearound or near the rear brakes or if thebrakes are wet. If there is a risk that theparking brake may freeze, apply it onlytemporarily while you put the shift leverin P (Park) and block the rear wheels sothe vehicle cannot roll. Then releasethe parking brake.

• Do not hold the vehicle on the upgradewith the accelerator pedal. This cancause the transmission to overheat.Always use the brake pedal or parkingbrake.

5 39


E090000AHM-EU

The cruise control system allows you toprogram the vehicle to maintain a con-stant speed without pressing the acceler-ator pedal.This system is designed to functionabove approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

✽✽ NOTICEDuring normal cruise control operation,when the SET switch is activated orreactivated after applying the brakes,the cruise control will energize afterapproximately 3 seconds. The delay isnormal.

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

WARNING• If the cruise control is left on

(CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster illuminated),the cruise control can beswitched on accidentally. Keepthe cruise control system off(CRUISE indicator light OFF)when the cruise control is not inuse, to avoid inadvertently set-ting a speed.

• Use the cruise control systemonly when traveling on openhighways in good weather.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not use the cruise control

when it may not be safe to keepthe vehicle at a constant speed,for instance, driving in heavy orvarying traffic, or on slippery(rainy, icy or snow-covered) orwinding roads or over 6% up-hillor down-hill roads.

• Pay particular attention to thedriving conditions wheneverusing the cruise control system.

• Be careful when driving downhillusing the cruise control system,which may increase the vehiclespeed.


405

E090100AHM-EU

To set cruise control speed:1. Pull the CRUISE ON-OFF switch on

the steering wheel to turn the systemon. The CRUISE indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, whichmust be more than 40 km/h (25 mph).

3. Push the -/SET switch, and release it atthe desired speed. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument cluster will illumi-nate. Release the accelerator at thesame time. The desired speed will auto-matically be maintained.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slowdown or speed up slightly while goingdownhill.

E090200AHM-EU

To increase cruise control setspeed:Follow either of these procedures:• Push the RES/+ switch and hold it.Your

vehicle will accelerate. Release theswitch at the speed you want.

• Push the RES/+ switch and release itimmediately. The cruising speed willincrease by 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) eachtime the RES/+ switch is operated inthis manner.

OHM058043N OHM058046N OHM058044N

5 41


E090300AHM-EU

To decrease the cruising speed:Follow either of these procedures:• Push the -/SET switch and hold it. Your

vehicle will gradually slow down.Release the switch at the speed youwant to maintain.

• Push the -/SET switch and release itimmediately. The cruising speed willdecrease by 1.6 km/h (1.0 mph) eachtime the -/SET switch is operated inthis manner.

E090400AUN

To temporarily accelerate with thecruise control on:If you want to speed up temporarily whenthe cruise control is on, depress theaccelerator pedal. Increased speed willnot interfere with cruise control operationor change the set speed.To return to the set speed, take your footoff the accelerator.

E090500AHM-EU

To cancel cruise control, do oneof the following:• Press the brake pedal.• Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic

transmission.• Push the CANCEL switch located on

the steering wheel.• Decrease the vehicle speed lower than

the memory speed by 15 km/h (9mph).

• Decrease the vehicle speed to lessthan approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

OHM058046N OHM058045N


425

Each of these actions will cancel cruisecontrol operation (the SET indicator lightin the instrument cluster will go off), but itwill not turn the system off. If you wish toresume cruise control operation, pushthe RES/+ switch located on your steer-ing wheel. You will return to your previ-ously preset speed.

E090600AHM-EU

To resume cruising speed atmore than approximately 40 km/h(25 mph):If any method other than the CRUISEON-OFF switch was used to cancelcruising speed and the system is stillactivated, the most recent set speed willautomatically resume when the RES/+switch is pushed.It will not resume, however, if the vehiclespeed has dropped below approximately40 km/h (25 mph).

E090700AHM

To turn cruise control off, do oneof the following:• Pull the CRUISE ON-OFF switch (the

CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will go off).

• Turn the ignition off.Both of these actions will cancel thecruise control operation. If you want toresume the cruise control operation,repeat the steps provided in “To setcruise control speed” on the previouspage.OHM058044N

5 43


E100000AHM-EC

Your vehicle's fuel economy dependsmainly on your style of driving, where youdrive and when you drive.Each of these factors affects how manykilometers (miles) you can get from a liter(gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehicleas economically as possible, use the fol-lowing driving suggestions to help savemoney in both fuel and repairs:• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moder-

ate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" startsor full-throttle shifts and maintain asteady cruising speed. Don't racebetween stoplights. Try to adjust yourspeed to the traffic so you don't have tochange speeds unnecessarily. Avoidheavy traffic whenever possible.Always maintain a safe distance fromother vehicles so you can avoid unnec-essary braking. This also reducesbrake wear.

• Drive at a moderate speed. The fasteryou drive, the more fuel your vehicleuses. Driving at a moderate speed,especially on the highway, is one of themost effective ways to reduce fuel con-sumption.

• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This canincrease fuel consumption and alsoincrease wear on these components.In addition, driving with your foot rest-ing on the brake pedal may cause thebrakes to overheat, which reducestheir effectiveness and may lead tomore serious consequences.

• Take care of your tires. Keep theminflated to the recommended pressure.Incorrect inflation, either too much ortoo little, results in unnecessary tirewear. Check the tire pressures at leastonce a month.

• Be sure that the wheels are alignedcorrectly. Improper alignment canresult from hitting curbs or driving toofast over irregular surfaces. Poor align-ment causes faster tire wear and mayalso result in other problems as well asgreater fuel consumption.

• Keep your vehicle in good condition.For better fuel economy and reducedmaintenance costs, maintain your vehi-cle in accordance with the mainte-nance schedule in section 7. If youdrive your vehicle in severe conditions,more frequent maintenance is required(see section 7 for details).

• Keep your vehicle clean. For maximumservice, your vehicle should be keptclean and free of corrosive materials. Itis especially important that mud, dirt,ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulateon the underside of the vehicle. Thisextra weight can result in increasedfuel consumption and also contributeto corrosion.

• Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your vehicle. Weight reducesfuel economy.

• Don't let the engine idle longer thannecessary. If you are waiting (and notin traffic), turn off your engine andrestart only when you're ready to go.

ECONOMICAL OPERATION


445

• Remember, your vehicle does notrequire extended warm-up. After theengine has started, allow the engine torun for 10 to 20 seconds prior to plac-ing the vehicle in gear. In very coldweather, however, give your engine aslightly longer warm-up period.

• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.Lugging is driving too slowly in a veryhigh gear resulting in engine bucking. Ifthis happens, shift to a lower gear.Over-revving is racing the enginebeyond its safe limit. This can be avoid-ed by shifting at the recommendedspeed.

• Use your air conditioning sparingly.The air conditioning system is operat-ed by engine power so your fuel econ-omy is reduced when you use it.

• Open windows at high speeds canreduce fuel economy.

• Fuel economy is less in crosswindsand headwinds. To help offset some ofthis loss, slow down when driving inthese conditions.

Keeping a vehicle in good operating con-dition is important both for economy andsafety. Therefore, have an authorized KIAdealer perform scheduled inspectionsand maintenance.

WARNING - Engine off dur-ing motion

Never turn the engine off to coastdown hills or anytime the vehicle isin motion. The power steering andpower brakes will not functionproperly without the engine run-ning. Instead, keep the engine onand downshift to an appropriategear for engine braking effect. Inaddition, turning off the ignitionwhile driving could engage thesteering wheel lock resulting inloss of vehicle steering whichcould cause serious injury ordeath.

5 45


E110100AHM-EC

Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditions areencountered such as water, snow, ice,mud, sand, or similar hazards, followthese suggestions:• Drive cautiously and allow extra dis-

tance for braking.• Avoid sudden braking or steering.

• When braking with non-ABS brakespump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle isstopped.

• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, usesecond gear. Accelerate slowly toavoid spinning the drive wheels.

• Use sand, rock salt or other non-slipmaterial under the drive wheels to pro-vide traction when stalled in ice, snow,or mud.

E110200BHM-EU

Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to freeit from snow, sand, or mud, first turn thesteering wheel right and left to clear thearea around your driving wheels. Then,shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and any forward gear in vehiclesequipped with an automatic transmission.Do not race the engine, and spin thewheels as little as possible. If you are stillstuck after a few tries, have the vehiclepulled out by a tow vehicle to avoidengine overheating and possible damageto the transmission.

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

1VQA3002

WARNING - ABSDo not pump the brake pedal on avehicle equipped with ABS.

WARNING - DownshiftingDownshifting with an automatictransmission, while driving on slip-pery surfaces can cause an acci-dent. The sudden change in tirespeed could cause the tires to skid.Be careful when downshifting onslippery surfaces.

CAUTIONProlonged rocking may causeengine overheating, transmissiondamage or failure, and tire damage.


465

✽✽ NOTICEThe ESC system (if equipped) should beturned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle. E110300AUN

Smooth corneringAvoid braking or gear changing in cor-ners, especially when roads are wet.Ideally, corners should always be takenunder gentle acceleration. If you followthese suggestions, tire wear will be heldto a minimum.

E110400AUN

Driving at night Because night driving presents morehazards than driving in the daylight, hereare some important tips to remember:• Slow down and keep more distance

between you and other vehicles, as itmay be more difficult to see at night,especially in areas where there maynot be any street lights.

WARNING - Spinning tiresDo not spin the wheels, especiallyat speeds more than 56 km/h (35mph). Spinning the wheels at highspeeds when the vehicle is station-ary could cause a tire to overheatwhich could result in tire damagethat may injure bystanders.

OUN056051 OCM053010

WARNINGIf your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then youmay attempt to rock the vehicle freeby moving it forward and backward.Do not attempt this procedure ifpeople or objects are anywherenear the vehicle. During the rockingoperation the vehicle may suddenlymove forward of backward as itbecomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people orobjects.

5 47


• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glarefrom other driver's headlights.

• Keep your headlights clean and prop-erly aimed on vehicles not equippedwith the automatic headlight aimingfeature. Dirty or improperly aimedheadlights will make it much more diffi-cult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlightsof oncoming vehicles. You could betemporarily blinded, and it will takeseveral seconds for your eyes to read-just to the darkness.

E110500AUN

Driving in the rain Rain and wet roads can make drivingdangerous, especially if you’re not pre-pared for the slick pavement. Here are afew things to consider when driving in therain:• A heavy rainfall will make it harder to

see and will increase the distanceneeded to stop your vehicle, so slowdown.

• Keep your windshield wiping equip-ment in good shape. Replace yourwindshield wiper blades when theyshow signs of streaking or missingareas on the windshield.

• If your tires are not in good condition,making a quick stop on wet pavementcan cause a skid and possibly lead toan accident. Be sure your tires are ingood shape.

• Turn on your headlights to make it eas-ier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddlescan affect your brakes. If you must gothrough puddles, try to drive throughthem slowly.

• If you believe you may have gottenyour brakes wet, apply them lightlywhile driving until normal braking oper-ation returns.

E110600AUN

Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areasunless you are sure the water is no high-er than the bottom of the wheel hub.Drive through any water slowly. Allowadequate stopping distance becausebrake performance may be affected.After driving through water, dry thebrakes by gently applying them severaltimes while the vehicle is moving slowly.

1VQA3003


485

E110700AHM

Highway drivingTiresAdjust the tire inflation pressures tospecification. Low tire inflation pressureswill result in overheating and possiblefailure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires whichmay result in reduced traction or tire fail-ure.

✽✽ NOTICENever exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure shown on the tires.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine oilHigh speed travel consumes more fuelthan urban motoring. Do not forget tocheck both the engine coolant andengine oil.

Drive beltA loose or damaged drive belt may resultin overheating of the engine.

WARNING• Underinflated or overinflated

tires can cause poor handling,loss of vehicle control, and sud-den tire failure leading to acci-dents, injuries, and even death.Always check tires for properinflation before driving. For prop-er tire pressures, refer to “Tiresand wheels” in section 8.

• Driving on tires with no or insuffi-cient tread is dangerous. Worn-out tires can result in loss ofvehicle control, collisions, injury,and even death. Worn-out tiresshould be replaced as soon aspossible and should never beused for driving. Always checkthe tire tread before driving yourcar. For further information andtread limits, refer to “Tires andwheels” in section 7.

1VQA1004

5 49


WINTER DRIVING

E120000ASA

Severe weather conditions in the winterresult in greater wear and other prob-lems. To minimize the problems of winterdriving, you should follow these sugges-tions:

E120100AUN-EC

Snowy or icy conditionsTo drive your vehicle in deep snow, it maybe necessary to use snow tires. If snowtires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and type of theoriginal equipment tires. Failure to do somay adversely affect the safety and han-dling of your vehicle. Furthermore,speeding, rapid acceleration, suddenbrake applications, and sharp turns arepotentially very hazardous practices.During deceleration, use engine brakingto the fullest extent. Sudden brake appli-cations on snowy or icy roads may causeskids to occur. You need to keep suffi-cient distance between the vehicle inoperation in front and your vehicle. Also,apply the brake gently.

E120101AUN

Snow tires If you mount snow tires on your vehicle,make sure they are radial tires of thesame size and load range as the originaltires. Mount snow tires on all four wheelsto balance your vehicle’s handling in allweather conditions. Keep in mind that thetraction provided by snow tires on dryroads may not be as high as your vehi-cle's original equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roads areclear. Check with the tire dealer for max-imum speed recommendations.

Do not install studded tires without firstchecking local, state and municipal regu-lations for possible restrictions againsttheir use.

WARNING - Snow tire sizeSnow tires should be equivalent insize and type to the vehicle's stan-dard tires. Otherwise, the safetyand handling of your vehicle maybe adversely affected.

1VQA3005


505

E120200AUN

Use high quality ethylene glycolcoolantYour vehicle is delivered with high qualityethylene glycol coolant in the coolingsystem. It is the only type of coolant thatshould be used because it helps preventcorrosion in the cooling system, lubri-cates the water pump and preventsfreezing. Be sure to replace or replenishyour coolant in accordance with themaintenance schedule in section 7.Before winter, have your coolant tested toassure that its freezing point is sufficientfor the temperatures anticipated duringthe winter.

E120300AUN

Check battery and cablesWinter puts additional burdens on thebattery system. Visually inspect the bat-tery and cables as described in section7. The level of charge in your battery canbe checked by an authorized KIA dealeror a service station.

E120400BUN

Change to "winter weight" oil ifnecessaryIn some climates it is recommended thata lower viscosity "winter weight" oil beused during cold weather. See section 8for recommendations. If you aren't surewhat weight oil you should use, consultan authorized KIA dealer.

E120500AUN

Check spark plugs and ignitionsystemInspect your spark plugs as described insection 7 and replace them if necessary.Also check all ignition wiring and compo-nents to be sure they are not cracked,worn or damaged in any way.

E120600AUN

To keep locks from freezingTo keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine intothe key opening. If a lock is covered withice, squirt it with an approved de-icingfluid to remove the ice. If the lock isfrozen internally, you may be able to thawit out by using a heated key. Handle theheated key with care to avoid injury.

E120700AUN

Use approved window washeranti-freeze in systemTo keep the water in the window washersystem from freezing, add an approvedwindow washer anti-freeze solution inaccordance with instructions on the con-tainer. Window washer anti-freeze isavailable from an authorized KIA dealerand most auto parts outlets. Do not useengine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paintfinish.

5 51


E120800AHM

Don't let your parking brakefreezeUnder some conditions your parkingbrake can freeze in the engaged position.This is most likely to happen when thereis an accumulation of snow or ice aroundor near the rear brakes or if the brakesare wet. If there is a risk the parkingbrake may freeze, apply it only temporar-ily while you put the gear shift lever in P(Park) and block the rear wheels so thevehicle cannot roll. Then release theparking brake.

E120900AHM

Don't let ice and snow accumu-late underneathUnder some conditions, snow and icecan build up under the fenders and inter-fere with the steering. When driving insevere winter conditions where this mayhappen, you should periodically checkunderneath the vehicle to be sure themovement of the front wheels and thesteering components is not obstructed.

E121000ASA-EC

Carry emergency equipmentDepending on the severity of the weath-er, you should carry appropriate emer-gency equipment. Some of the items youmay want to carry include tow straps orchains, flashlight, emergency flares,sand, shovel, jumper cables, windowscraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls,blanket, etc.


525

E140000AHM-EC

If you are considering towing with yourvehicle you should first check with yourCountry’s Department of Motor Vehiclesto determine their legal requirements.Since laws vary from province toprovince the requirements for towingtrailers, cars, or other types of vehicles orapparatus may differ. Ask an authorizedKIA dealer for further details before tow-ing.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identifywhat the vehicle trailering capacity is foryour vehicle, you should read the infor-mation in “Weight of the trailer” thatappears later in this section.

Remember that trailering is different thanjust driving your vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes in handling,durability, and fuel economy. Successful,safe trailering requires correct equip-ment, and it has to be used properly.

This section contains many time-tested,important trailering tips and safety rules.Many of these are important for yoursafety and that of your passengers.Please read this section carefully beforeyou pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as theengine, transmission, wheel assemblies,and tires are forced to work harderagainst the load of the added weight. Theengine is required to operate at relativelyhigher speeds and under greater loads.This additional burden generates extraheat. The trailer also adds considerablyto wind resistance, increasing the pullingrequirements.

TRAILER TOWING

WARNING - Towing a trail-er

If you don't use the correct equip-ment and drive improperly, you canlose control when you pull a trailer.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell - or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously orfatally injured. Pull a trailer only ifyou have followed all the steps inthis section.

WARNING - Weight limitsBefore towing, make sure the totaltrailer weight, gross combinationweight, gross vehicle weight, grossaxle weight and trailer tongue loadare all within the limits.

CAUTIONPulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by yourwarranty. To pull a trailer correctly,follow the advice in this section.

5 53


E140100ASA

Hitches It's important to have the correct hitchequipment. Crosswinds, large trucksgoing by, and rough roads are a few rea-sons why you’ll need the right hitch. Hereare some rules to follow:• Do you have to make any holes in the

body of your vehicle when you install atrailer hitch? If you do, then be sure toseal the holes later when you removethe hitch.If you don’t seal them, deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from your exhaust canget into your vehicle, as well as dirt andwater.

• The bumpers on your vehicle are notintended for hitches. Do not attachrental hitches or other bumper-typehitches to them. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

• KIA trailer hitch accessory is availableat an authorized KIA dealer.

E140200AUN

Safety chains You should always attach chainsbetween your vehicle and your trailer.Cross the safety chains under the tongueof the trailer so that the tongue will notdrop to the road if it becomes separatedfrom the hitch.Instructions about safety chains may beprovided by the hitch manufacturer or bythe trailer manufacturer. Follow the man-ufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains. Always leave just enoughslack so you can turn with your trailer.And, never allow safety chains to drag onthe ground.

E140300AUN-EU

Trailer brakes If your trailer is equipped with a brakingsystem, make sure it conforms to federaland/or local regulations and that it isproperly installed and operating correctly.If your trailer weighs more than the max-imum trailer weight without trailer brakesloaded, then it needs its own brakes andthey must be adequate. Be sure to readand follow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.• Don’t tap into your vehicle's brake sys-

tem.

WARNING - Trailer brakesDo not use a trailer with its ownbrakes unless you are absolutelycertain that you have properly setup the brake system. This is not atask for amateurs. Use an experi-enced, competent trailer shop forthis work.


545

E140400ASA

Driving with a trailer Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Before setting outfor the open road, you must get to knowyour trailer. Acquaint yourself with thefeel of handling and braking with theadded weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you aredriving is now a good deal longer and notnearly so responsive as your vehicle isby itself.Before you start, check the trailer hitchand platform, safety chains, electricalconnector(s), lights, tires and mirroradjustment. If the trailer has electricbrakes, start your vehicle and trailer mov-ing and then apply the trailer brake con-troller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your electri-cal connection at the same time.During your trip, check occasionally to besure that the load is secure, and that thelights and trailer brakes are still working.

E140401AUN

Following distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehi-cle ahead as you would when drivingyour vehicle without a trailer. This canhelp you avoid situations that requireheavy braking and sudden turns.

E140402AUN

Passing You’ll need more passing distance upahead when you’re towing a trailer. And,because of the increased vehicle length,you’ll need to go much farther beyond thepassed vehicle before you can return toyour lane.

E140403AUN

Backing up Hold the bottom of the steering wheelwith one hand. Then, to move the trailerto the left, just move your hand to the left.To move the trailer to the right, move yourhand to the right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someone guideyou.

E140404AUN

Making turns When you’re turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this so yourtrailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs,road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoidjerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.

5 55


E140405AHM-EU

Turn signals when towing a trailer When you tow a trailer, your vehicle hasto have a different turn signal flasher andextra wiring. The green arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever yousignal a turn or lane change. Properlyconnected, the trailer lights will also flashto alert other drivers you’re about to turn,change lanes, or stop.When towing a trailer, the green arrowson your instrument panel will flash forturns even if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Thus, you may think driversbehind you are seeing your signalswhen, in fact, they are not. It’s importantto check occasionally to be sure the trail-er bulbs are still working. You must alsocheck the lights every time you discon-nect and then reconnect the wires.

Do not connect a trailer lighting systemdirectly to your vehicle’s lighting system.Use only an approved trailer wiring har-ness.An authorized KIA dealer can assist youin installing the wiring harness.

E140406AHM

Driving on grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gearbefore you start down a long or steepdowngrade. If you don’t shift down, youmight have to use your brakes so muchthat they would get hot and no longeroperate efficiently.On a long uphill grade, shift down andreduce your speed to around 70 km/h (45mph) to reduce the possibility of engineand transmission overheating.If your trailer weighs more than the max-imum trailer weight without trailer brakesand you have an automatic transmission,you should drive in D (Drive) when tow-ing a trailer.Operating your vehicle in D (Drive) whentowing a trailer will minimize heat build upand extend the life of your transmission.

CAUTION - Electrical cur-rent limit of the light

Current of the trailer's light load- Left turn & stop light: max. 5 A- Right turn & stop light: max.5 A- Back up light: max.15 A - Tail light: max. 15 AIf the current limit is exceeded, thetrailer light may not work properly.

WARNING Failure to use an approved trailerwiring harness could result in dam-age to the vehicle electrical systemand/or personal injury.


565

E140407BHM

Parking on hills Generally, if you have a trailer attached toyour vehicle, you should not park yourvehicle on a hill. People can be seriouslyor fatally injured, and both your vehicleand the trailer can be damaged if unex-pectedly roll down the hill.

However, if you ever have to park yourtrailer on a hill, here's how to do it:1. Pull the vehicle into the parking space.

Turn the steering wheel in the directionof the curb (right if headed down hill,left if headed up hill).

2. If the vehicle has an automatic trans-mission, place the car in P (Park).

3. Set the parking brake and shut off thevehicle.

4. Place chocks under the trailer wheelson the down hill side of the wheels.

5. Start the vehicle, hold the brakes, shiftto neutral, release the parking brakeand slowly release the brakes until thetrailer chocks absorb the load.

6. Reapply the brakes, reapply the park-ing brake and shift the vehicle to P(Park) for automatic transmission.

7. Shut off the vehicle and release thevehicle brakes but leave the parkingbrake set.

CAUTION• When towing a trailer on steep

grades (in excess of 6%) payclose attention to the enginecoolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does not over-heat. If the needle of the coolanttemperature gauge moves acrossthe dial towards “H” (HOT), pullover and stop as soon as it is safeto do so, and allow the engine toidle until it cools down. You mayproceed once the engine hascooled sufficiently.

• You must decide the drivingspeed depending on trailerweight and uphill grade to reducethe possibility of engine andtransmission overheating.

WARNING - Parking on ahill

Parking your vehicle on a hill with atrailer attached could cause seri-ous injury or death, should the trail-er break loose.

WARNING - Parking brakeIt can be dangerous to get out ofyour vehicle if the parking brake isnot firmly set.If you have left the engine running,the vehicle can move suddenly.Youor others could be seriously orfatally injured.

5 57


When you are ready to leave after park-ing on a hill 1. With the automatic transmission in P

(Park), apply your brakes and hold thebrake pedal down while you:• Start your engine;• Shift into gear; and• Release the parking brake.

2. Slowly remove your foot from thebrake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear ofthe chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up andstore the chocks.

E140500AHM

Maintenance when trailer towing Your vehicle will need service more oftenwhen you regularly pull a trailer.Important items to pay particular atten-tion to include engine oil, automatictransmission fluid, axle lubricant andcooling system fluid. Brake condition isanother important item to frequentlycheck. Each item is covered in this man-ual, and the index will help you find themquickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good ideato review these sections before you startyour trip.Don’t forget to also maintain your trailerand hitch. Follow the maintenanceschedule that accompanied your trailerand check it periodically. Preferably, con-duct the check at the start of each day’sdriving. Most importantly, all hitch nutsand bolts should be tight.

CAUTION• Due to higher load during trailer

usage, overheating might occurin hot days or during uphill driv-ing. If the coolant gauge indicatesover-heating, switch off the A/Cand stop the vehicle in a safe areato cool down the engine.

• When towing check transmissionfluid more frequently.

• If your vehicle is not equippedwith the air conditioner, youshould install a condenser fan toimprove engine performancewhen towing a trailer.


585

E140600AHM

If you do decide to pull a trailerHere are some important points if youdecide to pull a trailer:• Consider using a sway control.You can

ask a hitch dealer about sway control.• Do not do any towing with your vehicle

during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles)in order to allow the engine to properlybreak in. Failure to heed this cautionmay result in serious engine or trans-mission damage.

• When towing a trailer, be sure to con-sult an authorized KIA dealer for fur-ther information on additional require-ments such as a towing kit, etc.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moder-ate speed (less than 100 km/h / 60mph).

• On a long uphill grade, do not exceed70 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towingspeed limit, whichever is lower.

• The chart contains important consider-ations that have to do with weight:

3.8L Engine 4.6L Engine

Maxmum2270 (5000) 3400 (7500)

Trailer

weight750 (1650) 750 (1650)

Maximum227 (500) 340 (750)

Tongue weight

kg (lbs.)

EngineItem

with brakes

without

brakes

5 59


E140601AHM

Weight of the trailerWhat is the maximum safe weight of atrailer? It should never weigh more thanthe maximum trailer weight with trailerbrakes. But even that can be too heavy.It depends on how you plan to use yourtrailer. For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature and howoften your vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. The ideal trailer weightcan also depend on any special equip-ment that you have on your vehicle.

E140602ASA

Weight of the trailer tongueThe tongue load of any trailer is animportant weight to measure because itaffects the total gross vehicle weight(GVW) of your vehicle. This weightincludes the curb weight of the vehicle,any cargo you may carry in it, and thepeople who will be riding in the vehicle.And if you tow a trailer, you must add thetongue load to the GVW because yourvehicle will also be carrying that weight.

The trailer tongue should weigh a maxi-mum of 10% of the total loaded trailerweight, within the limits of the maximumtrailer tongue load permissible. Afteryou've loaded your trailer, weigh the trail-er and then the tongue, separately, tosee if the weights are proper. If theyaren’t, you may be able to correct themsimply by moving some items around inthe trailer.

C190E01JM

Tongue Load Total Trailer WeightWARNING - Trailer

• Never load a trailer with moreweight in the rear than in thefront. The front should be loadedwith approximately 60% of thetotal trailer load; the rear shouldbe loaded with approximately 40%of the total trailer load.

• Never exceed the maximumweight limits of the trailer or trail-er towing equipment. Improperloading can result in damage toyour vehicle and/or personalinjury. Check weights and loadingat a commercial scale or highwaypatrol office equipped with scales.

• An improperly loaded trailer cancause loss of vehicle control.

C190E02JM

Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight


605

E140700AHM

Service Connector for towingbrake controller1 : Trailer brake (blue)2 : Battery(+) (black)3 : Stop light (red)4 : Ground(-) (white)

A service connector is equipped in yourvehicle for the towing brake controller asshown. Link the connector to the towingbrake controller with the sub wire har-ness stored in the glove box.The detailedexplanation of the sub wire harness cir-cuit is shown in the picture. Be sure toposition the towing brake controllerwhere it does not interfere with the driverfrom operating the pedal.We recommend that the sub wire har-ness be stored in the glove box when it isnot in use.

E140800AHM

Trailer light connectorYour vehicle is equipped with a wire har-ness stored in the rear end underbody.Use it to connect and operate the trailerlights. However, the trailer lights mustcomply with federal, state/provincial andlocal regulations. See your local recre-ational vehicle dealer or rental agency forthe correct type of wiring and relays foryour trailer. Check for correct operation ofthe turn signals, tail, back-up and stoplights each time you hitch up. Direct splic-ing may damage your vehicle's electricalsystem and cause a malfunction of yourlights.

OHM068032N

5 61


E150101AHM

Vehicle capacity weight:525 kg (1157 lbs.)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo. If your vehicle is equippedwith a trailer, the combined weightincludes the tongue load.

E150102AEN

Seating capacity:Total : 7 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons, Rear seat : 5 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximumnumber of occupants including adriver, your vehicle may carry.However, the seating capacity maybe reduced based upon the weight ofall of the occupants, and the weightof the cargo being carried or towed.Do not overload the vehicle as thereis a limit to the total weight, or loadlimit including occupants and cargo,the vehicle can carry.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

OHM059047N

OHM059048N

OHM059052N

OHM059053N

E150100AUN

Tire and loading information labelThe label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, coldtire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people thatcan be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.


625

E150103AHM

Towing capacity:Without trailer brakes:750 kg (1650 lbs)With trailer brakes:• 3.8 Engine = 2270 kg (5000 lbs)• 4.6 Engine = 3400 kg (7500 lbs)

Towing capacity is the maximumtrailer weight including its cargoweight, your vehicle can tow.

E150104AUN

Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehiclewill increase or decrease dependingon the weight and the number ofoccupants and the tongue load, ifyour vehicle is equipped with a trail-er.

E150105AUN

Steps for determining correct loadlimit1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and lug-gage load capacity. For example, ifthe "XXX" amount equals 635 kg,and there will be five 68 kg (150lbs.) passengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 295 kg(650 lbs.).(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight maynot safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-er, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of yourvehicle.

5 63


Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The com-bined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle's capacity weight.

C190F01JM

Item Description Total

AVehicle Capacity 635 kg

Weight (1400 lbs)Subtract Occupant

B Weight 136 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 2(300lbs)

CAvailable Cargo and 499 kg

Luggage weight (1100 lbs)

Example 1

A B C

C190F02JM




B Weight 340 kg

68 kg (150 lbs) × 5(750 lbs)



A B C

Example 2

C190F03JM




B Weight 390 kg

78 kg (172 lbs) × 5(860 lbs)



A B C

Example 3


645

E150200AUN

Certification labelThe certification label is located onthe driver's door sill at the center pil-lar.This label shows the maximumallowable weight of the fully loadedvehicle. This is called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel andcargo.

This label also tells you the maxi-mum weight that can be supportedby the front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

To find out the actual loads on yourfront and rear axles, you need to goto a weigh station and weigh yourvehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out your loadequally on both sides of the center-line.OEN056020

WARNING - Over loading• Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR foreither the front or rear axleand vehicle capacity weight.Exceeding these ratings cancause an accident or vehicledamage.You can calculate theweight of your load by weigh-ing the items (or people)before putting them in thevehicle. Be careful not to over-load your vehicle.

• Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR, eitherthe maximum front or rearGAWR and vehicle capacityweight. If you do, parts, includ-ing tires on your vehicle canbreak, and it can change theway your vehicle handles andbraking ability. This couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

5 65


The label will help you decide howmuch cargo and installed equipmentyour vehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle- like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else - they are moving asfast as the vehicle. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash,the items will keep going and cancause an injury if they strike the driv-er or a passenger.

WARNING• Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in yourvehicle's tires and possibletire failure that could lead to acrash.

• Overloading your vehicle cancause increased stopping dis-tances that could lead to acrash.

• A crash resulting from poorhandling vehicle damage, tirefailure, or increased stoppingdistances could result in seri-ous injury or death.

WARNING - Loose cargoItems you carry inside yourvehicle can strike and injureoccupants in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.• Put items in the cargo area of

your vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

• Never stack items, like suit-cases, inside the vehicleabove the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecuredchild restraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secure it.

• Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

CAUTION• Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs wouldnot be covered by your warran-ty. Do not overload your vehicle.

• Using heavier suspension com-ponents to get added durabilitymight not change your weightratings. Ask your dealer to helpyou load your vehicle the rightway.


665

E160000AUN

This section will guide you in the properloading of your vehicle and/or trailer, tokeep your loaded vehicle weight within itsdesign rating capability, with or without atrailer. Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of the vehicledesign performance. Before loading yourvehicle, familiarize yourself with the fol-lowing terms for determining your vehi-cle's weight ratings, with or without atrailer, from the vehicle's specificationsand the certification label:

E160100AUN

Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicle includinga full tank of fuel and all standard equip-ment. It does not include passengers,cargo, or optional equipment.

E160200AUN

Vehicle curb weightThis is the weight of your new vehiclewhen you picked it up from your dealerplus any aftermarket equipment.

E160300AUN

Cargo weightThis figure includes all weight added tothe Base Curb Weight, including cargoand optional equipment.

E160400AUN

GAW (Gross axle weight)This is the total weight placed on eachaxle (front and rear) - including vehiclecurb weight and all payload.

E160500AUN

GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)This is the maximum allowable weightthat can be carried by a single axle (frontor rear). These numbers are shown onthe certification label.The total load on each axle must neverexceed its GAWR.

E160600AUN

GVW (Gross vehicle weight)This is the Base Curb Weight plus actualCargo Weight plus passengers.

E160700AUN-EU

GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)This is the maximum allowable weight ofthe fully loaded vehicle (including alloptions, equipment, passengers andcargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer-tification label located on the driver’sdoor sill.

VEHICLE WEIGHT

6

Road warning / 6-2In case of an emergency while driving / 6-2If the engine will not start / 6-3Emergency starting / 6-4If the engine overheats / 6-6Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-7If you have a flat tire / 6-12Towing / 6-22



26

ROAD WARNING

F010100ASA

Hazard warning flasher The hazard warning flasher serves as awarning to other drivers to exerciseextreme caution when approaching,overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergencyrepairs are being made or when the vehi-cle is stopped near the edge of a road-way.Depress the flasher switch with the igni-tion switch in any position. The flasherswitch is located in the center consoleswitch panel. All turn signal lights willflash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operateswhether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when thehazard flasher is on.

F020100AUN-EU

If the engine stalls at a crossroador crossingIf the engine stalls at a crossroad orcrossing, set the shift lever in the N(Neutral) position and then push the vehi-cle to a safe place.

F020200AHM

If you have a flat tire while drivingIf a tire goes flat while you are driving:1.Take your foot off the accelerator pedal

and let the vehicle slow down whiledriving straight ahead. Do not apply thebrakes immediately or attempt to pulloff the road as this may cause a loss ofcontrol. When the vehicle has slowedto such a speed that it is safe to do so,brake carefully and pull off the road.Drive off the road as far as possibleand park on a firm level ground. If youare on a divided highway, do not parkin the median area between the twotraffic lanes.

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYWHILE DRIVING

OHM068001N

6 3


2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn onyour emergency hazard flashers, setthe parking brake and put the trans-mission in P (Park).

3.Have all passengers get out of thevehicle. Be sure they all get out on theside of the car that is away from traffic.

4.When changing a flat tire, follow theinstruction provided later in this sec-tion.

F020300AUN

If engine stalls while driving1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact anauthorized KIA dealer or seek otherqualified assistance.

F030100AHM

If engine doesn't turn over orturns over slowly1. If your car has an automatic transmis-

sion, be sure the shift lever is in N(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-gency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to besure they are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the lightdims or goes out when you operate thestarter, the battery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to besure they are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to startit. See instructions for "Jump starting".

F030200AHM

If engine turns over normally butdoes not start1. Check the fuel level.2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK

position, check all connectors at theignition coils and spark plugs.Reconnect any that may be discon-nected or loose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-partment.

4. If the engine still does not start, call anauthorized KIA dealer or seek otherqualified assistance.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

WARNINGIf the engine will not start, do notpush or pull the car to start it. Thiscould result in a collision or causeother damage. In addition, push orpull starting may cause the catalyt-ic converter to be overloaded andcreate a fire hazard.


46

EMERGENCY STARTING

F040000AUN

Connect cables in numerical order anddisconnect in reverse order.

F040100AHM

Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous if doneincorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm toyourself or damage to your vehicle orbattery, follow the jump starting proce-dures. If in doubt, we strongly recom-mend that you have a competent techni-cian or towing service jump start yourvehicle.

CAUTIONUse only a 12-volt jumper system.You can damage a 12-volt startingmotor, ignition system, and otherelectrical parts beyond repair byuse of a 24-volt power supply (eithertwo 12-volt batteries in series or a24-volt motor generator set).

WARNING - Battery• Keep all flames or sparks away

from the battery. The battery pro-duces hydrogen gas which mayexplode if exposed to flame orsparks.If these instructions are not fol-lowed exactly, serious personalinjury and damage to the vehiclemay occur! If you are not surehow to follow this procedure,seek qualified assistance.Automobile batteries contain sul-furic acid. This is poisonous andhighly corrosive. When jumpstarting, wear protective glassesand be careful not to get acid onyourself, your clothing or on thevehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start thevehicle if the discharged batteryis frozen or if the electrolyte levelis low; the battery may rupture orexplode.

WARNING - BatteryNever attempt to check the elec-trolyte level of the battery as thismay cause the battery to rupture orexplode causing serious injury.

1VQA4001

Dischargedbattery

Jumper Cables

Boosterbattery

(-)

(+)

(+)(-)

6 5


F040101ASA

Jump starting procedure 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-

volt and that its negative terminal isgrounded.

2. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not allow the vehicles tocome in contact.

3. Turn off all unnecessary electricalloads.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exactsequence shown in the illustration.First connect one end of a jumpercable to the positive terminal of thedischarged battery (1), then connectthe other end to the positive terminalon the booster battery (2).Proceed to connect one end of theother jumper cable to the negative ter-minal of the booster battery (3), thenthe other end to a solid, stationary,metallic point (for example, the enginelifting bracket) away from the battery(4). Do not connect it to or near anypart that moves when the engine iscranked.

Do not allow the jumper cables to con-tact anything except the correct batteryterminals or the correct ground. Do notlean over the battery when makingconnections.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with thebooster battery and let it run at 2,000rpm, then start the engine of the vehi-cle with the discharged battery.

If the cause of your battery discharging isnot apparent, you should have your vehi-cle checked by an authorized KIA dealer.

F040200AHM-EU

Push-starting Vehicles equipped with automatic trans-mission cannot be push-started.Follow the directions in this section forjump-starting.

CAUTION - Battery cablesDo not connect the jumper cablefrom the negative terminal of thebooster battery to the negative ter-minal of the discharged battery.This can cause the discharged bat-tery to overheat and crack, releas-ing battery acid.

WARNINGNever tow a vehicle to start itbecause the sudden surge forwardwhen the engine starts could causea collision with the tow vehicle.


66

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATSF050000AHM

If your temperature gauge indicates over-heating, you experience a loss of power,or hear loud pinging or knocking, theengine will probably be too hot. If thishappens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as itis safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P (Park) and setthe parking brake. If the air conditioningis on, turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out underthe vehicle or steam is coming outfrom underneath the hood, stop theengine. Do not open the hood until thecoolant has stopped running or thesteaming has stopped. If there is novisible loss of engine coolant and nosteam, leave the engine running andcheck to be sure the engine coolingfan is operating. If the fan is not run-ning, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drivebelt is missing. If it is not missing,check to see that it is tight. If the drivebelt seems to be satisfactory, check forcoolant leaking from the radiator,hoses or under the vehicle. (If the airconditioning had been in use, it is nor-mal for cold water to be draining fromit when you stop).

5. If the water pump drive belt is brokenor engine coolant is leaking out, stopthe engine immediately and call thenearest authorized KIA dealer forassistance.

6. If you cannot find the cause of theoverheating, wait until the engine tem-perature has returned to normal. Then,if coolant has been lost, carefully addcoolant to the reservoir to bring thefluid level in the reservoir up to thehalfway mark.

7.Proceed with caution, keeping alert forfurther signs of overheating. If over-heating happens again, call an author-ized KIA dealer for assistance.WARNING

While the engine is running, keephair, hands and clothing away frommoving parts such as the fan anddrive belts to prevent injury.

CAUTIONSerious loss of coolant indicatesthere is a leak in the cooling systemand this should be checked as soonas possible by an authorized KIAdealer.

WARNINGDo not remove the radiator capwhen the engine is hot. This mayresult in coolant being blown out ofthe opening and cause seriousburns.

6 7


TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

(1) TPMS malfunction indicator(2) Low tire pressure telltale

F060000AUN

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehi-cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-ard or tire inflation pressure label. (Ifyour vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pres-sure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure forthose tires.)As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pres-sure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a signifi-cantly under-inflated tire causes thetire to overheat and can lead to tirefailure. Under-inflation also reducesfuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire mainte-nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pres-sure, even if under-inflation has notreached the level to trigger illumina-tion of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is provided by aseparate telltale, which displays thesymbol "TPMS" when illuminated.When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire pres-sure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of rea-sons, including the installation ofreplacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alter-nate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to function proper-ly.

OHM068030N

OHM068031N

■ Type A

■ Type B


86

F060100AHM

Low tire pressure tell-tale

When the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning telltale is illuminat-ed, one or more of your tires is sig-nificantly under-inflated.Immediately reduce your speed,avoid hard cornering and anticipateincreased stopping distances. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible. Inflate the tires tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle’s placard or tire inflationpressure label located on the driver’sside center pillar outer panel. If youcannot reach a service station or ifthe tire cannot hold the newly addedair, replace the low pressure tire withthe spare tire. Then the TPMS mal-function indicator or the Low TirePressure telltale may turn on afterrestarting and about 20 minutes ofcontinuous driving before you havethe low-pressure tire repaired andreplaced on the vehicle.

WARNING - Low pressuredamage

Significantly low tire pressuremakes the vehicle unstable andcan contribute to loss of vehiclecontrol and increased brakingdistances.Continued driving on low pres-sure tires can cause the tires tooverheat and fail.

CAUTIONIn winter or cold weather, thelow tire pressure telltale may beilluminated if the tire pressurewas adjusted to the recom-mended tire inflation pressurein warm weather. It does notmean your TPMS is malfunction-ing because the decreased tem-perature leads to a proportionallowering of tire pressure.When you drive your vehiclefrom a warm area to a cold areaor from a cold area to a warmarea, or the outside temperatureis greatly higher or lower, youshould check the tire inflationpressure and adjust the tires tothe recommended tire inflationpressure.

6 9


F060200AHM

TPMS (Tire PressureMonitoring System)malfunction indicator

The TPMS malfunction indicatorcomes on and stays on when there isa problem with the Tire PressureMonitoring System. If the system isable to correctly detect an under-inflation warning at the same time assystem failure then it will illuminateboth the TPMS malfunction and thelow tire pressure telltale e.g. if frontleft sensor fails, the TPMS malfunc-tion indicator turns on, but if frontright, rear left, or rear right tire isunder-inflated, the low tire pressuretelltale may turn on at the same timeas the TPMS malfunction indicator.Have the system checked by anauthorized KIA dealer as soon aspossible to determine the cause ofthe problem.

TPMSCAUTION

• The TPMS malfunction indica-tor may be illuminated if thevehicle is moving around elec-tric power supply cables orradio transmitter such as atpolice stations, governmentand public offices, broadcast-ing stations, military installa-tions, airports, or transmittingtowers, etc. This can interferewith normal operation of theTire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS).

(Continued)

(Continued)• If there is a failed tire sensor, it

is possible for the TPMS totemporarily learn a replace-ment sensor if closely drivento another vehicle that is alsoequipped with TPMS. In rarecases, this may temporarilydelay the TPMS malfunctionindicator from turning on.

• The TPMS malfunction indica-tor may be illuminated if Snowchains or some electronicdevices, such as notebookcomputers, are used in thevehicle. These can interferewith normal operation of theTire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS).


106

F060300AHM-EC

Changing a tire with TPMSIf you have a flat tire, the Low TirePressure telltale will turn on. Havethe flat tire repaired by an authorizedKIA dealer as soon as possible orreplace the flat tire with the tempo-rary spare tire.

✽✽ NOTICENEVER use a puncture-repairingagent to repair and/or inflate a lowpressure tire. If used, you will haveto replace the tire pressure sensor.

Each wheel is equipped with a tirepressure sensor mounted inside thetire behind the valve stem. You mustuse TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-ommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by an authorizedKIA dealer as soon as possible.After you replace the low pressuretire with the spare tire, the TPMSmalfunction indicator or the Low TirePressure telltale may illuminate afterrestarting and about 20 minutes ofcontinuous driving.

Once the low pressure tire is re-inflated to the recommended pres-sure and installed on the vehicle, theTPMS malfunction indicator and thelow tire pressure telltale will turn off.If the low pressure and TPMS mal-function indicators do not turn offafter about 20 minutes of continuousdriving, please visit an authorizedKIA dealer.You may not be able to identify a lowtire by simply looking at it. Alwaysuse a good quality tire pressuregauge to measure the tire's inflationpressure. Please note that a tire thatis hot (from being driven) will have ahigher pressure measurement than atire that is cold (from sitting station-ary for at least 3 hours and drivenless than 1 mile during that 3 hourperiod). Allow the tire to cool beforemeasuring the inflation pressure.Always be sure the tire is cold beforeinflating to the recommended pres-sure.A cold tire means the vehicle hasbeen sitting for 3 hours and driven forless than 1 mile in that 3 hour period.

CAUTION• Do not use any tire sealant if

your vehicle is equipped witha Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem.The liquid sealant candamage the tire pressure sen-sors.

• In order for the system to cor-rectly monitor tires for under-inflation, there should be atotal of exactly 4 sensors fit-ted to each of the four wheels.There should be no other sen-sors in the vehicle includingthe spare tire since this couldcause the system to monitorthe wrong sensors.

6 11


This device complies withIndustry Canada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1.This device may not cause harmful

interference, and 2.This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesiredoperation.

WARNING -Tampering with, modifying, ordisabling the Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS)components may interfere withthe system's ability to warn thedriver of low tire pressure con-ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modify-ing, or disabling the TirePressure Monitoring System(TPMS) components may voidthe warranty for that portion ofthe vehicle.

WARNING - TPMS• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-age caused by external fac-tors such as nails or roaddebris.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-ity, immediately take your footoff the accelerator, apply thebrakes gradually and withlight force, and slowly move toa safe position off the road.

WARNING Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliancecould void the user’s authorityto operate the equipment.


126

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

F070100AEN

Jack and toolsThe jack, jack handle, wheel lug nutwrench are stored in the luggagecompartment. Pull up the luggagebox cover to reach this equipment.(1) Jack handle(2) Jack(3) Wheel lug nut wrench

F070101AHM

Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergencytire changing only.To prevent the jack from “rattling”while the vehicle is in motion, store itproperly.Follow jacking instructions to reducethe possibility of personal injury.

Removing and storing the jack1. Open the cover.2. Remove the tie-down band and

then pull up the clip.3. Take out the jack.4. After finishing using the jack, put it

back in the reverse order.

OHM068002 OHM068015

6 13


Operating the jackTo raise the jack:1. Check whether the jack valve is

closed. If not, insert the jack han-dle into the valve and turn it clock-wise until it is closed.

2. Insert the jack handle into thepump bracket.

3. Pump the jack handle up anddown until the ram is raised to thedesired level.

To lower the jack:1. Insert the jack handle into the

valve and turn it counterclockwiseuntil it is opened. Do not turn itmore than twice.

2. Push the ram in by pushing the topof the ram.

3. When the ram is completely low-ered, insert the jack handle intothe valve and turn it clockwise andclose it.

OHM068020 OHM068021

CAUTIONThis jack is hydraulic, and theram is a two stage type. Whenboth rams are raised and thestop mark of the upper rambecomes visible, stop jackingimmediately.


146

F070200AHM

Removing and storing the sparetire Your spare tire is stored underneathyour vehicle, directly below the cargoarea.To remove the spare tire:1. Open the tailgate.2. Find the plastic hex bolt cover and

remove the cover.

WARNING - Changing tires• Never attempt vehicle repairs

in the traffic lanes of a publicroad or highway.

• Always move the vehicle com-pletely off the road and ontothe shoulder before trying tochange a tire. The jack shouldbe used on a firm levelground. If you cannot find afirm, level place off the road,call a towing service companyfor assistance.

• Be sure to use the correctfront and rear jacking posi-tions on the vehicle; neveruse the bumpers or any otherpart of the vehicle for jacksupport.

• The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack causing seriousinjury or death. No personshould place any portion oftheir body under a vehicle thatis supported only by a jack;use vehicle support stands.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Do not start or run the engine

while the vehicle is on thejack.

• Do not allow anyone to remainin the vehicle while it is on thejack.

• Make sure any children pres-ent are in a secure place awayfrom the road and from thevehicle to be raised with thejack.

OHM068003

6 15


3. Use the wheel lug nut wrench toloosen the bolt enough to lowerthe spare tire.Turn the wrench counterclockwiseuntil the spare tire reaches theground.

4. After the spare tire reaches theground, continue to turn thewrench counterclockwise, anddraw the spare tire outside. Neverrotate the wrench excessively, oth-erwise the spare tire carrier maybe damaged.

5. Remove the retainer (1) from thecenter of the spare tire.

To store the spare tire:1. Lay the tire on the ground with the

valve stem facing up.2. Place the wheel under the vehicle

and install the retainer (1) throughthe wheel center.

3. Turn the wrench clockwise until itclicks.

OHM068004N OHM068005N OHM068006N

WARNINGEnsure the spare tire retainer isproperly aligned with the centerof the spare tire to prevent thespare tire from “rattling”.Otherwise, it may cause thespare tire to fall off the carrierand lead to an accident.


166

F070300AHM-EU

Changing tires 1. Park on a level surface and apply

the parking brake firmly.2. Place the transmission shift lever

in P (Park).3. Activate the hazard warning flash-

er.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,jack, jack handle, and spare tirefrom the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally oppositefrom the jack position.

1VQA4022 OHM068007

WARNING - Changing a tire• To prevent vehicle movement

while changing a tire, alwaysset the parking brake fully,and always block the wheeldiagonally opposite the wheelbeing changed.

• We recommend that thewheels of the vehicle beblocked, and that no personremain in a vehicle that isbeing jacked.

6 17


6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-terclockwise one turn each, but donot remove any nut until the tirehas been raised off the ground.

7. Place the jack at the front or rearjacking position closest to the tireyou are changing. Place the jackat the designated locations underthe frame.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jackvalve and turn it clockwise. Theninsert the jack handle into thepump bracket and raise the vehi-cle until the tire just clears theground. This measurement isapproximately 30 mm (1 in.).Before removing the wheel lugnuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-ble and that there is no chance formovement or slippage.

OHM068009

WARNING - Jack locationTo reduce the possibility ofinjury, be sure to use only thejack provided with the vehicleand in the correct jack position;never use any other part of thevehicle for jack support.

OHM068010 OHM068011


186

9. Loosen the wheel nuts andremove them with your fingers.Slide the wheel off the studs andlay it flat so it cannot roll away. Toput the wheel on the hub, pick upthe spare tire, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheelonto them. If this is difficult, tip thewheel slightly and get the top holein the wheel lined up with the topstud. Then jiggle the wheel backand forth until the wheel can slideover the other studs.

10. To install the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on thestuds and tighten them fingertight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it iscompletely seated, then tightenthe nuts as much as possiblewith your fingers again.

11. Lower the vehicle to the groundby turning the jack valve counter-clockwise.

WARNINGWheels may have sharp edges.Handle them carefully to avoidpossible severe injury. Beforeputting the wheel into place, besure that there is nothing on thehub or wheel (such as mud, tar,gravel, etc.) that prevents withthe wheel from fitting solidlyagainst the hub.If there is, remove it. If the con-tact of the mounting surfacebetween the wheel and hub isnot good, the wheel nuts couldcome loose and cause the lossof a wheel. Loss of a wheel mayresult in loss of control of thevehicle. This may cause seriousinjury or death.

6 19


Then position the wrench as shownin the drawing and tighten the wheelnuts. Be sure the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut. Do not standon the wrench handle or use anextension pipe over the wrench han-dle. Go around the wheel tighteningevery nut following the numericalsequence shown in the image untilthey are all tight. Then double-checkeach nut for tightness. After changingwheels, have an authorized KIAdealer tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:9~11 kg·m (65~79 lb·ft)

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure.If the pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the cor-rect pressure. If it is too high, adjustit until it is correct. Always reinstallthe valve cap after checking oradjusting the tire pressure. If the capis not replaced, dust and dirt may getinto the tire valve and air may leakfrom the tire. If you lose a valve cap,buy another and install it as soon aspossible.After you have changed the wheels,always secure the flat tire in its placeand return the jack and tools to theirproper storage locations.

OHM068012

CAUTIONYour vehicle has metric threadson the wheel studs and nuts.Make certain during wheelremoval that the same nuts thatwere removed are reinstalled -or, if replaced, that nuts withmetric threads and the samechamfer configuration are used.Installation of a non-metricthread nut on a metric stud orvice-versa will not secure thewheel to the hub properly andwill damage the stud so that itmust be replaced.Note that most lug nuts do nothave metric threads. Be sure touse extreme care in checkingfor thread style before installingaftermarket lug nuts or wheels.If in doubt, consult an author-ized KIA dealer.


206

To prevent the jack, jack handle,wheel lug nut wrench and spare tirefrom rattling while the vehicle is inmotion, store them properly.

F070301AHM-EC

Important - use of compact spare tire(if equipped)Your vehicle is equipped with a com-pact spare tire. This compact sparetire takes up less space than a regu-lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than aconventional tire and is designed fortemporary use only.

The compact spare should be inflat-ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).

✽✽ NOTICECheck the inflation pressure afterinstalling the spare tire. Adjust it tothe specified pressure, as necessary.

WARNING - Wheel studsIf the studs are damaged, theymay lose their ability to retainthe wheel.This could lead to theloss of the wheel and a collisionresulting in serious injuries.

WARNING - Inadequatespare tire pressure

Check the inflation pressures assoon as possible after installingthe spare tire. Adjust it to thespecified pressure, if necessary.Refer to “Tires and wheels” sec-tion 8.

CAUTION• You should drive carefully

when the compact spare is inuse. The compact spareshould be replaced by theproper conventional tire andrim at the first opportunity.

• The operation of this vehicleis not recommended withmore than one compact sparetire in use at the same time.

WARNINGThe compact spare tire is foremergency use only. Do notoperate your vehicle on thiscompact spare at speeds over80 km/h (50 mph). The originaltire should be repaired orreplaced as soon as is possibleto avoid failure of the sparepossibly leading to personalinjury or death.

6 21


When using a compact spare tire,observe the following precautions:• Under no circumstances should

you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); ahigher speed could damage thetire.

• Ensure that you drive slowlyenough for the road conditions toavoid all hazards. Any road hazard,such as a pothole or debris, couldseriously damage the compactspare.

• Any continuous road use of this tirecould result in tire failure, loss ofvehicle control, and possible per-sonal injury.

• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-mum load rating or the load-carry-ing capacity shown on the sidewallof the compact spare tire.

• Avoid driving over obstacles. Thecompact spare tire diameter issmaller than the diameter of a con-ventional tire and reduces theground clearance approximately25 mm (1 inch), which could resultin damage to the vehicle.

• Do not take this vehicle through anautomatic car wash while the com-pact spare tire is installed.

• The compact spare tire’s tread lifeis shorter than a regular tire.Inspect your compact spare tireregularly and replace worn com-pact spare tires with the same sizeand design, mounted on the samewheel.

• The compact spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the compact spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car compo-nents may occur.

• Do not use more than one compactspare tire at a time.

• Do not tow a trailer while the com-pact spare tire is installed.


226

TOWING

F080100AHM-EU

Towing serviceIf emergency towing is necessary, werecommend having it done by an author-ized KIA dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towingprocedures are necessary to preventdamage to the vehicle. The use of wheeldollies or flatbed is recommended.For trailer towing guidelines information,refer to “Trailer towing” in section 5.

On full-time 4WD vehicles, your vehiclemust be towed with a wheel lift and dol-lies or flatbed equipment with all thewheels off the ground.

On 2WD or part-time 4WD (2H position)vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehi-cle with the front wheels on the ground(without dollies) and the rear wheels offthe ground.If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-sion components are damaged or thevehicle is being towed with the rearwheels on the ground, use a towing dollyunder the rear wheels.When being towed by a commercial towtruck and wheel dollies are not used, therear of the vehicle should always be lift-ed, not the front.

OHM068016

dolly2WD or part-time 4WD (2H position) vehicles only

OHM068017

CAUTIONThe full-time 4WD vehicle shouldnever be towed with the wheels onthe ground. This can cause seriousdamage to the transmission or the4WD system.

CAUTION• Do not tow with sling-type equip-

ment. Use wheel lift or flatbedequipment.

• Do not tow the vehicle forwardwith the rear wheels on theground as this may cause dam-age to the vehicle.

OHM068018

6 23


When towing your vehicle in an emer-gency without wheel dollies :1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion.2. Place the transmission shift lever in N

(Neutral).3. For part-time 4WD vehicle, set the

transfer shift knob to 2H.4. Release the parking brake.

F080300AHM-EU

Emergency towingIf towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by an authorizedKIA dealer or a commercial tow truckservice.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tem-porarily towed using a cable or chainsecured to the emergency towing hookunder the front of the vehicle. Useextreme caution when towing the vehicle.A driver must be in the vehicle to steer itand operate the brakes.Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard-surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, power train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a vehi-

cle out of mud, sand or other condi-tions from which the vehicle cannot bedriven out under its own power.

• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than thevehicle doing the towing.

• The drivers of both vehicles shouldcommunicate with each other frequent-ly.

OHM068013NCAUTION

Failure to place the transmissionshift lever in N (Neutral) and thetransfer shift knob for part-time4WD operation to 2H may causeinternal damage to the transmis-sion.


246

• Before emergency towing, check thatthe hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chainsecurely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply it steadilyand with even force.

• To avoid damaging the hook, do notpull from the side or at a vertical angle.Always pull straight ahead.

• Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth(about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in themiddle of the strap for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so that the towing strapis not loose during towing.

WARNING Use extreme caution when towingthe vehicle.• Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers which wouldplace excessive stress on theemergency towing hook and tow-ing cable or chain. The hook andtowing cable or chain may breakand cause serious injury or dam-age.

• If the disabled vehicle cannot bemoved, do not forcibly continuethe towing. Contact an authorizedKIA dealer or a commercial towtruck service for assistance.

• Tow the vehicle as straight aheadas possible.

• Keep away from the vehicle dur-ing towing.

CAUTION• Attach a towing strap to the tow

hook.• Using a portion of the vehicle

other than the tow hooks for tow-ing may damage the body of yourvehicle.

• Only use a cable or chain specifi-cally intended for use in towingvehicles. Securely fasten thecable or chain to the towing hookprovided. OHM068019

6 25


F080301AHM-EU

Emergency towing precautions• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the

steering wheel isn’t locked.• Place the transmission shift lever in N

(Neutral).• Release the parking bake.• Press the brake pedal with more force

than usual since you will have reducedbrake performance.

• More steering effort will be requiredbecause the power steering systemwill be disabled.

• If you are driving down a long hill, thebrakes may overheat and brake per-formance will be reduced. Stop oftenand let the brakes cool off.

F080400AHM

Tie-down hook (for flatbed towing)

OHM068014

CAUTION - Automatictransmission

• If the vehicle is being towed withall four wheels on the ground, itcan be towed only from the front.Be sure that the transmission isin neutral. Do not tow at speedsgreater than 40 km/h (25 mph)and for more than 25 km (15 mile).Be sure the steering is unlockedby placing the ignition switch inthe ACC position. A driver mustbe in the towed vehicle to operatethe steering and brakes.

• Before towing, check the auto-matic transmission fluid leakunder your vehicle. If the auto-matic transmission fluid is leak-ing, a flatbed equipment or tow-ing dolly must be used.

WARNING Do not use the hooks under therear of the vehicle for towing pur-poses. These hooks are designedONLY for transport tie-down. If thetie-down hooks are used for towing,the tie-down hooks or rear bumperwill be damaged and this could leadto serious injury.

7

Engine compartment / 7-2Maintenance services / 7-4Owner maintenance / 7-5Explanation of scheduled maintenance items / 7-11Engine oil / 7-14Engine coolant / 7-15Brake fluid / 7-18Power steering fluid / 7-19Washer fluid / 7-20Parking brake / 7-20Air cleaner / 7-21Climate control air filter / 7-21Wiper blades / 7-22Battery / 7-25Tires and wheels / 7-28Fuses / 7-42Appearance care / 7-53

Emission control system / 7-67

Maintenance

Maintenance

27

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010000AHM-EU

OHM018005N

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Radiator cap

9. Engine oil dipstick

10. Power steering fluid reservoir

11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir


■■ 3.8L

7 3

Maintenance

OHM018004N

1. Engine coolant reservoir

2. Engine oil filler cap

3. Brake fluid reservoir

4. Air cleaner

5. Fuse box

6. Negative battery terminal

7. Positive battery terminal

8. Radiator cap

9. Engine oil dipstick

10. Power steering fluid reservoir

11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

■■ 4.6L


Maintenance

47

MAINTENANCE SERVICESG020000AHM

You should exercise the utmost care toprevent damage to your vehicle andinjury to yourself whenever performingany maintenance or inspection proce-dures.Should you have any doubts concerningthe inspection or servicing of your vehi-cle, we strongly recommend that youhave an authorized KIA dealer performthis work.An authorized KIA dealer has factorytrained technicians and genuine KIAparts to service your vehicle properly. Forexpert advice and quality service, see anauthorized KIA dealer.Inadequate, incomplete or insufficientservicing may result in operational prob-lems with your vehicle that could lead tovehicle damage, an accident, or person-al injury.

G020100AUN-EU

Owner’s responsibility

✽✽ NOTICEMaintenance Service and RecordRetention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that showproper maintenance has been performedon your vehicle in accordance with thescheduled maintenance service chartsshown on the following pages. You needthis information to establish your compli-ance with the servicing and maintenancerequirements of your vehicle warranties.Detailed warranty information is providedin your Warranty & Consumer Informationmanual.Repairs and adjustments required as aresult of improper maintenance or a lackof required maintenance are not covered.We recommend you have your vehiclemaintained and repaired by an author-ized KIA dealer. An authorized KIA deal-er meets KIA’s high service quality stan-dards and receives technical supportfrom KIA in order to provide you with ahigh level of service satisfaction.

G020200AUN-EU

Owner maintenance precautions Improper or incomplete service mayresult in problems. This section givesinstructions only for the maintenanceitems that are easy to perform.As explained earlier in this section, sev-eral procedures can be done only by anauthorized KIA dealer with special tools.

✽✽ NOTICEImproper owner maintenance duringthe warranty period may affect warran-ty coverage. For details, read the sepa-rate Warranty & ConsumerInformation manual provided with thevehicle. If you're unsure about any serv-icing or maintenance procedure, have itdone by an authorized KIA dealer.

7 5

Maintenance

G030000AUN

The following lists are vehicle checks andinspections that should be performed bythe owner or an authorized KIA dealer atthe frequencies indicated to help ensuresafe, dependable operation of your vehi-cle.Any adverse conditions should bebrought to the attention of your dealer assoon as possible.These Owner Maintenance Checks aregenerally not covered by warranties andyou may be charged for labor, parts andlubricants used.

Owner maintenance schedule G030101AHM

When you stop for fuel:• Check the engine oil level.• Check the coolant level in the coolant

reservoir.• Check the windshield washer fluid

level.• Look for low or under-inflated tires.

WARNING - Maintenancework

• Performing maintenance work ona vehicle can be dangerous. Youcan be seriously injured whileperforming some maintenanceprocedures. If you lack sufficientknowledge and experience or theproper tools and equipment to dothe work, have it done by anauthorized KIA dealer.

• Working under the hood with theengine running is dangerous. Itbecomes even more dangerouswhen you wear jewelry or looseclothing. These can becomeentangled in moving parts andresult in injury. Therefore, if youmust run the engine while work-ing under the hood, make certainthat you remove all jewelry (espe-cially rings, bracelets, watches,and necklaces) and all neckties,scarves, and similar loose cloth-ing before getting near theengine or cooling fans.

OWNER MAINTENANCE

WARNING Be careful when checking yourengine coolant level when theengine is hot. Scalding hot coolantand steam may blow out underpressure. This could cause burnsor other serious injury.

Maintenance

67

G030102AHM

While operating your vehicle:• Note any changes in the sound of the

exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumesin the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steeringwheel. Notice any increased steeringeffort or looseness in the steeringwheel, or change in its straight-aheadposition.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turnsslightly or “pulls” to one side when trav-eling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check forunusual sounds, pulling to one side,increased brake pedal travel or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the oper-ation of your transmission occurs,check the transmission fluid level.

• Check the automatic transmission P(Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle

(water dripping from the air condition-ing system during or after use is nor-mal).

G030103AHM

At least monthly:• Check the coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir.• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the stoplights, turn sig-nals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of alltires including the spare.

G030104AHM

At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall):• Check the radiator, heater and air con-

ditioning hoses for leaks or damage.• Check the windshield washer spray

and wiper operation. Clean the wiperblades with clean cloth dampened withwasher fluid.

• Check the headlight alignment.• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.• Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear

and function.• Check for worn tires and loose wheel

lug nuts.

G030105AHM

At least once a year:• Clean the body and door drain holes.• Lubricate the door hinges and checks,

and hood hinges.• Lubricate the door and hood locks and

latches.• Lubricate the door rubber weather-

strips.• Check the air conditioning system.• Check the power steering fluid level.• Inspect and lubricate the automatic

transmission linkage and controls.• Clean the battery and terminals.• Check the brake fluid level.

7 7

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULEG040100AHM-EC

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Engine control system

Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first

× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Engine oil & engine oil filter (1) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

Drive belts (tension) I I I I

Cooling system hoses & connections I I I I I

Engine coolant (1) I I I I I R I I I I I R I I I I

Fuel filter R R

Fuel tank cap, lines, EVAP canister and hoses I I

Fuel tank air filter I R I R I

Air cleaner element (2) I I I I I R I I I I I R I I I I

Ignition wires I I

Spark plugs (Iridium coated)

PCV valve (if equipped) I I I I

Idle speed I I I I I

Valve clearance (3.8L) I

Replace every 160,000 km

Maintenance

87

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)


× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Air conditioner compressor operation & I I I I I

refrigerant amount (if equipped)

Exhaust pipes, heat shield & mountings I I I I I I I I

Transfer case oil (if equipped) I I I I I

Front and rear differential fluid (if equipped) I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R

Front suspension ball joints I I I I

Brakes fluid (1) I I I I I I I R I I I I I I I R

Front brake pads & discs (3) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Rear brake pads & discs (3) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Parking brake I I I I I I I I

Brake lines & connections I I I I I

(including booster)

Brake pedal free play I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I


MAINTENANCE ITEM

Chassis and body

7 9

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)


× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128

# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64

Automatic transmission fluid (1) I I I I I

Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Tire condition & inflation pressure I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Wheel alignment (4)

Tire rotation

Steering operation & linkage I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Power steering fluid & lines I I I I I I I I

Driveshaft u-joints L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L

Driveshaft dust boots I I I I I

Safety belts, buckles & anchors I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Lock, hinges & hood latch L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L L


MAINTENANCE ITEM

Inspect when abnormal condition noted

Rotate the tires every 12,000 km

Chassis and body (Continued)

Maintenance

107

Chart symbols:I- Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, refill, adjust of replace.R- Replace or changeL- Lubricate.

(1) Refer to the lubricant and coolant specifications in the Owner’s Manual.(2) More frequent maintenance is required if driving under dusty conditions.(3) More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions:

a. Short-distance drivingb. Driving on dusty roadsc. Extensive idling or slow-speed driving in stop-and-go traffic

(4) If necessary, rotate and balance the wheels.

* Note: Check the engine oil and coolant levels every week.

7 11

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMSG050100AHM

Engine oil and filterThe engine oil and filter should bechanged at the intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. If the vehicle isbeing driven in severe conditions, morefrequent oil and filter changes arerequired.

G050200AUN

Drive beltsInspect all drive belts for evidence ofcuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil satu-ration and replace if necessary. Drivebelts should be checked periodically forproper tension and adjusted as neces-sary.

G050300AUN

Fuel filter (cartridge)A clogged filter can limit the speed atwhich the vehicle may be driven, damagethe emission system and cause multipleissues such as hard starting. If an exces-sive amount of foreign matter accumu-lates in the fuel tank, the filter mayrequire replacement more frequently.After installing a new filter, run the enginefor several minutes, and check for leaksat the connections. Fuel filters should beinstalled by an authorized KIA dealer.

G050400AUN-EU

Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nectionsCheck the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nections for leakage and damage. Havean authorized KIA dealer replace anydamaged or leaking parts immediately.

G050600AUN

Vapor hose and fuel filler capThe vapor hose and fuel filler cap shouldbe inspected at those intervals specifiedin the maintenance schedule. Make surethat a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap iscorrectly replaced.

G050700AUN

Vacuum crankcase ventilationhosesInspect the surface of hoses for evidenceof heat and/or mechanical damage. Hardand brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-cate deterioration. Particular attentionshould be paid to examine those hosesurfaces nearest to high heat sources,such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure thatthe hoses do not come in contact withany heat source, sharp edges or movingcomponent which might cause heat dam-age or mechanical wear. Inspect all hoseconnections, such as clamps and cou-plings, to make sure they are secure, andthat no leaks are present. Hoses shouldbe replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.

Maintenance

127

G050800AUN

Air cleaner filterA Genuine KIA air cleaner filter is recom-mended when the filter is replaced.

G050900AUN

Spark plugsMake sure to install new spark plugs ofthe correct heat range.

G051000AHM

Valve clearance (3.8L)Inspect for excessive valve noise and/orengine vibration and adjust if necessary.An authorized KIA dealer should performthe operation.

G051100AHM

Cooling systemCheck the cooling system components,such as the radiator, coolant reservoir,hoses and connections for leakage anddamage. Replace any damaged parts.

G051200AUN

CoolantThe coolant should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenanceschedule.

G051500AUN

Brake hoses and linesVisually check for proper installation,chafing, cracks, deterioration and anyleakage. Replace any deteriorated ordamaged parts immediately.

G051600AHM

Brake fluidCheck the brake fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir. The level should bebetween “MIN” and “MAX” marks on theside of the reservoir. Use only hydraulicbrake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT4 specification.

G051700AUN

Parking brakeInspect the parking brake system includ-ing the parking brake pedal and cables.

G051900AUN

Brake discs, pads, calipers androtorsCheck the pads for excessive wear, discsfor run out and wear, and calipers for fluidleakage.

G052000AUN

Exhaust pipe and mufflerVisually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf-fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,or damage. Start the engine and listencarefully for any exhaust gas leakage.Tighten connections or replace parts asnecessary.

G052100AUN

Suspension mounting boltsCheck the suspension connections forlooseness or damage. Retighten to thespecified torque.

7 13

Maintenance

G052200AUN

Steering gear box, linkage &boots/lower arm ball jointWith the vehicle stopped and engine off,check for excessive free-play in thesteering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or damage.Check the dust boots and ball joints fordeterioration, cracks, or damage.Replace any damaged parts.

G052300AEN

Power steering pump, belt andhosesCheck the power steering pump andhoses for leakage and damage. Replaceany damaged or leaking parts immedi-ately. Inspect the power steering belt (ordrive belt) for evidence of cuts, cracks,excessive wear, oiliness and proper ten-sion. Replace or adjust it if necessary.

G052400AUN

Drive shafts and bootsCheck the drive shafts, boots and clampsfor cracks, deterioration, or damage.Replace any damaged parts and, if nec-essary, repack the grease.

G052500AUN

Air conditioning refrigerant Check the air conditioning lines and con-nections for leakage and damage.

Maintenance

147

ENGINE OIL

G060100AHM-EU

Checking the engine oil level 1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.2. Start the engine and allow it to reach

normal operating temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait for a fewminutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil toreturn to the oil pan.

4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, andre-insert it fully.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and checkthe level. The level should be betweenF and L.

If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bringthe level to F. Do not overfill.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil frombeing spilled on engine components.

Use only the specified engine oil. (Referto “Recommended lubricants and capaci-ties” in section 8.)

WARNING - Radiator hoseBe very careful not to touch theradiator hose when checking oradding the engine oil as it may behot enough to burn you.

CAUTIONDo not overfill with engine oil. Itmay damage the engine.

OHM078002NOHM078001N

7 15

Maintenance

G060200AHM

Changing the engine oil and filterHave engine oil and filter changed by anauthorized KIA dealer according to theMaintenance Schedule at the beginningof this section.

G070000AHM

The high-pressure cooling system has areservoir filled with year round antifreezecoolant. The reservoir is filled at the fac-tory.Check the antifreeze protection andcoolant level at least once a year, at thebeginning of the winter season, andbefore traveling to a colder climate.

G070100AHM

Checking the coolant level

ENGINE COOLANT

WARNING - Removingradiator cap

• Never attempt to remove the radi-ator cap while the engine is oper-ating or hot. Doing so might leadto cooling system and enginedamage. Also, hot coolant orsteam could cause serious per-sonal injury.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Turn the engine off and wait until

it cools down. Use extreme carewhen removing the radiator cap.Wrap a thick towel around it, andturn it counterclockwise slowly tothe first stop. Step back while thepressure is released from thecooling system. When you aresure all the pressure has beenreleased, press down on the cap,using a thick towel, and continueturning counterclockwise toremove it.

• Even if the engine is not operat-ing, do not remove the radiatorcap or the drain plug while theengine and radiator are hot. Hotcoolant and steam may still blowout under pressure, causing seri-ous injury.

WARNINGUsed engine oil may cause skin irri-tation or cancer if left in contactwith the skin for prolonged periodsof time. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancerin laboratory animals. Always pro-tect your skin by washing yourhands thoroughly with soap andwarm water as soon as possibleafter handling used oil.

Maintenance

167

Check the condition and connections ofall cooling system hoses and heaterhoses. Replace any swollen or deterio-rated hoses.The coolant level should be filledbetween F and L marks on the side of thecoolant reservoir when the engine iscool.If the coolant level is low, add enoughspecified coolant to provide protectionagainst freezing and corrosion. Bring thelevel to F, but do not overfill. If frequentadditions are required, see an authorizedKIA dealer for a cooling system inspec-tion.

G070101AHM

Recommended engine coolant• Use only soft (distilled) water in the

coolant mixture.• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must be pro-tected by an ethylene-glycol-basedcoolant to prevent corrosion and freez-ing.

• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanolcoolant or mix them with the specifiedcoolant.

• Do not use a solution that containsmore than 60% antifreeze or less than35% antifreeze, which would reducethe effectiveness of the solution.

For mixture percentage, refer to the fol-lowing table.

-15°C (5°F) 35 65

-25°C (-13°F) 40 60

-35°C (-31°F) 50 50

-45°C (-49°F) 60 40

AmbientTemperature

Mixture Percentage (volume)

Antifreeze Water

OHM078003N

7 17

Maintenance

G070200AHM

Changing the coolantHave coolant changed by an authorizedKIA dealer according to the MaintenanceSchedule at the beginning of this section.

WARNING - Radiator capDo not remove the radiator capwhen the engine and radiator arehot. Scalding hot coolant andsteam may blow out under pres-sure causing serious injury.

CAUTIONPut a thick cloth around the radiatorcap before refilling the coolant inorder to prevent the coolant fromoverflowing into engine parts suchas the alternator.

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility when sprayedon the windshield and may causeloss of vehicle control or damagethe paint and body trim.

OHM078004N

Maintenance

187

BRAKE FLUID

G080100AHM

Checking the brake fluid level Check the fluid level in the reservoir peri-odically. The fluid level should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir.Before removing the reservoir cap andadding brake fluid, clean the area aroundthe reservoir cap thoroughly to preventbrake fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add fluid to the MAXlevel. The level will fall with accumulatedmileage. This is a normal condition asso-ciated with the wear of the brake linings.If the fluid level is excessively low, havethe brake system checked by an author-ized KIA dealer.

Use only the specified brake fluid. (Referto “Recommended lubricants and capac-ities” in section 8.)

Never mix different types of fluid.

WARNING - Brake fluidWhen changing and adding brakefluid, handle it carefully. Do not let itcome in contact with your eyes. Ifbrake fluid should come in contactwith your eyes, immediately flushthem with a large quantity of freshtap water. Have your eyes examinedby a doctor as soon as possible.

WARNING - Loss of brakefluid

In the event the brake systemrequires frequent additions of fluid,the vehicle should be inspected byan authorized KIA dealer.

OHM078005N

CAUTIONDo not allow brake fluid to contactthe vehicle's body paint, as paintdamage will result. Brake fluid,which has been exposed to open airfor an extended time should neverbe used as its quality cannot beguaranteed. It should be disposedof properly. Don't put in the wrongkind of fluid. A few drops of miner-al-based oil, such as engine oil, inyour brake system can damagebrake system parts.

7 19

Maintenance

POWER STEERING FLUID

G090100AHM

Checking the power steering fluidlevel With the vehicle on level ground, checkthe fluid level in the power steering reser-voir periodically. The fluid should bebetween MAX and MIN marks on theside of the reservoir at the normal tem-perature.Before adding power steering fluid, thor-oughly clean the area around the reser-voir cap to prevent power steering fluidcontamination.If the level is low, add fluid to the MAXlevel.

✽✽ NOTICECheck that the fluid level is in the"HOT" range on the reservoir. If thefluid is cold, check that it is in the"COLD" range.

In the event the power steering systemrequires frequent addition of fluid, thevehicle should be inspected by anauthorized KIA dealer.

Use only the specified power steeringfluid. (Refer to "Recommended lubricantsand capacities" in section 8.)

G090200AEN

Checking the power steeringhoseCheck the connections for oil leaks, dam-age and twists in the power steeringhose before driving.

CAUTION• To avoid damage to the power

steering pump, do not operate thevehicle for prolonged periodswith a low power steering fluidlevel.

• Never start the engine when thereservoir tank is empty.

• When adding fluid, be careful thatdirt does not get into the tank.

• Too little fluid can result inincreased steering effort and/ornoise from the power steeringsystem.

• The use of the non-specified fluidcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe power steering system andcause damage to it.

OHM078006N

Maintenance

207

WASHER FLUID

G120100AUN

Checking the washer fluid levelThe reservoir is translucent so that youcan check the level with a quick visualinspection.Check the fluid level in the washer fluidreservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plainwater may be used if washer fluid is notavailable. However, use washer solventwith antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-mates to prevent freezing.

G140100AHM

Checking the parking brake Check whether the stroke is within spec-ification when the parking brake pedal isdepressed with 20 kg (44 lb, 196 N) offorce. Also, the parking brake aloneshould securely hold the vehicle on a fair-ly steep grade. If the stroke is more orless than specified, have the parkingbrake adjusted by an authorized KIAdealer.

Stroke : 4~5 notch

WARNING - Coolant• Do not use radiator coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluidreservoir.

• Radiator coolant can severelyobscure visibility when sprayedon the windshield and may causeloss of vehicle control or damageto paint and body trim.

• Windshield washer fluid agentscontain some amounts of alcoholand can be flammable under cer-tain circumstances. Do not allowsparks or flame to contact thewasher fluid or the washer fluidreservoir. Damage to the vehicleor occupants could occur.

• Windshield washer fluid is poi-sonous to humans and animals.Do not drink and avoid contactingwindshield washer fluid. Seriousinjury or death could occur.

PARKING BRAKE

OHM078007N OHM058021

7 21

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER

G160100AAM-EC

Filter replacementIt must be replaced when necessary, andshould not be washed.You can clean the filter when inspectingthe air cleaner element.Clean the filter by using compressed air.

Replace the filter according to theMaintenance Schedule.If the vehicle is operated in extremelydusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-ment more often than the usual recom-mended intervals.

G170100AHM-EC

Filter inspectionIf the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads fora long period, it should be inspectedmore frequently and replaced earlier.When you replace the climate control airfilter, replace it performing the followingprocedure, and be careful to avoid dam-aging other components.

OHM078009N

CAUTION• Do not drive with the air cleaner

removed; this will result in exces-sive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner fil-ter, be careful that dust or dirtdoes not enter the air intake, ordamage may result.

• Use a KIA genuine part. Use ofnon-genuine parts could damagethe air flow sensor.

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

Maintenance

227

WIPER BLADES

G180100AUN

Blade inspection✽✽ NOTICECommercial hot waxes applied by auto-matic car washes have been known tomake the windshield difficult to clean.

Contamination of either the windshield orthe wiper blades with foreign matter canreduce the effectiveness of the wind-shield wipers. Common sources of con-tamination are insects, tree sap, and hotwax treatments used by some commer-cial car washes. If the blades are not wip-ing properly, clean both the window andthe blades with a good cleaner or milddetergent, and rinse thoroughly withclean water.

G180200AUN

Blade replacement When the wipers no longer clean ade-quately, the blades may be worn orcracked, and require replacement.

1JBA5122CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiperarms or other components, do notattempt to move the wipers manual-ly.

CAUTIONThe use of a non-specified wiperblade could result in wiper malfunc-tion and failure.

7 23

Maintenance

G180201AHM

Front windshield wiper blade1. Raise the wiper arm.

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pulldown the blade assembly and removeit.

3. Install the new blade assembly in thereverse order of removal.

OHM078059 OHM078060 OHM078061

CAUTIONDo not allow the wiper arm to fallagainst the windshield, since it maychip or crack the windshield.

Maintenance

247

G180202AHM

Rear window wiper blade 1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the

wiper blade assembly.

2. Install the new blade assembly byinserting the center part into the slot inthe wiper arm until it clicks into place.

3. Make sure the blade assembly isinstalled firmly by trying to pull it slight-ly.

To prevent damage to the wiper arms orother components, have an authorizedKIA dealer replace the wiper blade.

OHM078062 OED076041

7 25

Maintenance

BATTERY

G190100BHM

For best battery service• Keep the battery securely mounted.• Keep the battery top clean and dry.• Keep the terminals and connections

clean, tight, and coated with petroleumjelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from thebattery immediately with a solution ofwater and baking soda.

• If the vehicle is not going to be used foran extended time, disconnect the bat-tery cables.

OHM078019N

WARNING - Battery dangers

Always read the followinginstructions carefully whenhandling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes andall other flames or sparksaway from the battery.

Hydrogen, a highly com-bustible gas, is alwayspresent in battery cells andmay explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of thereach of children becausebatteries contain highlycorrosive SULFURIC ACID.Do not allow battery acid tocontact your skin, eyes,clothing or paint finish.

(Continued)

(Continued)

If any electrolyte gets intoyour eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water for at least15 minutes and get immedi-ate medical attention.If electrolyte gets on yourskin, thoroughly wash thecontacted area. If you feelpain or burning sensation,get medical attention imme-diately.

Wear eye protection whencharging or working near abattery. Always provideventilation when working inan enclosed space.

An inappropriately dis-posed battery can be harm-ful to the environment andhuman health. Dispose thebattery according to yourlocal law(s) or regulation.

(Continued)

Maintenance

267

G190200AUN

Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,calcium-based battery.• If the battery becomes discharged in a

short time (because, for example, theheadlights or interior lights were left onwhile the vehicle was not in use),recharge it by slow charging (trickle)for 10 hours.

• If the battery gradually dischargesbecause of high electric load while thevehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.

(Continued)• When lifting a plastic-cased bat-

tery, excessive pressure on thecase may cause battery acid toleak, resulting in personal injury.Lift with a battery carrier or withyour hands on opposite corners.

• Never attempt to recharge thebattery when the battery cablesare connected.

• The electrical ignition systemworks with high voltage. Nevertouch these components with theengine running or the ignitionswitched on.

Failure to follow the above warn-ings can result in serious bodilyinjury or death.

WARNING - Rechargingbattery

When recharging the battery,observe the following precautions:• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in anarea with good ventilation.

• Do not allow cigarettes, sparks,or flame near the battery.

• Watch the battery during charg-ing, and stop or reduce the charg-ing rate if the battery cells begingassing (boiling) violently or ifthe temperature of the electrolyteof any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F).

• Wear eye protection when check-ing the battery during charging.

• Disconnect the battery charger inthe following order.

1. Turn off the battery charger mainswitch.

2. Unhook the negative clamp fromthe negative battery terminal.

3. Unhook the positive clamp fromthe positive battery terminal.

7 27

Maintenance

G190300AHM

Reset itemsItems should be reset after the batteryhas been discharged or the battery hasbeen disconnected.• Auto up/down window (See section 4)• Sunroof (See section 4)• Driver position memory system

(See section 4)• Trip computer (See section 4)• Climate control system

(See section 4)• Clock (See section 4)• Audio (See section 4)

WARNING• Before performing maintenance

or recharging the battery, turn offall accessories and stop theengine.

• The negative battery cable mustbe removed first and installedlast when the battery is discon-nected.

Maintenance

287

CAUTION• Underinflation also results in

excessive wear, poor handlingand reduced fuel economy.Wheel deformation also ispossible. Keep your tire pres-sures at the proper levels. If atire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by an author-ized KIA dealer.

• Overinflation produces aharsh ride, excessive wear atthe center of the tire tread, anda greater possibility of dam-age from road hazards.

TIRES AND WHEELSG200100AUN

Tire care For proper maintenance, safety, andmaximum fuel economy, you mustalways maintain recommended tireinflation pressures and stay withinthe load limits and weight distributionrecommended for your vehicle.

G200200AUN-EU

Recommended cold tire inflationpressuresAll tire pressures (including thespare) should be checked when thetires are cold. “Cold Tires” means thevehicle has not been driven for atleast three hours or driven less than1.6 km (one mile).Recommended pressures must bemaintained for the best ride, vehiclehandling, and minimum tire wear.For recommended inflation pressure,refer to “Tire and wheels” in section8.

All specifications (sizes and pres-sures) can be found on a labelattached to the driver’s side centerpillar.

WARNING - Tire under-inflation

Severe underinflation can leadto severe heat build-up, causingblowouts, tread separation andother tire failures that can resultin the loss of vehicle controlleading to severe injury ordeath. This risk is much higheron hot days and when drivingfor long periods at high speeds.

OHM088005N

7 29

Maintenance

G200300AUN

Checking tire inflation pressureCheck your tires once a month ormore.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

G200301AUN

How to checkUse a good quality gage to check tirepressure.You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by look-ing at them. Radial tires may lookproperly inflated even when they'reunderinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. - "Cold"means your vehicle has been sittingfor at least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).

WARNING - Tire InflationOverinflation or underinflationcan reduce tire life, adverselyaffect vehicle handling, andlead to sudden tire failure. Thiscould result in loss of vehiclecontrol and potential injury.

CAUTION - Tire pressureAlways observe the following:• Check tire pressure when the

tires are cold. (After vehiclehas been parked for at leastthree hours or hasn't beendriven more than 1.6 km (onemile) since startup.)

• Check the pressure of yourspare tire each time you checkthe pressure of other tires.

• Never overload your vehicle.Be careful not to overload avehicle luggage rack if yourvehicle is equipped with one.

• Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badlyworn, or if your tires havebeen damaged, replace them.

CAUTION• Warm tires normally exceed

recommended cold tire pres-sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6psi). Do not release air fromwarm tires to adjust the pres-sure or the tires will be under-inflated.

• Be sure to reinstall the tireinflation valve caps. Withoutthe valve cap, dirt or moisturecould get into the valve coreand cause air leakage. If avalve cap is missing, install anew one as soon as possible.

Maintenance

307

Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gage firm-ly onto the valve to get a pressuremeasurement. If the cold tire inflationpressure matches the recommendedpressure on the tire and loadinginformation label, no further adjust-ment is necessary. If the pressure islow, add air until you reach the rec-ommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in thecenter of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gage. Besure to put the valve caps back onthe valve stems. They help preventleaks by keeping out dirt and mois-ture.

G200400AUN

Tire rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recom-mended that the tires be rotatedevery 12,000 km (7,500 miles) orsooner if irregular wear develops.During rotation, check the tires forcorrect balance.When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out-of-balance wheels, severe braking orsevere cornering. Look for bumps orbulges in the tread or side of tire.Replace the tire if you find either ofthese conditions. Replace the tire iffabric or cord is visible. After rotation,be sure to bring the front and rear tirepressures to specification and checklug nut tightness.Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section8.

WARNING• Inspect your tires frequently

for proper inflation as well aswear and damage. Always usea tire pressure gauge.

• Tires with too much or too littlepressure wear unevenly caus-ing poor handling, loss of vehi-cle control, and sudden tirefailure leading to accidents,injuries, and even death. Therecommended cold tire pres-sure for your vehicle can befound in this manual and onthe tire label located on the dri-ver's side center pillar.

• Worn tires can cause acci-dents. Replace tires that areworn, show uneven wear, orare damaged.

• Remember to check the pres-sure of your spare tire. KIArecommends that you checkthe spare every time youcheck the pressure of theother tires on your vehicle.

7 31

Maintenance

Disc brake pads should be inspectedfor wear whenever tires are rotated.

✽✽ NOTICERotate radial tires that have anasymmetric tread pattern only fromfront to rear and not from right toleft.

G200500AUN

Wheel alignment and tire balance The wheels on your vehicle werealigned and balanced carefully at thefactory to give you the longest tire lifeand best overall performance.In most cases, you will not need tohave your wheels aligned again.However, if you notice unusual tirewear or your vehicle pulling one wayor the other, the alignment may needto be reset.If you notice your vehicle vibratingwhen driving on a smooth road, yourwheels may need to be rebalanced.

S2BLA790A

CBGQ0707A

Without a spare tire

Directional tires (if equipped)WARNING

• Do not use the compact sparetire (if equipped) for tire rota-tion.

• Do not mix bias ply and radialply tires under any circum-stances. This may causeunusual handling characteris-tics that could result in death,severe injury, or propertydamage.

CAUTIONImproper wheel weights candamage your vehicle's alu-minum wheels. Use onlyapproved wheel weights.

Maintenance

327

G200600AHM-EU

Tire replacementIf the tire is worn evenly, a tread wearindicator will appear as a solid bandacross the tread. This shows there isless than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of treadleft on the tire. Replace the tire whenthis happens.Do not wait for the band to appearacross the entire tread before replac-ing the tire.

OEN076053

Tread wear indicator WARNING - Replacingtires

To reduce the chance of seriousor fatal injuries from an acci-dent caused by tire failure orloss of vehicle control:• Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or aredamaged. Worn tires cancause loss of braking effec-tiveness, steering control, andtraction.

• Do not drive your vehicle withtoo little or too much pressurein your tires. This can lead touneven wear and tire failure.

• When replacing tires, nevermix radial and bias-ply tireson the same car. You mustreplace all tires (including thespare) if moving from radial tobias-ply tires.

(Continued)

(Continued)• Using tires and wheels other

than the recommended sizescould cause unusual handlingcharacteristics and poor vehi-cle control, resulting in a seri-ous accident.

• Wheels that do not meet KIA’sspecifications may fit poorlyand result in damage to thevehicle or unusual handlingand poor vehicle control.

• The ABS works by comparingthe speed of the wheels. Thetire size affects wheel speed.When replacing tires, all 4tires must use the same sizeoriginally supplied with thevehicle. Using tires of a differ-ent size can cause the ABS(Anti-lock Brake System) andESC (Electronic StabilityControl) to work irregularly.

7 33

Maintenance

G200601AUN

Compact spare tire replacement (if equipped)A compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular size tire.Replace it when you can see thetread wear indicator bars on the tire.The replacement compact spare tireshould be the same size and designtire as the one provided with yournew vehicle and should be mountedon the same compact spare tirewheel. The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularsize wheel, and the compact sparetire wheel is not designed for mount-ing a regular size tire.

G200700BHM-EC

Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels forany reason, make sure the newwheels are equivalent to the originalfactory units in diameter, rim widthand offset.

G200800AHM

Tire tractionTire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that areimproperly inflated or on slipperyroad surfaces. Tires should bereplaced when tread wear indicatorsappear. Slow down whenever thereis rain, snow or ice on the road toreduce the possibility of losing con-trol of the vehicle.

G200900AUN

Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decreasetire wear. If you find a tire is wornunevenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignment.When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. Thiswill increase vehicle ride comfort andtire life. Additionally, a tire shouldalways be rebalanced if it is removedfrom the wheel.

WARNINGA wheel that is not the correctsize may adversely affect wheeland bearing life, braking andstopping abilities, handlingcharacteristics, ground clear-ance, body-to-tire clearance,speedometer and odometer cal-ibration, headlight aim andbumper height.

Maintenance

347

G201000AUN

Tire sidewall labelingThis information identifies anddescribes the fundamental charac-teristics of the tire and also providesthe tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. TheTIN can be used to identify the tire incase of a recall.

G201001AUN

1. Manufacturer or brand nameManufacturer or Brand name isshown.

G201002AHM

2. Tire size designation A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tiresize designation. You will need thisinformation when selecting replace-ment tires for your vehicle. The fol-lowing explains what the letters andnumbers in the tire size designationmean.Example tire size designation:(These numbers are provided as anexample only; your tire size designa-tor could vary depending on yourvehicle.)P245/70R17 108T

P - Applicable vehicle type (tiresmarked with the prefix “P’’ areintended for use on passengervehicles or light trucks; however,not all tires have this marking).

245 - Tire width in millimeters.70 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of itswidth.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).17 - Rim diameter in inches.

108 - Load Index, a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry.

T - Speed Rating Symbol. See thespeed rating chart in this sectionfor additional information.

Wheel size designation Wheels are also marked with impor-tant information that you need if youever have to replace one. The follow-ing explains what the letters andnumbers in the wheel size designa-tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:7.0JX17

7.0 - Rim width in inches.J - Rim contour designation.17 - Rim diameter in inches.

I030B04JM

1

1

23

4

5,6

7

7 35

Maintenance

Tire speed ratings The chart below lists many of the dif-ferent speed ratings currently beingused for passenger car tires. Thespeed rating is part of the tire sizedesignation on the sidewall of thetire. This symbol corresponds to thattire's designed maximum safe oper-ating speed.

G201003AHM

3. Checking tire life (TIN : TireIdentification Number)

Any tires that are over 6 years old,based on the manufacturing date,(including the spare tire) should bereplaced by new ones. You can findthe manufacturing date on the tiresidewall (possibly on the inside of thewheel), displaying the DOT Code.The DOT Code is a series of num-bers on a tire consisting of numbersand English letters. The manufactur-ing date is designated by the last fourdigits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOOThe front part of the DOT means aplant code number, tire size andtread pattern and the last four num-bers indicate week and year manu-factured.For example:DOT XXXX XXXX 1608 representsthat the tire was produced in the 16thweek of 2008.

WARNING - Tire ageTires degrade over time, evenwhen they are not being used.Regardless of the remainingtread, we recommend that tiresbe replaced after approximatelysix (6) years of normal service.Heat caused by hot climates orfrequent high loading condi-tions can accelerate the agingprocess. Failure to follow thiswarning can result in suddentire failure, which could lead toa loss of control and an acci-dent involving serious injury ordeath.

S 180 km/h (112 mph)T 190 km/h (118 mph)H 210 km/h (130 mph)V 240 km/h (149 mph)Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)

Maximum SpeedSpeedRatingSymbol

Maintenance

367

G201004AEN

4. Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies of rub-ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate thematerials in the tire, which includesteel, nylon, polyester, and others.The letter "R" means radial ply con-struction; the letter "D" means diago-nal or bias ply construction; and theletter "B" means belted-bias ply con-struction.

G201005AUN

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressure

This number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflationpressure.

G201006AUN

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

G2010007AHM

7. Uniform tire quality gradingQuality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder and maxi-mum section width.For example:TREADWEAR 200TRACTION AATEMPERATURE A

Tread wearThe tread wear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified govern-ment test course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times (1½) as well on the gov-ernment course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditionsof their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.These grades are molded on theside-walls of passenger vehicle tires.The tires available as standard oroptional equipment on your vehiclemay vary with respect to grade.

7 37

Maintenance

Traction - AA, A, B & C The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on spec-ified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction perform-ance.

Temperature -A, B & C The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B and C representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled condi-tions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel.Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of perform-ance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

WARNING - Tire temperature

The temperature grade for thistire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible suddentire failure. This can cause lossof vehicle control and seriousinjury or death.

WARNING The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include accelera-tion, cornering, hydroplaning,or peak traction characteristics.

Maintenance

387

G201100AHM-EC

Tire terminology and definitionsAir Pressure: The amount of airinside the tire pressing outward onthe tire. Air pressure is expressed inkilopascal (kPa) or pounds persquare inch (psi).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional acces-sories. Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatic transmis-sion, power seats, and air condition-ing.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cordsthat is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords thathold the tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount ofair pressure in a tire, measured inkilopascals (kPa) or pounds persquare inch (psi) before a tire hasbuilt up heat from driving.Curb Weight: This means the weightof a motor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant, but without passengers andcargo.DOT Markings: The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric des-ignator which can also identify thetire manufacturer, production plant,brand and date of production.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the Front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire, thatmust always face outward whenmounted on a vehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned numberranging from 1 to 279 that corre-sponds to the load carrying capacityof a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which acold tire may be inflated. The maxi-mum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The loadrating for a tire at the maximum per-missible inflation pressure for thattire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicle isdesigned to seat multiplied by 68 kg(150 pounds).

7 39

Maintenance

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The sideof a asymmetrical tire that has a par-ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The outwardfacing sidewall bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings onthe inner facing sidewall.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tireused on passenger cars and somelight duty trucks and multipurposevehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-ed tire inflation pressure and shownon the tire placard.Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire andupon which the tire beads are seat-ed.Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumericcode assigned to a tire indicating themaximum speed at which a tire canoperate.Traction: The friction between thetire and the road surface. Theamount of grip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called "wearbars," that show across the tread of atire when only 2/32 inch of treadremains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards, a tire informationsystem that provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction, tempera-ture and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturersusing government testing proce-dures. The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 68 kg. (150 lbs) plus therated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tire due tocurb and accessory weight plusmaximum occupant and cargoweight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,accessory weight, and normal occu-pant weight and driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-ly attached to a vehicle showing theoriginal equipment tire size and rec-ommended inflation pressure.

Maintenance

407

All season tires KIA specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good per-formance for use all year round,including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All season tires are identifiedby ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mudand Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snowtires have better snow traction thanall season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires KIA specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior perform-ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-formance is substantially reduced insnow and ice. Summer tires do nothave the tire traction rating M+S(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.if you plan to operate your vehicle insnowy or icy conditions. KIA recom-mends the use of snow tires or allseason tires on all four wheels.

Snow tiresIf you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size andhave the same load capacity as theoriginal tires. Snow tires should beinstalled on all four wheels; other-wise, poor handling may result.Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4psi) more air pressure than the pres-sure recommended for the standardtires on the tire label on the driver'sside of the center pillar, or up to themaximum pressure shown on the tiresidewall, whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75mph) when your vehicle is equippedwith snow tires.

Radial-ply tiresRadial-ply tires provide improvedtread life, road hazard resistance andsmoother high speed ride. The radi-al-ply tires used on this vehicle are ofbelted construction, and are selectedto complement the ride and handlingcharacteristics of your vehicle.Radial-ply tires have the same loadcarrying capacity, as bias-ply or biasbelted tires of the same size, and usethe same recommended inflationpressure. Mixing of radial-ply tireswith bias-ply or bias belted tires isnot recommended. Any combina-tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or biasbelted tires when used on the samevehicle will seriously deterioratevehicle handling. The best rule to fol-low is: Identical radial-ply tires shouldalways be used as a set of four.

7 41

Maintenance

Longer wearing tires can be moresusceptible to irregular tread wear. Itis very important to follow the tirerotation interval shown in this sectionto achieve the tread life potential ofthese tires. Cuts and punctures inradial-ply tires are repairable only inthe tread area, because of sidewallflexing. Consult your tire dealer forradial-ply tire repairs.

Maintenance

427

FUSES

G210000AHM

A vehicle’s electrical system is protectedfrom electrical overload damage byfuses.

This vehicle has 5 fuse panels, one locat-ed in the driver’s side panel bolster, theothers in the engine compartment andluggage compartment.If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-sories, or controls do not work, check theappropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse hasblown, the element inside the fuse willmelt.If the electrical system does not work,first check the driver’s side fuse panel.Always replace a blown fuse with one ofthe same rating.If the replacement fuse blows, this indi-cates an electrical problem. Avoid usingthe system involved and immediatelyconsult an authorized KIA dealer.Three kinds of fuses are used: blade typefor lower amperage rating, cartridge type,and fusible link for higher amperage rat-ings.

1VQA4037

Normal

Normal

Blade type

Cartridge type

Fusible link

Blown

Blown

Normal Blown

WARNING - Fuse replace-ment

• Never replace a fuse with any-thing but another fuse of thesame rating.

• A higher capacity fuse couldcause damage and possibly afire.

• Never install a wire instead of theproper fuse - even as a temporaryrepair. It may cause extensivewiring damage and a possible fire.

CAUTIONDo not use a screwdriver or anyother metal object to remove fusesbecause it may cause a short circuitand damage the system.

7 43

Maintenance

G210100AHM

Inner panel fuse replacement1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.2. Open the fuse panel cover.

3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out.Use the removal tool provided in themain fuse box in the engine compart-ment.

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if itis blown.Spare fuses are provided in the instru-ment panel fuse panel (or in the enginecompartment fuse panel).

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.

If it fits loosely, consult an authorized KIAdealer.If you do not have a spare, use a fuse ofthe same rating from a circuit you maynot need for operating the vehicle, suchas the cigarette lighter fuse.

If the headlights or other electrical com-ponents do not work and the fuses areOK, check the fuse panel in the enginecompartment. If a fuse is blown, it mustbe replaced.

OHM078022

OHM078021

OHM078057

■ Front

■ Rear

Maintenance

447

G210101AHM

Memory fuse (SHUNT connector)Your vehicle is equipped with a memoryfuse (SHUNT connector) to prevent bat-tery discharge if your vehicle is parkedwithout being operated for prolongedperiods. Use the following proceduresbefore parking the vehicle for prolongedperiods.1. Turn off the engine.2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and

pull out the memory fuse (SHUNTconnector).

✽✽ NOTICE• If the memory fuse is pulled out from

the fuse panel, the warning chime,audio, clock and interior lamps, etc.,will not operate. Some items must bereset after replacement. Refer to“Battery” in this section.

• Even though the memory fuse ispulled out, the battery can still be dis-charged by operation of the head-lights or other electrical devices.

G210200AHM

Engine compartment fusereplacement1. Turn the ignition switch and all other

switches off.2. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling the coverup.

OHM078023

OHM078024N

OHM078025N

7 45

Maintenance

3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if itis blown. To remove or insert the fuse,use the fuse puller in the engine com-partment fuse panel.

4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating,and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.If it fits loosely, consult an authorizedKIA dealer.

G210201AUN

Main fuseIf the main fuse is blown, it must beremoved as follows:1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.2. Remove the nuts shown in the picture

above.3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the

same rating.4. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

✽✽ NOTICEIf the main fuse is blown, consult anauthorized KIA dealer.

CAUTIONAfter checking the fuse panel in theengine compartment, securelyinstall the fuse panel cover. If not,electrical failures may occur fromwater contact.

OHM078026L

Maintenance

467

✽✽ NOTICENot all fuse panel descriptions in thismanual may be applicable to your vehi-cle. It is accurate at the time of printing.When you inspect the fuse panel in yourvehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

G210300AHM-EU

Fuse/relay panel descriptionInside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

Inner fuse panel Engine compartment fuse panel

OHM078027/OHM078043N/OHM078028N/OHM078029N

7 47

Maintenance

Inner fuse panel (Instrument panel)

Description Fuse rating Protected componentAUDIO 15A Audio, Rear Monitor, RSE Control Box, DVD Player Can

MEMORY 7.5AFront A/C Control Module, Rear A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster (IND.), RF Receiver, FAM, RAM, DriverDoor Module, Assistant Door Module, Tilt & Telescopic Module, IMS Control ModuleFront A/C Control Module, Incar Temperature Sensor, PDM, Multifunction Switch (Wiper/Washer),

IG2-1 7.5A Driver/Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Front Blower Relay, Electro Chromic Mirror, Rear Blower Relay,AC Inverter Switch, Trailer Relay, C/FAN HI/LOW Relay

IG2-2 7.5ARear A/C Control Module, Driver Door Module, FAM, Assistant Door Module, IMS Control Module,Tilt & Telescopic Module

OBD-II 7.5AStart Stop Button Switch, Data Link Connector, PDM, Multipurpose Check Connector,Smart Key Control Module, Fob Holder

ROOM 7.5AElectronic Chrome Mirror, Map Lamp, Vanity Lamp Switch LH/RH, Front/Rear A/C Control Module,Center Room Lamp, Rear Room Lamp

KEY LOCK 7.5A Sport Mode Switch, Ignition Lock SwitchILLUMI 7.5A IPMRR S/WARMER 20A Rear Seat Warmer RelayFRT S/WARMER 20A Driver Seat Warmer Module, Passenger Seat Warmer ModuleSUNROOF 25A Sunroof ModuleTPMS 7.5A Tire Pressure Monitoring ModulePEDAL 15A Adjustable Pedal RelayF/PWR OUTLET 15A Front Power OutletS/TILT & TELE 20A Tilt & Telescopic ModulePASS P/SEAT 20A Passenger Power Seat SwitchDRIVER P/SEAT 30A Driver Power Seat Switch, Lumbar Support Switch, IMS Control ModuleACC 7.5A Audio, Front A/C Control Module, Rear monitor, RSE Control Box, Smart Key Control Module, DVD Player Can

Maintenance

487

Description Fuse rating Protected componentSTART 7.5A Burglar Alarm Relay, Start RelayAIR BAG IND. 7.5A Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND.)

ABS 7.5AABS Control Module, ESC Control Module, DBC Relay, Steering Angle Sensor, Crash Pad Switch LH,Smart Key Control Module, Rear Parking Assist Control ModuleRheostat, Instrument Cluster (MICOM), Multifunction Switch (Cruise Remocon), Generator,

IGN 1 7.5A Rear Parking Assist Buzzer, Rear Parking Assist Switch, Audio, PODS Module,Tire Pressure Monitoring Module

ENG 7.5AMultipurpose Check Connector, ECM, TCM, Front Wiper Motor, 4WD ECM, Stop Lamp Switch,Free Running Differential Air Pump, Generator (G8BA)

AIR BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Telltale LampDDM 30A Driver Door Module, Driver Safety Power Window MotorADM 30A Assistant Door Module, Passenger Safety Power Window Motor

7 49

Maintenance

Inner fuse panel (Luggage compartment)

FUSE Fuse rating Circuit ProtectedRR DEFOG 25A RR Defog Relay, Rear Defogger (+)T/G POWER LATCH 30A Tail Gate Control ModuleRR WIPER 15A Rear Wiper Motor Relay (+), Rear Wiper MotorDOOR LOCK 15A Rear Door Lock Actuator LH/RH, Rear Door Lock/Unlock RelayCTR P/OUT 15A Console Power OutletRR P/OUT 15A Rear Power OutletFUEL DR 15A Fuel Door Relay, Fuel Filler Door ActuatorTRAILER3 15A Tail Lamp Converter (Back up)RR P/WIN-LH 20A Rear Power Window Relay LH(UP/DH), Rear Power Window Motor LHRR P/WIN-RH 20A Rear Power Window Relay RH(UP/DH), Rear Power Window Motor RH(DN)LUGGAGE 7.5A Luggage LampAMP 30A AMPTRAILER2 30A Tail Lamp Converter (Tail)

Maintenance

507

Engine compartment main fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected componentFRT/RR WASHER 10A Front/Rear Washer Motor Relay, Washer MotorTRAILER 5 15A Tail Lamp Converter (Turn/Stop)STOP LAMP 20A Stop Lamp Switch, DBC RelayKEY SW 1 25A Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG1 Relay , ACC Relay)STOP SIGNAL 7.5A ABS Control Module, ESC Control Module, ECM, Smart Key Control ModuleA/C COMP 7.5A A/C Comp RelayFRT DEICER 15A Front Deicer RelayHORN 15A Horn RelayECU 1 10A ECM, Mass Air Flow Sensor, Immobilizer Module, A/C Comp RelayO2 DN 10A Oxygen Sensor #3,#4ECU 2 15A Oil Control Valve, ECM, Variable Intake Manifold Valve, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Canister Close ValveO2 UP 10A Oxygen Sensor #1,#2IGN COIL 20A Ignition Coil #1~#8, Condenser #1,#2INJECTOR 15A ECM, Injector #1~#8, Camshaft Position Sensor #1 ~ #3 (G8BA)P/TRAIN 7.5A ECM, Main Relay, Relay Box(Burglar Horn Relay), Generator (G8BA)FUEL PUMP 15A Fuel Pump Relay, Fuel Sender & Fuel Pump MotorATM 15A TCM

7 51

Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected componentABS 2 40A ABS Control ModuleABS 1 40A ABS Control ModulePDM 20A PDMFRT WIPER 30A Front Wiper ON Relay, Front Wiper HI/LO RelayKEY SW 2 30A Start Relay #1, Ignition Switch, PDM Relay Box (IG2 Relay)

RAM 1 50ARAM(CTR P/OUT FUSE 15A, RR P/OUT FUSE 15A, FUEL DR FUSE 15A, RR P/WIN-LH FUSE 20A,RR P/WIN-RH FUSE 20A, LUGGAGE FUSE 7.5A)

RAM 2 50ARAM(RR DEFOG FUSE 25A, T/G POWER LATCH FUSIBLE LINK 30A, DOOR LOCK FUSE 15A,RR WIPER FUSE 15A)

RAM 3 50A RAM (AMP FUSIBLE LIMK 30A TRAILER 2 FUSIBLE LINK 30A)

IPM 1 50AIPM (ILLUMI FUSE 7.5A, DDM FUSIBLE LINK 30A, FRT S/WARMER FUSE 20A, OBD-II FUSE 7.5A,SUNROOF FUSE 25A, KEY LOCK FUSE 7.5A)

IPM 2 50A IPM (ADM FUSIBLE LINK 30A, F/PWR OUTLET FUSE 15A, PEDAL FUSE 15A, S/TILT & TELE FUSE 20A)

IPM 3 50AIPM (MEMORY FUSE 7.5A, DRIVER P/SEAT FUSE 30A, PASS P/SEAT FUSE 20A,RR S/WARMER FUSE 20A, ROOM FUSE 7.5A, AUDIO FUSE 15A)

4WD 30A 4WD ECMAC 110V 30A AC inverter module

Maintenance

527

Engine compartment sub fuse panel

Description Fuse rating Protected componentC/FAN LOW 30A C/Fan Low RelayE/BRAKE 30A Trailer Electric BrakeFRONT BLOWER 40A Front Blower RelayREAR BLOWER 30A Rear Blower RelayC/FAN HI 60A C/Fan Hi RelayTRAILER 1 30A Trailer Relay

7 53

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CAREExterior careG230101AUN

Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the labeldirections when using any chemicalcleaner or polish. Read all warning andcaution statements that appear on thelabel.

G230102BUN

Finish maintenanceWashing To help protect your vehicle’s finish fromrust and deterioration, wash it thoroughlyand frequently at least once a month withlukewarm or cold water.If you use your vehicle for off-road driv-ing, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to theremoval of any accumulation of salt, dirt,mud, and other foreign materials. Makesure the drain holes in the lower edges ofthe doors and rocker panels are keptclear and clean.Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,industrial pollution and similar depositscan damage your vehicle’s finish if notremoved immediately.Even prompt washing with plain watermay not completely remove all thesedeposits. A mild soap, safe for use onpainted surfaces, may be used.After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Donot allow soap to dry on the finish.

CAUTIONDo not use strong soap, chemicaldetergents or hot water, and do notwash the vehicle in direct sunlightor when the body of the vehicle iswarm.

WARNING - Wet brakesAfter washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.

Maintenance

547

WaxingWax the vehicle when water will nolonger bead on the paint.Always wash and dry the vehicle beforewaxing. Use a good quality liquid orpaste wax, and follow the manufacturer’sinstructions. Wax all metal trim to protectit and to maintain its luster.Removing oil, tar, and similar materialswith a spot remover will usually strip thewax from the finish. Be sure to re-waxthese areas even if the rest of the vehicledoes not yet need waxing.

G230103AUN

Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in thepainted surface must be repairedpromptly. Exposed metal will quickly rustand may develop into a major repairexpense.

✽✽ NOTICEIf your vehicle is damaged and requiresany metal repair or replacement, be surethe body shop applies anti-corrosionmaterials to the parts repaired orreplaced.

G230104AUN

Bright-metal maintenance• To remove road tar and insects, use a

tar remover, not a scraper or othersharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-metalparts from corrosion, apply a coating ofwax or chrome preservative and rub toa high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastalareas, cover the bright metal parts witha heavier coating of wax or preserva-tive. If necessary, coat the parts withnon-corrosive petroleum jelly or otherprotective compound.

CAUTION• Water washing in the engine com-

partment including high pressurewater washing may cause the fail-ure of electrical circuits located inthe engine compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquidsto come in contact with electri-cal/electronic components insidethe vehicle as this may damagethem.

CAUTION• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch thefinish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasivecleaners, or strong detergentscontaining highly alkaline orcaustic agents on chrome-platedor anodized aluminum parts. Thismay result in damage to the pro-tective coating and cause discol-oration or paint deterioration.

OJB037800

7 55

Maintenance

G230105ASA

Underbody maintenanceCorrosive materials used for ice andsnow removal and dust control may col-lect on the underbody. If these materialsare not removed, accelerated rusting canoccur on underbody parts such as thefuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaustsystem, even though they have beentreated with rust protection.Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbodyand wheel openings with lukewarm orcold water once a month, after off-roaddriving and at the end of each winter. Payspecial attention to these areas becauseit is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. Itwill do more harm than good to wet downthe road grime without removing it. Thelower edges of the doors, rocker panels,and frame members have drain holesthat should not be allowed to clog withdirt; trapped water in these areas cancause rusting.

G230106AHM

Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coated with aclear protective finish.• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or wirebrushes on aluminum wheels. Theymay scratch or damage the finish.

• Use only mild soap or neutral deter-gent, and rinse thoroughly with water.Also, be sure to clean the wheels afterdriving on salted roads. This helps pre-vent corrosion.

• Avoid washing the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any cleaners containingacid or acid detergents. It may damageand corrode the aluminum wheelscoated with a clear protective finish.

WARNINGAfter washing the vehicle, test thebrakes while driving slowly to see ifthey have been affected by water. Ifbraking performance is impaired,dry the brakes by applying themlightly while maintaining a slow for-ward speed.

Maintenance

567

G230107AHM

Corrosion protectionProtecting your vehicle from corrosionBy using the most advanced design andconstruction practices to combat corro-sion, we produce vehicles of the highestquality. However, this is only part of thejob. To achieve the long-term corrosionresistance your vehicle can deliver, theowner's cooperation and assistance isalso required.

Common causes of corrosionThe most common causes of corrosionon your vehicle are:• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath thevehicle.

• Removal of paint or protective coatingsby stones, gravel, abrasion or minorscrapes and dents which leave unpro-tected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areasIf you live in an area where your vehicleis regularly exposed to corrosive materi-als, corrosion protection is particularlyimportant. Some of the common causesof accelerated corrosion are road salts,dust control chemicals, ocean air andindustrial pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosionMoisture creates the conditions in whichcorrosion is most likely to occur. Forexample, corrosion is accelerated byhigh humidity, particularly when tempera-tures are just above freezing. In suchconditions, the corrosive material is keptin contact with the vehicle’s surface bymoisture that evaporate slowly.Mud is particularly corrosive because itdries slowly and holds moisture in con-tact with the vehicle. Although the mudappears to be dry, it can still retain themoisture and promote corrosion.High temperatures can also acceleratecorrosion of parts that are not properlyventilated so the moisture can be dis-persed. For all these reasons, it is par-ticularly important to keep your vehicleclean and free of mud or accumulationsof other materials. This applies not onlyto the visible surfaces but particularly tothe underside of the vehicle.

7 57

Maintenance

To help prevent corrosionYou can help prevent corrosion from get-ting started by observing the following:

Keep your vehicle cleanThe best way to prevent corrosion is tokeep your vehicle clean and free of cor-rosive materials. Attention to the under-side of the vehicle is particularly impor-tant.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area —where road salts are used, near theocean, areas with industrial pollution,acid rain, etc.—, you should take extracare to prevent corrosion. In winter,hose off the underside of your vehicleat least once a month and be sure toclean the underside thoroughly whenwinter is over.

• When cleaning underneath the vehicle,give particular attention to the compo-nents under the fenders and otherareas that are hidden from view. Do athorough job; just dampening the accu-mulated mud rather than washing itaway will accelerate corrosion ratherthan prevent it. Water under high pres-sure and steam are particularly effec-tive in removing accumulated mud andcorrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame members, besure that drain holes are kept open sothat moisture can escape and not betrapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dryDon't park your vehicle in a damp, poorlyventilated garage. This creates a favor-able environment for corrosion. This isparticularly true if you wash your vehiclein the garage or drive it into the garagewhen it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage cancontribute to corrosion unless it is wellventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good conditionScratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon aspossible to reduce the possibility of cor-rosion. If bare metal is showing through,the attention of a qualified body and paintshop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are high-ly corrosive and may damage paintedsurfaces in just a few hours. Alwaysremove bird droppings as soon as possi-ble.

Don't neglect the interiorMoisture can collect under the floor matsand carpeting and cause corrosion.Check under the mats periodically to besure the carpeting is dry. Use particularcare if you carry fertilizers, cleaningmaterials or chemicals in the vehicle.These should be carried only in propercontainers and any spills or leaks shouldbe cleaned up, flushed with clean waterand thoroughly dried.

Maintenance

587

Interior careG230201AHM

Interior general precautions Prevent caustic solutions such as per-fume and cosmetic oil from contactingthe dashboard because they may causedamage or discoloration. If they do con-tact the dashboard, wipe them off imme-diately. See the instructions for the prop-er way to clean vinyl.

G230202AUN

Cleaning the upholstery and interiortrim Vinyl Remove dust and loose dirt from vinylwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt from fabricwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean with a mild soap solution recom-mended for upholstery or carpets.Remove fresh spots immediately with afabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do notreceive immediate attention, the fabriccan be stained and its color can beaffected. Also, its fire-resistant propertiescan be reduced if the material is notproperly maintained.

G230203AUN

Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt web-bing Clean the belt webbing with any mildsoap solution recommended for cleaningupholstery or carpet. Follow the instruc-tions provided with the soap. Do notbleach or re-dye the webbing becausethis may weaken it.

G230204AHM

Cleaning the interior window glass If the interior glass surfaces of the vehi-cle become fogged (that is, covered withan oily, greasy or waxy film), they shouldbe cleaned with a glass cleaner. Followthe directions on the glass cleaner con-tainer.

CAUTIONNever allow water or other liquidsto come in contact withelectrical/electronic componentsinside the vehicle as this may dam-age them.

CAUTIONUsing anything but recommendedcleaners and procedures may affectthe fabric’s appearance and fire-resistant properties.

CAUTIONDo not scrape or scratch the insideof the rear window. This may resultin damage of the rear windowdefroster grid.

7 59

Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMG270000AHM-EU

The emission control system of yourvehicle is covered by a written limitedwarranty. Please see the warranty infor-mation contained in the Warranty &Maintenance booklet in your vehicle.Your vehicle is equipped with an emis-sion control system to meet all applicableemission regulations.There are three emission control sys-tems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system(2) Evaporative emission control system(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function ofthe emission control systems, it is rec-ommended that you have your vehicleinspected and maintained by an author-ized KIA dealer in accordance with themaintenance schedule in this manual.

Caution for the Inspection andMaintenance Test (With ElectronicStability Control (ESC) system)• To prevent the vehicle from misfir-

ing during dynamometer testing,turn the Electronic Stability Control(ESC) system off by pressing theESC switch.

• After dynamometer testing is com-pleted, turn the ESC system back onby pressing the ESC switch again.

G270100AUN

1. Crankcase emission controlsystem

The positive crankcase ventilation sys-tem is employed to prevent air pollutioncaused by blow-by gases being emittedfrom the crankcase. This system suppliesfresh filtered air to the crankcase throughthe air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,which then pass through the PCV valveinto the induction system.

G270200AUN

2. Evaporative emission control(including ORVR: OnboardRefueling Vapor Recovery) system

The Evaporative Emission ControlSystem is designed to prevent fuelvapors from escaping into the atmos-phere.(The ORVR system is designed to allowthe vapors from the fuel tank to beloaded into a canister while refueling atthe gas station, preventing the escape offuel vapors into the atmosphere.)

Maintenance

607

G270201AUN

CanisterFuel vapors generated inside the fueltank are absorbed and stored in theonboard canister. When the engine isrunning, the fuel vapors absorbed in thecanister are drawn into the surge tankthrough the purge control solenoid valve.

G270202AHM

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)The purge control solenoid valve is con-trolled by the Engine Control Module(ECM); when the engine coolant temper-ature is low during idling, the PCSV clos-es so that evaporated fuel is not takeninto the engine. After the engine warmsup during ordinary driving, the PCSVopens to introduce evaporated fuel to theengine.

G270300AUN

3. Exhaust emission control system

The Exhaust Emission Control System isa highly effective system which controlsexhaust emissions while maintaininggood vehicle performance.

G270301AUN

Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified.Modification of your vehicle could affectits performance, safety or durability andmay even violate governmental safetyand emissions regulations.In addition, damage or performanceproblems resulting from any modificationmay not be covered under warranty.

G270302AUN

Engine exhaust gas precautions(carbon monoxide) • Carbon monoxide can be present with

other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if yousmell exhaust fumes of any kind insideyour vehicle, have it inspected andrepaired immediately. If you ever sus-pect exhaust fumes are coming intoyour vehicle, drive it only with all thewindows fully open. Have your vehiclechecked and repaired immediately.

WARNING - ExhaustEngine exhaust gases contain car-bon monoxide (CO). Though color-less and odorless, it is dangerousand could be lethal if inhaled.Follow the instructions on thispage to avoid CO poisoning.

7 61

Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in confinedor closed areas (such as garages) anymore than what is necessary to movethe vehicle in or out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in anopen area for more than a short timewith the engine running, adjust theventilation system (as needed) to drawoutside air into the vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi-cle for any extended time with theengine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to start,excessive attempts to restart theengine may cause damage to theemission control system.

G270303BUN

Operating precautions for catalyticconverters (if equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalyticconverter emission control device.Therefore, the following precautionsmust be observed:• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for gaso-

line engines.• Do not operate the vehicle when there

are signs of engine malfunction, suchas misfire or a noticeable loss of per-formance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the engine.Examples of misuse are coasting withthe ignition off and descending steepgrades in gear with the ignition off.

• Do not operate the engine at high idlespeed for extended periods (5 minutesor more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any partof the engine or emission control sys-tem. All inspections and adjustmentsmust be made by an authorized KIAdealer.

• Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.If you run out of gasoline, it couldcause the engine to misfire and resultin excessive loading of the catalyticconverter.

Failure to observe these precautionscould result in damage to the catalyticconverter and to your vehicle.Additionally, such actions could void yourwarranties.

WARNING - FireA hot exhaust system can igniteflammable items under your vehi-cle. Do not park, idle or drive thevehicle over or near flammableobjects, such as grass, vegetation,paper, leaves, etc.

8

Dimensions / 8-2Bulb wattage / 8-2Tires and wheels / 8-3Recommended lubricants and capacities / 8-4Vehicle identification number (VIN) / 8-6Vehicle certification label / 8-6Tire specification and pressure label / 8-7Engine number / 8-7



28

DIMENSIONS

Light Bulb WattageHeadlights (Low) 55Headlights (High) 55Front turn signal lights / Position light 28/8Side repeater lights LEDFront side marker lights 5Front fog lights* 27Stop and tail lights 27/8Tail light* 8Rear turn signal lights 27Back-up lights 16Rear side marker lights* 8High mounted stop light LEDLicense plate lights 5Map lamps 6Room lamps 10Luggage lamp* 5Glove box lamp* 5Vanity mirror lamps* 5Door courtesy lamps* 5

BULB WATTAGE

* : If equipped

I030000AHM-EU

Item mm (in)

Overall length 4880 (192.1) / 4885 (192.3)*1

Overall width 1915 (75.3)

Overall height 1765 (69.4) / 1810 (71.2)*2

Front tread 1630 (64.1)

Rear tread 1640 (64.6)

Wheelbase 2895 (114)

*1 : with trailer hitch*2 : with roof rack

I010000AHM-EU

8 3


TIRES AND WHEELSI020000AHM-EU

Front Rear Front Rear

P245/70R17 7.0J×17 220 220 230 230

P265/60R18 7.5J×18 (32) (32) (33) (33)

T175/90R17 4T×17420 420

(60) (60)

Full sizetire

Compactspare tire

Wheel lug nut

torque

kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)Normal speed/load High speed/Maximum load

Cold tire inflation pressure kPa (psi)

9~11

(65~79, 88~107)-

ItemTire

sizeWheel size


48

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIESI040000BHM-EC

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correctlubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing

the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’stime, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

*3 The volume may differ according to the vehicle. For more details, refer to your authorized KIA dealer.

Lubricant Volume ClassificationEngine oil *1 *2 3.8 Engine 5.2 l (5.49 US qt.)

API Service SL or SM, ILSAC GF-3 or above(drain and refill) 4.6 Engine 6.7 l (7.0 US qt.)

3.8 Engine 10.0 l (10.56 US qt.) APOLLOIL ATF RED-1KAutomatic transmission fluid

4.6 Engine 9.3 l (9.85 US qt.) SHELL ATF M1375.4

Power steering 0.9 l (0.95 US qt.) PSF-3

Coolant 3.8 Engine 10.7 l (11.3 US qt.) Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water4.6 Engine 14.0 l (14.7 US qt.) (Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)

Brake fluid 0.7~0.8 l (0.7~0.8 US qt.) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Differential oil

Front 1.3~1.4 l (1.4~1.5 US qt.)

3.8L*3 1.4~1.5 l (1.5~1.6 US qt.) or HYPOID GEAR OILRear 1.7~1.9 l (1.9~2.0 US qt.) SAE 90, API GL-5

4.6L 1.7~1.9 l (1.9~2.0 US qt.)Transfer case oil Part-time

1.5~1.7 l (1.6~1.8 US qt.)ATF DEXRON III or equivalent

(4WD) Full-time ATF MOBILFLUID LT or equivalentFuel 78 l (20.6 US gal.) -

8 5


I040100BUN-EU

Recommended SAE viscositynumber

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has aneffect on fuel economy and cold weatheroperating (engine start and engine oilflowability). Lower viscosity engine oilscan provide better fuel economy and coldweather performance, however, higherviscosity engine oils are required for sat-isfactory lubrication in hot weather. Usingoils of any viscosity other than those rec-ommended could result in engine dam-age.

When choosing an oil, consider the rangeof temperature your vehicle will be oper-ated in before the next oil change.Proceed to select the recommended oilviscosity from the chart.CAUTION

Always be sure to clean the areaaround any filler plug, drain plug, ordipstick before checking or drain-ing any lubricant. This is especiallyimportant in dusty or sandy areasand when the vehicle is used onunpaved roads. Cleaning the plugand dipstick areas will prevent dirtand grit from entering the engineand other mechanisms that couldbe damaged.

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

Gasoline Engine Oil *1

°C(°F)

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 (API SL, SM / ILSAC GF-3 or above). However, if the engine oil is not available inyour country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

10W-30

5W-20, 5W-30


68

H010000AHM

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isthe number used in registering your carand in all legal matters pertaining to itsownership, etc.

VEHICLE CERTIFICATIONLABEL

H020000AUN

The vehicle certification label attachedon the driver’s (or front passenger’s) sidecenter pillar gives the vehicle identifica-tion number (VIN).

OHM088002NOHM088004 OHM088008N

OHM088001

Frame number

Frame number (if equipped)

VIN label (if equipped)

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

The VIN is also on a plate attached tothe top of the dashboard. The numberon the plate can easily be seen throughthe windshield from outside.

8 7


H030000AUN

The tires supplied on your new vehicleare chosen to provide the best perform-ance for normal driving.The tire label located on the driver's sidecenter pillar gives the tire pressures rec-ommended for your car.

H04000AUN

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown in the drawing.

OHM088005N

TIRE SPECIFICATION ANDPRESSURE LABEL

ENGINE NUMBER

OHM088006N

OHM089007

■ 3.8L

■ 4.6L

IIndex

Index

2I

Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system········3-37Air cleaner ·····································································7-21Appearance care·····························································7-53Audio system ·······························································4-123Automatic climate control system ·································4-97Automatic transmission ·················································5-12

Battery············································································7-25Before driving··································································5-3Brake fluid ·····································································7-18Brake system··································································5-27Bulb wattage ····································································8-2

Child restraint system ····················································3-29Climate control air filter ················································7-21Cruise control system ····················································5-39

Defroster ········································································4-82Dimensions ······································································8-2Door locks······································································4-15Driver position memory system ····································4-34

Economical operation ····················································5-43Emergency starting ··························································6-4Emission control system················································7-67Engine compartment ················································2-4, 7-2Engine coolant ·······························································7-15Engine number·································································8-7Engine oil·······································································7-14ENGINE START/STOP button ·······································5-6Explanation of scheduled maintenance items················7-11Exterior feature ····························································4-121

Four wheel drive (4WD) ···············································5-18Fuel filler lid ··································································4-27Fuel requirements ····························································1-3Fuses ··············································································7-42

Hazard warning flasher··················································4-70Hood···············································································4-25How to use this manual ···················································1-2

If the engine overheats·····················································6-6

A E

F

H

I

B

C

D

I 3

Index

If the engine will not start ···············································6-3If you have a flat tire ·····················································6-12In case of an emergency while driving····························6-2Indicator symbols on the instrument cluster ···················1-6Instrument cluster ··························································4-48Instrument panel overview ··············································2-3Interior features····························································4-114Interior light ···································································4-79Interior overview ·····························································2-2

Key positions ···································································5-4Keys ·················································································4-3

Lighting··········································································4-71

Maintenance services·······················································7-4Manual climate control system······································4-84Mirrors ···········································································4-39

Owner maintenance ·························································7-5

Parking brake ································································7-20Power adjustable pedals·················································4-36Power steering fluid·······················································7-19

Rear parking assist system·············································4-67Rear seat entertainment system (RSE) ························4-153Rearview camera ···························································4-70Recommended lubricants and capacities·························8-4Remote keyless entry·····················································4-10Road warning···································································6-2

Seat belts ········································································3-17Seats ·················································································3-2Smart key ·········································································4-7Special driving conditions ·············································5-45Starting the engine ···························································5-9Steering wheel································································4-37Storage compartment ···················································4-111Sunroof···········································································4-30

Tailgate···········································································4-19

K

L

M

O

P

R

S

T

Index

4I

Theft-alarm system ························································4-13Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ·······················6-7Tire specification and pressure label ·······························8-7Tires and wheels·····················································7-28, 8-3Towing ···········································································6-22Trailer towing ································································5-52

Vehicle break-in process ··················································1-5Vehicle certification label ················································8-6Vehicle handling instructions···········································1-5Vehicle identification number (VIN)·······························8-6Vehicle load limit···························································5-61Vehicle weight ·······························································5-66

Washer fluid···································································7-20Windows ········································································4-21Windshield defrosting and defogging··························4-108Winter driving································································5-49Wiper blades ··································································7-22Wipers and washers ·······················································4-76

V

W

kia borrego manual

Documents